BREAKING
AND
RIDING
WITH MILITARY COMMENTARIES
JAMES FILUS
TUFTS UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES
3 9090 014 548 438
BREAKING AND RIDING
Webster Family Library of Veterinary Medicine
Qy^. Medicine at
Breaking and Riding
WITH MILITARY COMMENTARIES
JAMES FI LLIS
ECUYER EN CHEl" TO THE CENTRAL CaVALRV ScHOOL AT ST. PETERSBURG
Translated by
M. H. HAYES, F.R.C. V.S.
Author of "Points of the Horse," "Veterinary Notes for
Horse Owners," "Riding and Hunting," k.c.
WITH SEVENTY ILLUSTRATIONS
NEW YORK
CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS
1902
All Riehts Rese}-ved
PRINTED BY KELLY'S DIRECTORIES
LONDON AND KINGSTON
PREFACE.
In this book, I do not presume to discuss scientific subjects.
I am simply a horseman who has been among horses for
sixty years, who knows them, loves them, and is capable of
reasoning about them.
The fundamental principle of the studies which I submit to
the public is that it is necessary for a horse to be correctly
balanced and light in forward movements and propulsion, in
order that the rider may obtain the most powerful effects
with the least exertion.
My method of equitation consists in distribution of weight
by the height of the neck bent at the poll and not at the
withers ; propulsion by means of the hocks being brought
under the body ; and lightness by the loosening of the
lower jaw. When we know this, we know everything, and
we know^ nothing. We know everything, because these
principles are of universal application ; and we know
nothing, because they have to be applied practically.
Practice cannot be taught in a book ; but I will try to set
forth principles. Probably, I would not have had the bold-
ness to do this, had not one of my pupils entreated me to
write this book ; because he had been greatly struck with
viii PREFACE.
the aptness of the explanation which I gave him respecting
the details of the breaking lessons.
In judging this work, I trust that my readers will give it
the attention it deserves, as the result of sixty years' serious
study and hard practical work.
I crave the indulgence of the public, and the impartiality
of my reviewers.
JAMES FILLIS.
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
Mr. Fill is, at whose request I have had the pleasure of
translating his Principes de Dressage et d^ Equitation, is
acknowledged throughout Europe as the greatest high school
rider of all time. In fact, he has had the honour of giving
private riding exhibitions before The Emperor and Empress
of Germany, The Tsar, President Carnot, The Queen of
Belgium, The King and Crown Prince of Denmark, and the
Emperor of Austria, all of whom have accorded him special
marks of their appreciation of his unrivalled ability.
Having fortunately had many opportunities of seeing Mr.
Fillis ride both in Germany and at the St. Petersburg Cavalry
Riding School, where he is Eaiyer en chef, I can full}'
endorse the correctness of the good opinion held about him
by his most enthusiastic admirers.
A school rider obtains control and guidance by the com-
bined action of hands and legs ; but an ordinary horseman
depends almost entirely on the reins for collecting and
directing his mount, and consequently his power over the
animal is insufficient for military and polo requirements.
With extremely few exceptions, school riders abuse their
power, and sacrifice freedom of movement to exaggerated
X TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
control, with the, result, in many cases, of getting their animals
behind their bits and straining their hocks. Such men ride
in a mechanical manner, which is inelegant in a school
or circus, and is entirely unsuited for work in the open. Mr.
Fillis, on the contrary, acting on his motto " e7i avant "
(forward), has succeeded in showing how a horse can be made
clever in his movements, without in any way diminishing
his usefulness on the road or over a country. I therefore
trust that all English-speaking horsemen, and especially
cavalrymen and polo players, will profit by the valuable
instruction which he now puts before them.
M. H. HAYES.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Preface vii
Translator's Preface ix
CHAPTER I.
HORSE AND MAN.
The Horse — Feeding — Intelligence of the Horse — Influence of a Alan's
expression of face on a Horse — Influence of the Human Voice on a
Horse — Making much of a ttorse— Punishment — Bitting — Martin-
gale — Saddle — Stirrups — Cutting Whip — Spurs — Man's Seat —
Lady's Seat . . . . . . . . . . . i to 31
CHAPTER H.
ORDINARY RIDING.
Lunging a Horse — Close work, advancing — Collecting a Horse and
direct Flexion — Objects to be obtained by direct Flexion — Making
a Horse quiet to mount — How to hold the Reins — Teaching a
Horse by the Whip to obey legs and spurs — Horse mounted, first
Defences, means for overcoming them — The Walk — To halt and
stand still — Changes of Direction — Lateral flexions — Objects of
Lateral flexions — Rotation of the Croup and Shoulders — School
Walk — The rein back — The ramenei-, collection, rassembler, and
equestrian tact — Side steps and two tracks — The trot — The canter
— Voltes and demi voltes at the canter- — Changes of leg — The
Hack 32 to 183
CHAPTER ni.
HORSES WITH VICES.
Nervous Horses — Horses which throw their heads about— Horses which
run away . . . . . . . - . . 184 to 194
JUMPING
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IV.
195 to 205
FLAT RACING
CHAPTER V.
206 to 209
THE HUNTER
CHAPTER VI.
210 to 212
THE ARMY HORSE
CHAPTER VII.
213 to 235
CHAPTER VIII.
HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
The Spanish walk — Reversed pirouettes on three legs— Reversed and
ordinary pirouettes with the feet crossed — Reining back without
reins — Rocking the forehand — Rocking the haunches — Spanish trot
— Shoulder-in at the canter — Pirouettes at the canter^ — Changes of
leg at each stride — Changes of leg without gaining ground — Piaffers
and passages — Differences between the passage and Spanish trot —
Serpentine at the Trot — Canter on three legs — Passage to the rear —
See-saw piaffer — Canter without gaining ground and canter to the
rear — New school movements — School horse for ladies . . 236 to 331
CHAPTER IX.
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER
332 to 344
CHAPTER X.
TESTS OF HORSEMANSHIP
• 345 t^' 347
CHAPTER XL
WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS
348 to 356
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIG.
I.
2.
3-
4-
5-
6.
7-
8.
9-
lO.
II.
12.
13-
14.
15-
16.
17-
18.
19.
20.
Leading a horse forward .....
Jaw contracted ......
Jaw and bit free ......
Going forward when mobihsing the lower jaw, so
prevent the horse getting behind his bit
Muzzle on a line with upper part of shoulder
Correct preparation for direct flexion
Preparation for Baucher's direct flexion
Incorrect and frequently employed flexion
Lowering the head — a faulty practice
jj 53 jj • •
Direct flexion when going forward .
Baucher's flexion when mounted
Correct flexion when mounted ....
Exaggerated example of Baucher's incorrect flexion
Proper way to mount
Equal tension on all four reins
Action of the curb .
Action of the snaffle
Action of the off curb rein
Action of the near curb rein
as to
PAGE
41
45
47
49
51
55
55
57
57
59
59
(>Z
64
65
67
71
71
71
73
73
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
21. Separating the curb and snaffle reins
2 2. Passing the right hand between the off curb rein and off
snaffle rein ......
23. Closing the hand on the off curb and off snaffle rein
24. Separating the reins
25. Doubler .....
26. Volte
27. Demi-volte ....
28. Diagonal change of hand
29. Reversed change of hand
30. Counter-change of hand
31. Preparation for lateral flexion ; jaw contracted
32. Lateral flexion ; jaw relaxed
2iZ- Correct lateral flexion
34. Incorrect lateral flexion
35. Correct lateral flexion when mounted
36. Baucher's lateral flexion when mounted
37. Incorrect lateral flexion
38. Lateral effects in rotation of crop and shoulders
39. Direct effects ,, ,, „
40. Diagonal „ „
41. On " two tracks " at the school walk, from right to left
42. „ „ „ „ left to right
43. First time of the canter ; near hind support
44. Second time of the canter ; left diagonal in support
45. Third time of the canter ; off fore in support
46. Clearing a fence .......
47. Horse raising his forehand a good deal when jumping
PAGE
73
75
75
75
90
91
92
93
94
95
97
99
lOI
103
105
106
107
108
109
no
T4I
143
160
161
162
199
200
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
48. Horse raising his croup when clearing a fence
49. Horse and rider being drowned
50. Rider making his horse swim according to
Filhs' method
51. Spanish trot
52- „ „ ■ '
53. Shoulder-in at the canter
54- )» >) )j
55" '» " )'
56. Passage ; right diagonal in the air .
57- „ ; left
58. „ on " two tracks "
59' j» )j )) • •
60. Piaffer ......
61. ,,
62. Teaching the piaffer by means of a cuttin
63. Cantering to the left on three legs ,
64. „ „ right
65. Half-rear
66. See-saw piaffer
67. „ „ . .
68. Cantering to the rear
69. „ „ right on three legs to the rear
whip
Mr.
James
PAGE
201
231
232
253
255
263
265
267
277
279
283
285
289
291
299
307
309
311
315
317
323
327
329
BREAKING AND RIDING.
CHAPTER I.
HORSE AND MAN.
The Horse — Feeding — Intelligence of the Horse — Influence of a Man's expres-
sion of face on a Horse — Influence of the Human Voice on a Horse —
Making much of a Horse — Punishment — Bitting — Martingale — Saddle —
Stirrups — Cutting Whip — Spurs — Man's Seat — Lady's Seat.
THE HORSE.
Although I break in only thorough-breds for my own use ;
I in no way assume that three-quarter or half-breds cannot be
good riding horses. I do not care for very big animals, and
prefer those about 15.2, or, say from 15.1 to 15.3. When
examining a horse, I at first take a general view of him at
a distance of a few yards. If the first impression is pleasing,
I go over his various points in detail, with a fairly liberal spirit,
as regards trifling faults ; but if it is not favourable, I become all
the more critical. In any case, it is hopeless to expect perfec-
tion. In this first general examination, we should be particularly
careful to see how he moves at the walk, trot and canter, both
when led and ridden.
Some horses appear badly shaped when standing still ; but
become good-looking, light and active as soon as they begin
to move. Others, which seem almost perfect in repose, are
heavy and awkward in their paces. I prefer the former to the
latter, because they can utilise what they have got.
I
2 HORSE AND MAN.
I like a handsome head, long and light neck, prominent
withers, short and strong back and loins, long croup, long and
oblique shoulders, close coupling between the point of the hip
and the last rib, hocks well let down, short canon bones, long
fore arms, and the pasterns fairly long. These desirable
points are rarely found in one animal. A horse should be
close to the ground, which he will be when the distance from
the brisket to the ground will be equal to that from the
withers to the brisket. A horse which is high off the ground
is generally clumsy in his movements, and liable to stumble.
I would have nothing to do with a horse whose fetlock and
pastern joints are stiff, because he would be deficient in elas-
ticity, would drag his feet, and would consequently be
liable to trip.
I take particular care to see that the heels are not con-
tracted. In order to prevent my horses acquiring this defect,
I do not have them shod when they work on soft ground, in
which case the heels remain well apart, on account of the
frog being subjected to pressure. I always have my horses
shod with tips, the ends of which are imbedded into the wall
at the heels ; and I thus prevent them having their heels con-
tracted and their feet becoming diseased.
Horses are like men ; having obtained physical perfection
in them, we further require good temper and courage.
The highest mental qualification of a horse is to be a free-
goer ; because such an animal, contrary to what is often
thought, is neither irritable nor sulky. I will again refer to
this point. At present I confine myself to stating that such
a horse is valuable, even if his make and shape are only
moderate. If an animal has not the essential requirement of
being always ready to go forward, he is useless, although he
may be a perfect picture to look at.
I like to begin breaking a horse when he is two off and not
more than three years old, and to buy if possible in or near
THE HORSE. 3
Septembar, at which time the animal would be about two and
a-half years old. At that age he would have done little or
no work, and would consequently be sound. Besides, it is
easy to get such horses, because there are a large number of
young thorough-breds which are capable of becoming mar-
vellously good horses for riding-school purposes and other
work, although they might be of no use on a race-course.
Also, for many other reasons, we can get a large choice of
thorough-breds at that age.
I never buy mares, because they often become peevish,
especially when touched with the spurs. I always have my
horses " added to the list," because thorough-bred entires are
greatly inclined to rush at every animal they meet, which is a
habit that is not pleasant for their riders, and they are always
ready to get on their hind legs. Besides, many of the horses
which I break are required for ladies, who should never be
allowed to ride a rearer. These objections do not generally
apply to Arab and Trakene (German) entires, which live with
mares and pay little or no attention to them. In course of
time the thorough-bred entire gets heavy in front and be-
comes poor behind. A riding horse should, on the contrary,
have his hind quarters well developed and his forehand light.
Thorough-bred stallions which are used for stud purposes
preserve their proper proportions, although they get very fat.
Everyone knows that a gelding is much more quiet than an
entire.
After the hot weather, I send my young horses to be cas-
trated at the Veterinary College of Alfort, where they remain
a fortnight, and afterwards I turn them out to grass for three
months and a-half at a place where they are properly looked
after. I do not put even a saddle on their backs during
these four months, after which I begin their education in the
quietest manner possible.
When I have taught them to go collectedly when walking,
I*
4 HORSE AND MAN.
trotting, cantering, turning, reining back, and moving from
one side to the other for a few steps, I begin to take them out-
side, and they will then need only a few days to make* them
pleasant to ride in the open. In this way, I first of all make
them into hacks. During the following two or three months
I repeat, in the open air, the work which my horses have
learned in the school, so as to make them light and supple in
their natural paces. Thus, from September to the end of
December, nothing but care and repose ; from January to
March, breaking in the school ; from April to June, confirma-
tion, outside, of the work learned during the preceding
months. In Jul}^ I send my horses for their holiday to
grass, leave them loose in the fields, and give them oats.
In August I resume work in the open, and as the animals
have rested and got strong, I begin at the same time high
school riding. My horses being handy, light and well
balanced, their progress is rapid, and I generally finish their
school training towards the end of December, with a limit of
two or three months one way or the other, according to the
difficulties which I have to overcome and the extent of the
instruction. I then give them another holiday of a fortnight
and immediately after that I take them out hunting if pos-
sible. I do not consider their education complete until I
have tested them in all these wa)-s.
In this manner I obtain an excellent hack for spring and
summer, a hard}' hunter for autumn, and a pleasant school
horse for winter.
FEEDING.
I feed my horses liberally, especially as regards oats, of
which I giv^e them lo quarterns a day. This makes them
lively, but not more so than I wish. I give them only a small
quantity of oats in the morning, so as not to overload their
stomachs ; but I allow them all they can eat in the evening,
INTELLIGENCE OF THE HORSE. 5
which is their time of rest. Not being disturbed, they eat
slowly and thoroughly chew their food, which on that account
becomes properly digested.
I give one-and-a-half quarterns in the morning, three-and-a-
half at noon, and five in the evening. The morning oats is
given at least two hours before work, so that the stomach of
the animal may be empty at that time. For the same object
I rack him up, so that he may not eat his bedding. Half an
hour after work I give each horse 2 or 3 lbs. of hay ; at noon
three-quarters of a bucket of water ; and after that, oats. At
four o'clock in the afternoon, each horse gets a bundle of straw
as bedding ; at five o'clock. 2 or 3 lbs. of hay ; and finally, at
seven o'clock in the evening, the same quantity of water as at
noon, and the evening ration of oats, instead of which I give,
twice a week, a bran mash.
INTELLIGENCE OF THE HORSE.
The great difficulty in breaking is to make the horse under-
stand what we want him to do, which is no easy matter,
because a horse, contrary to what many think, has only a small
supply of intelligence. His only well-developed mental quality
is his memory, which is particularly acute, and should there-
fore be specially utilised.
A horse is incapable of affection for man : he possesses only
habits, which he often acquires far too easily, and frequently
sticks to them with too much persistence, a fact we should
always bear in mind. On this subject I have made hundreds
of experiments. For instance, one of my friends had a horse
which went to him when he called him, neighed when he
entered the stable, etc. He averred that this animal was par-
ticularly attached to him, and that the horse would pine away
if he left him. Having learned all about the habits of the
horse from the owner, I begged him to lend me the animal,
which I took to my stable, where I treated him exactly as he
6 HORSE AND MAN.
had been treated in his own stable. On the following day I
worked him during periods of time similar to those his owner
had adojDted ; I gave him carrots according to established
custom ; I imitated the voice of his master ; and brought him
his food at the accustomed times. On the following day I
re-assumed my natural tone of voice, and in forty-eight hours
the animal made similar manifestations of affection to me as
he had done to his master, whose loss he did not appear to
feel in the slightest degree.
After the morning lesson I give a large quantity of carrots
to my horses, who neigh the moment I speak to them on
entering the stable. If a stranger accompanies me on these
occasions, he will always tell me that the animals recognise me
and love me, which is a mistake ; because if another person
takes my place in distributing the carrots at the usual hour, the
horses will not notice my absence. This can easily be proved
by the fact that if I go into the stable a few minutes after they
have finished eating, the}' will not take the slightest notice of
my arrival. I could give a hundred other instances of the in-
difference of horses towards those who tend them or ride them.
This is not a matter of regret ; for if horses were differently
constituted, the)^ ^\•ould be willing to obey only one master.
INFLUENCE OF A MAN'S EXFRESSION OF FACE
ON A HORSE.
Despite many arguments to the contrar)-, I am thoroughly
convinced that the human expression of face has no influence
on a horse, who pays no attention to one's look, whether it is
hard, angry, soft or caressing. I have proved this fact by
many experiments on young and old animals ; and I can
certify that if a person who is looking at a horse works only
the muscles of his face, without moving his body or limbs, the
animal will not take the slightest notice of the changes of
expression.
INFLUENCE OF THE HUMAN VOICE. 7
I have scores of times tried the eftect of giving a horse an
angry look and of smiling on him without any result
whatsoever. If you make the most horrible grimaces at }"our
horses or stick your tongue out at them, }-ou will find that
they will take absolutely no notice of such a proceeding, but
they will be quick to perceive any movement of the body, and
especially of the hand.
INFLUENCE OF THE PIUMAN VOICE ON A HORSE.
The human voice has a great influence on a horse, but of
course it is only the tone which he remembers. The sweetest
words, repeated in a short, high tone, will frighten him, and the
most horrible threats, uttered in a soft voice, will soothe him. The
voice is the most useful help for breaking a horse " at liberty,"
in which case he is turned loose in a riding school, circus, or
other suitable enclosure. Thus, to teach a horse at liberty to
move forward at a walk, trot or canter, one says : " walk," in a
comparatively weak voice ; " trot," in a higher voice ; and
" canter ! " in a tone of command. You may say " canter "
in a soft voice, and the horse will remain at the walk ; but if
you say " walk ! " in a high tone, the animal will immediately
strike off into the canter.
The voice is also of great use when breaking a horse which
one is riding. For instance, if my mount kicks, rears, or plays up
in any other way, I correct him with whip or spurs, and speak to
him, at the same time, in a tone of reproof, and he thus soon
becomes attentive to my voice. If he makes a mistake, or
tries on a " defence," it will generally be enough for me to
raise my voice, which, by reminding him of the previous
punishment, will make him quiet. B}- acting in this manner,
I save him from fresh punishment.
The voice can be used not only for correction, but also
to encourage and quieten a horse, in which case a pat
on the neck of the horse will help to aid its good effect.
8 HORSE AND MAN.
Its action is all the more useful because it can be employed
in all cases with a varied choice of tone. A rider cannot,
on the contrary, always bring his hands and legs into
play.
Let us suppose that a hot-headed, impetuous horse which
one is riding, gets startled and becomes maddened in a
place where there are several carriages, and that one cannot
get him out and steady him by means of the reins and legs.
The voice, however, will calm him down, if he has been
trained to obey it.
The effect of the voice has often been a great help to me,
and has brought me out of many a difficulty.
I like impetuous horses, and I rarely use any others. I
make them sufficiently quiet to carry ladies ; but I never
employ them for this purpose until I am certain that my voice
will soothe them when they are excited. I have avoided
accidents by always acting in this manner.
MAKING MUCPI OF A HORSE.
The good effect of " making much " of a horse should
not be neglected, as we shall see further on. The
education of the horse is based on the principles of reward
and punishment. Making much of a horse gives him con-
fidence, by placing the rider in direct contact with him
otherwise than by impulsion.
All horses, even the most impatient, accept a pat on the
neck, which is therefore the place the rider should caress.
The pats on the neck should be given forcibly enough to
attract the attention of the horse, but without hurting the
animal. We should avoid touching him too lightly, which
might only have the effect of tickling him.
A pat on the neck should be given at an appropriate time,
that is to say, immediately after an act of obedience on the
part of the horse, in the same manner as punishment should
PUNISHMENT. 9
promptly follow disobedience. The moment he yields, give
him his proper reward by patting him on the neck and
slackening the reins, which will greatly facilitate the process
of breaking. To obtain its full effect, a pat on the neck
should be accompanied by the voice. A combination of
these two soothing means will produce the best possible
effect and, as a rule, will accomplish its object.
PUNISHMENT.
The education of a horse, as I have already said, depends
entirely on the manner in which the rider applies the
principles of reward and punishment ; the appropriate appli-
cation of the latter being even more essential to success
than that of the former. Above all things, the rider of a
difficult horse should never lose his temper. When a horse
deserves punishment, he should get it with an amount of
severity which might be regarded as the outcome of anger,
but which should be proportionate to the offence. In fact,
we should treat horses as we do children. We all know that
nothing is worse than to punish a child when we are in a
rage. A horse can in no case understand the feeling which
prompts a man to punish him, and he will remember only the
pain he has suffered and the occasion on which it was
inflicted. His intelligence enables him to connect his action
with the punishment it provoked ; but it does not allow him
to go further than that. On this account, if punishment is
not administered at the precise moment the fault is com-
mitted, it will lose all its good effect, and will be an element
of confusion in the memory of the animal. For instance,
if a horse which kicks receives punishment when his hind
legs are off the ground, he will remember that he got hurt
for kicking. If, on the contrary, the punishment is received
after his hind legs have come down, he will be unable to
connect in his mind the ideas of these two acts ; in fact, the
lo HORSE AND MAN.
probability is that he will tr}', by a fresh kick, to get rid of
the person who is hitting him.
I have said that every deliberate act of disobedience com-
mitted by a horse should be punished ; but I do not hesitate
to add that it is better not to punish him than to do it too
late. Both are bad, but it is necessary to choose the lesser of
the two evils.
It is also important to find out what is the motive which
has caused a horse either to wilfully disobey or to act on the
defensive ; in other words, to find out whether he is
vicious or in pain. Thus, if a horse kicks because his loins or
hocks are painful, we would not be justified in punishing
him, and should do everything to relieve his suffering.
But if the kicking is a vice, we ought to severely correct
him the moment it is practised, and, to prevent it, we should
forcibly raise his head and neck in order to put the weight on
his hind quarters.
BITTING.
I have nothing particular to say about the snafifie, except
that it ought to be rather thick, so as to reduce its severity,
and that it should be placed at about an equal distance from
the bit and the corners of the mouth.
The form of a curb bit and the position it is placed in the
mouth are points of great importance. It is impossible to
decide at first glance what kind of curb will suit a young
horse best, and what position it should occupy in his mouth.
Baucher says that he would use the same kind of bit for all
kinds of horses, which statement is the consequence of his pet
theory that all horses have the same kind of mouth. I will
discuss this theory further on, and I will here content myself
with saying that even the most inexperienced horseman will
state that horses go better in one bit than in another, and
that certain animals will go kindly in a snaffle, but will resent
BITTING. II
the use of a rather severe curb. This is a generally acceisted
fact \\hich has been amply pro\ed. W'c can find the best
curb for a horse only by trial. But there are ahva)"s certain
general principles to help us in making our experiments,
which we may sum up as follows :
The curb which is used at the beginning of the breaking
should have a thick mouth-piece, low port, and short cheek-
pieces, so that it may be eas}' to the mouth. Its width
should be proportionate to that of the mouth of the horse. If
it is too narrow, the lips will be compressed by the cheek-
pieces. If it is too wide, the horse, either in pla}' or to relieve
the bars of his mouth from pressure, will bring it too much
over on one side of his mouth, so that a part of the port will
rest on one of the bars, and consequently the mouth-piece
will exert an uneven pressiu'e, which \\ill almost alwa}'s cause
the horse to carry his head sideways.
In order that the curb may fit properly, it should be wide
enough for the cheeks to keep clear of the lips on each side.
The mouth-piece should have an even feeling on both sides of
the mouth, and should be mid-way between the tushes and
the corners of the lips, and consequently it will be lower in
the mouth than the snaffle in the case of a double bridle.
Later on I shall point out some exceptions to this rule. The
lower ends of the cheek-pieces, yielding to the pull of the
reins, cause the upper ends to revolve forward, and thus to
produce pressure on the bars of the mouth. The curb-chain,
which prevents the upper ends of the cheeks from revolving
forward, increases the pressure on the bars proportionately
to its shortness. Hence, the length of the curb-chain should
be proportionate to the lightness of the horse's mouth, which
we are unable to estimate in the case of a perfectl)' "green "
horse. With such an animal, we should at first leave the
curb-chain very loose, as there will alwa}'s be time to take it
up. It would not, on the contrar}', be right to say that there
12 HORSE AND MAN.
is always time to slacken a tight curb-chain, which causes
pain that will continue to be felt by the horse after the curb-
chain has been let out. If, however, We begin with a loose
curb-chain, and gradually shorten it to the desired extent, we
shall avoid hurting the bars of the mouth and irritating the
horse to resistance, and we gain time. But if, at the begin-
ning of the work, we hurt or even irritate the bars by undue
pressure, we shall fail to obtain any of the required indica-
tions. By artificially increasing the sensitiveness of the bars,
we fail to estimate it correctly, and work on a wrong method
from the beginning. The bruising or even the mere irritation
of the bars does not disappear as soon as the work is finished
and the bridle taken off, but continues for a more or less long
period. Consequently, when the next lesson is given, the
bars are congested and painful. The rider will then be apt
to form an opinion of the effects he produces on the mouth of
the horse without taking into consideration that it is in an
abnormal condition, and he will increase the evil which has
been done, and he will become more and more unable to
correctly estimate what is the natural condition of the mouth.
In a word, he will do the very things he ought not to do.
From the foregoing observations we can see that, at the
beginning of the breaking, the curb-chain should be loose.
In fact, it is better to take it off.
The knowledge of the mouth of a "green" horse is an
important and delicate matter. In order" to gently feel the
mouth without spoiling it, we must begin with great lightness
of hand, and gradually increase the pressure up to the point
of making the horse feel it, which sensitiveness varies in
degree according to the animal. If a horse yields to the light
pressure of a curb which has no curb-chain, of what use is the
curb-chain, and what is the good of seeking for a more power-
ful means of restraint ?
I have thoroughly broken horses, not only for the manege.
MARTINGALE. 13
but also for outdoor work, without using a curb-chain, which
may remain hooked up on one of the curb-hooks, so that it
ma)^ be instantly used in case of need. As a rule, it
should not be employed unless the rider finds that he needs
its help. When he uses it, he should never put more tension
on it than is actualh' required ; the proper maximum being
when the curb-chain is tightened up, so that it makes an
angle of 45^ with the lower jaw.
As the tension of the curb-chain should be proportionate
of the sensitiveness of the bars, so should the pressure caused
by the pull of the reins be proportionate to the resistance.
If this resistance is slight, the effort to overcome it should be
light, and the point of its application should be high up on
the jaw. If the resistance is great, the effort should be
energetic, and it should be applied low down. Therefore,
without greatly altering the middle position which the
mouth-piece should occupy between the tushes and the
corners of the lips, we may raise or lower the mouth-piece so
that the horse may yield his jaw by, respectively, a light
feeling of the reins, or by a strong pull on them. In other
words, the softer the mouth is, the higher should be the
mouth-piece ; and the harder, the lower should it be placed.
In no case, however, should it press on, or even touch, the
corners of the lips or the tushes.
We learn from the foregoing remarks that the proper
tension of the curb-chain and the right position of the mouth-
piece in the mouth of a young horse can be found only from
experience, which should be gained from very slight effects
that can be gradually increased in severity as the case
may demand.
MARTINGALE.
The martingale prevents a horse from star-gazing and
throwing up his head, and helps the rider to guide him. If a
14 HORSE AND MAN.
horse is well broken he will not require its use. I would
recommend its employment only when the teacher has not
time or knowledge to properly break in a horse. It would be
well to put it on a horse which we are going to ride for the
first time, whether for hacking or for hunting, if we had
reason to think that he threw his head about or carried it
too high.
There are three kinds of martingales, namely, the standing
or fixed martingale buckled on to the nose-band, the running
martingale, and the standing martingale buckled on to the
rings of the snaffle. The first is the only one I would
recommend, because it produces its effect on the animal's
nose and not on his mouth, and, being unconnected with the
rider's hands, its use is consequently free from danger. It
ought to be long enough to allow the horse to carry his head
high, and short enough to prevent him bringing his nose in a
horizontal position, in which case the curb, by revolving from
below upwards, would produce no effect on the mouth. If
the martingale is too short, it will interfere with the move-
ments of the horse, and can then become dangerous,
especially if he does not go freely forward ; because when it
is fixed in this manner, he will draw his chin in towards his
breast so as to escape from its action.
The running martingale has two rings, through which pass
the reins of the snaffle, and occasionally those of the curb,
which is a very dangerous arrangement. It is therefore
connected with the hands of the rider and the mouth of the
horse. It may be of great service to experienced riders, but
on account of the strong effect which can be produced \\'ith it,
it is particularly dangerous for other people.
The martingale which buckles on to the rings of the
snaffle, being unyielding, is always dangerous, particularly if
the horse runs back ; because, in this case, it will continue to
pull ow his mouth. If he rears, which he \\\\\ have a ten-
SADDLE. 15
dency to do, in order to escape from the pressure of the
mouth-piece, this martingale will be liable to make him fall
backwards.
SADDLE.
I would not advise the use of a new saddle, which rarely
gives satisfaction to the rider. New leather is hard and stiff,
and consequently the seat of the saddle will not be com-
fortable. It is best to try several second-hand saddles, one of
which is certain to give satisfaction.
The seat of a saddle ought to be fairly straight. If it is
too high at the pommel the rider will be thrown back, and
if it is too high at the cantle he will be thrown for-
ward. I am also of opinion that a saddle should have
very little stuffing, so that the rider may get close to his
horse.
The length of the flaps should be proportionate to that of
the thighs of the rider. If they are too short, the rider might
hurt the calves of his legs. If too long, he will not be able to
feel the sides of the horse with his legs. The rider can please
himself as regards plain flaps or knee rolls, which are a
matter of habit and firmness of seat. I believe I was the first
to use a plain flap saddle for high school riding.
I always begin with a pupil by putting him on a French
saddle in preference to an English one, as he is able to get
better into it, and is consequently more at his ease. After
the beginner acquires a firm seat in a French saddle, I put
him in an English saddle covered with doeskin, and when he
is able to trot, canter and turn without rolling about, I give
him a plain English saddle to ride on.
STIRRUPS.
I never allow a pupil to use stirrups until he has acquired
a good seat at all paces, and in this respect I follow the
i6 HORSE AND MAN.
example of all the old riding masters, French and foreign.
We must admit that formerly riders had quite a different seat
to those of the present time. Stiffness has replaced the
pliability, ease and grace of the olden time, because pupils
have fallen into bad habits from the commencement of their
instruction, either from want of comprehension or on account
of being badly taught.
Not only the premature, but also the excessive use of the
stn-rups has other faults. I am of opinion that the great
majority of dangerous falls are caused by their abuse. For
example, Mr. X is run away with b}' his horse in the
Forest of Saint-Germain ; he sits well down into the saddle,
succeeds in stopping the animal, and starts into a trot on his
stirrups ; unfortunately, a stirrup leather breaks at this
moment, and Mr. X falls on his head and is killed. Every
horseman knows that the breaking of a stirrup leather can
cause a rider to fall on his head, only because the man had
put all his weight on the stirrups, and was consequently more
or less out of the saddle. If he was not bearing his weight
on the stirrups he might, no doubt, roll off, but the severity
of the fall would be more or less broken by the fact that the
knees would be gripping the flaps of the saddle. I would go
further and say that if a rider did not depend on his stirrups,
he would hardly ever fall off on account of a stirrup leather
breaking.
Let us take another example. Mr. Z , at Toulouse,
rides out of his stable at a walk ; his horse falls, and
Mr. Z is thrown forward on to his head and is killed.
We need no knowledge of riding to understand that if he had
been sitting in his saddle he could not have been thrown
forward with such violence. I hasten to add that I recall
these two well-remembered accidents, not in a spirit of
criticism, but in order to explain the sad consequences which
may arise from the abuse of the stirrups, and in the hope
STIRRUPS. 17
that my modest advice may render such accidents rare in
the future.
Standing on the stirrups is Hke standing on a spring-board,
in which case, if any violent movement is produced by the
horse, the rider is Hable to be shot forward as if from a cata-
pult, and ah^'ays on to his head. Even when the horse plunges
forward, the rider will be rareh' unseated if he is sitting well
into the saddle, with the weight resting on his seat. Then
the worst thing that can happen to him is to be shifted on to
the horse's neck, in which case he will fall softly ; but if he
is bearing his weight on the stirrups, with his legs straight,
nothing will be easier for the horse than to send him between
his ears. When the rider adopts this faulty position, his
body is carried forward, and the horse is able to plunge
as he likes, on account of the weight being taken off his
loins.
The rider who stands on his stirrups is in the position of a
gymnast standing on the hands of a comrade, whose business
is to give him the necessary propulsion for making a dangerous
leap. In order for him to be projected very far, it is
necessary for him to keep his body and legs straight, but
if he bends his knees he cannot go far. The stirrups
play a role similar to that of the hands of the gymnast who
is ready to give the propulsion. Hence, if the rider bends
his knees he will remain in the saddle.
We should bear in mind that if the pupil, before his legs
have got well down, is allowed to use the stirrups, he will not
be able to keep his feet in them. He will then make all sorts
of contortions in order to retain them, in which case, not onh'
the muscles of the legs, but also those of the body and face,
will become contracted, and the neck and the shoulders will
assume a characteristic form of stiffness.
Notwithstanding all the care which the teacher ma}^ take
later on to correct these faults, tlie pupil very rarely succeeds
2
i8 HORSE AND MAN.
in getting rid of them ; because it is extremely difficult, if not
impossible, to leave off a bad habit.
CUTTING WHIP.
I use the cutting whip only in work on foot, in order to
leach the horse to go forward, and to give way to the spur, but
I discard it the moment I mount. True horsemen require legs
and hands ; incompetent riders need a whip.
SPURS.
The box spur is the only spur of which I approve, because it
remains fixed in its place, and it can therefore be applied with
precision. All the other kinds are liable to become displaced,
either up or down, so that one is never certain of touching the
horse on the spot one wishes.
We ought to use dummy spurs (spurs with round heads), if
they are sufficient for our purpose, and we can replace them by
spurs with very blunt rowels, the sharpness of which should
be increased only when necessary as, for example, when the
horse does not answer to their touch.
Without trying them, it is difficult to find out the proper
length for the neck of the spurs, which should be short, if the
legs of the rider are short ; because, in this case, his heels will
always remain close to the animal's sides. If the rider has
long legs, he will be obliged to raise his heels when he wants
to use the spurs, which should have proportionately long
necks, so that he may have to shorten his legs as little as
possible.
man's seat.
As a rule, every one can acquire a good and strong seat,
but every one cannot become a fine and graceful horseman.
A pupil who has been well taught from the beginning, has
done his best to learn, has trotted without stirrups for several
MAN'S SEAT. 19
months, has ridden horses that were Hvely and difficult, with-
out being dangerous, will of necessity acquire a firm seat.
He will hold his head in a free and unconstrained position, so
that he can move it with ease in every direction. He will
keep it high in all ordinary paces and when jumping, and will
lower it a little, with the chin towards the breast, when going
fast. His eyes should preserve their mobility, and should not
become fixed in any one direction, so that they may take
notice of all the inequalities of ground, fences and other diffi-
culties which the horse may meet. He should keep his neck
supple, and his shoulders down and without contracting them,
as is often done. His arms should hang naturally down to
the elbows, which should be kept close to the sides, and
should on no account be turned outwards ; for the hands
cannot be kept light if the elbows are in this position.
Lightness of hand is absolutely necessary for using the reins
with precision and without jerking them. With the elbows
firmly fixed to the sides, it is easy to prevent the hands from
moving about.
A rider who has a good seat will keep his elbows at the
height of his waist, the insides of the wrists facing each other
and the fingers turned inwards. He should avoid rounding
the wrists, which would tend to bring the elbows away from
the sides, and would prevent him having a straight line of
communication with the horse's mouth. The action of the
bit on the mouth of the horse should be produced only by
the tightening and slackening of the fingers on the reins. A
rider who works his hands a good deal, does not know how to
use them ; but a man with good hands produces the necessary
effect by a simple movement of the wrist and fingers.
The rider ought to keep his body upright, but without any
stiffiiess, which prevents the independent action of the " aids "
(hands and legs). Stiffness in one part produces muscular
contraction of the whole body, which is a condition entirely
20 HORSE AND MAN.
opposed to good horsemanship. He should in no case hollow
out the back, because that will produce stiffness which is the
thing we should avoid. The loins (not the shoulders), on the
contrary, should be slightly rounded, so as to preserve their
elasticity. The chest should be kept in a natural position,
without being pressed out in an}- wa\% and the muscles of
the pelvis relaxed, which is the only means of obtaining ease.
The weight of the upper part of the body should be carried
b)' the buttocks, which are its only proper support. The legs
should be stretched well down, the thighs flat, the knees close
to the flaps of the saddle, and the toes turned slightly out-
wards, so that the horse may feel the leg before he is touched
with the spur. When the toes are turned too much inwards,
the calves of the legs will be forced outwards, and then the
rider will be able to use the spurs only by prods.
The fact of the knees forming a kind of fixed pivot will
give great mobilit}^ to the lower portion of the legs, which
should fall naturall}' from the knees, and should not be kept
close to the animal's sides. In order for the rider to be at his
ease, he should sit well down in the saddle, without hanging
on by his hands or gripping by his knees, which should grip
only when occasion demands. B)^ alwa}'s gripping with the
knees, the rider is made to assume a cramped position on
horseback. On the contrary, the seat should be maintained
by balance and not b}' gi'ip. When we use the leg, we should
use it from the knee to the heel. Fatigue of the muscles
above the knee is caused b)' stiffness and is a sign that the
seat is bad.
The rider will also appear cramped if his knees are too
high, if too low he will rest not on his buttocks, but on the
inner part of his thighs, which fact will increase the firm-
ness of his seat, because the entire len^'th of the le""s will be
applied to the horse. This seat can be used with advantage
by cavalry when charging, onl)' at the moment of meeting
MAN'S SEAT. 21
the enemy, because it helps them to avoid being displaced by
the shock. With this seat, it is difficult to keep close to the
horse when he changes from the canter to the trot. In con-
clusion, I may point out that a rider who has a good seat sits
on a saddle in the same manner as he would do on a chair.
When the rider uses stirrups, his toes ought to be higher
than his heels. Without stirrups, the feet ought to fall
naturally, and consequently the toes will be lower than the
heels. We may see that with the feet out of the stirrups, it is
impossible to keep the toes up without contracting (stiffening)
the muscles of the legs. In Germany, pupils are taught to keep
the toes higher than the heels, when riding without stirrups,
which practice gives German horsemen their characteristic
stiffness. I am aware that Germans are naturally stiff Even
a Frenchman made to ride in that manner would become
stiff.
The length of the stirrups should be proportionate to that
of the legs. The traditional plan of measuring the length of
the stirrups by that of the arm, affords a useful approxima-
tion which one has always to rectify when mounted. To do
this, it is necessary to take the feet out of the stirrups and to
leave the legs hanging down. Then the stirrup leathers will
be the correct length when the " tread " of the iron comes
just below the ankle joint. It is generally recommended to
keep the foot in contact with the internal side of the stirrup
iron. I place my foot at an equal distance from both sides of
the iron. We can give great suppleness to the ankle jcnnts by
working them in various directions, and can then let go or
pick up the irons very easily. In the open I ride with the
leathers one hole shorter than in the school, and then obtain
a better support in quick paces, especially when rising at the
trot. In the manege one requires to have the legs lower
down than in the open, so as to get the legs round the horse,
and it is also necessary to be entirely on the buttocks, in
22 HORSE AND MAN.-
order to catch each movement of the horse. We all know
that this feeling can be acquired only b\' long training.
Many physical qualities are necessar}- for obtaining a
strong and graceful seat. For instance, it is evident that
a stout, short man is less likely to ride well than one who is
sufficiently tall and slight. I say " sufficiently tall," because
it is a common error to think that one must be tall in order
to ride well. On the contrar}^, the taller the horseman, the
more difficulties will he have in riding. First of all, the
longer the body, the more easily can it be displaced, on
account of the height of the centre of gravity, and the harder
will it be for the equilibrium to be restored. Also, long legs
cannot adapt themselves to the sides of the horse so well as
those of medium length, because the feet are below the sides
of the horse, and if the rider wishes to use the spurs he is
obliged to bend his knees, in order to shorten his legs, which
action is ugly, and weakens the seat.
I recognise the fact that every man can acquire a strong
seat if he works hard. The remarks I lately made about
German stiffness also apply to the English. Nations of
Teutonic origin have justl}' earned the reputation of being
the best horsemen, which the}' have become b\' their great
perseverance and love of work. The Latin races, being of
middle height, are better fitted, b}' their suppleness and
agility, to work in harmon}' ^\'ith a horse, and if the}' were
industrious they would certainl}- be the finest horsemen in
the world. But, unfortunately, they are content with being
nearly the best. It goes without saying that I am speaking
generally, and that there are good and bad horsemen in
every country.
The ease, firmness of seat and confidence of the rider
generally depend on the first lesson which he has received ;
and, as 1 have said, a good seat is acquired only b}' trotting
without stirrups for a long time.
MAN'S SEAT. 23
The only horses bciginners should ride are those which
have easy paces and very good tempers. One cannot take
too much pains to give confidence to a novice. It is only the
confidence which he gets in his first lessons that will enable
him later on to ride with entire absence of stiffness. A man
whose movements on horse-back are stiff, may remain on the
outside of his mount, but does not ride him. Stiffness of
arms, legs and body makes fine horsemanship impossible.
How can contracted or stiff limbs keep in touch with the
horse while they are occupied in holding the body on the
saddle? When they become supple, and when the body
maintains its position in the saddle by balance, they will
acquire a delicate feeling with the horse, which they had
not at first. Flexibility of the limbs and a good seat are
indispensable conditions for attaining "equestrian tact."
Being merely stuck on a saddle is not riding. Generally
the pupil gradually gets out of this faulty position only by
acquiring confidence in his seat. I need hardly say that a
man may be very brave and yet have no confidence in the
saddle.
Slight horses are best for the first lessons, especially in the
case of boys and men who have short legs, A too great
separation of the legs might have grave results, and it
fatigues the groins without benefiting the rider in any way.
I have seen malformations of the hips caused by this practice.
Later on, the rider becomes accustomed to this form of
gymnastics, and he will be able to ride a horse of any shape
without discomfort.
I think that beginners should not ride with a double bridle,
and that it is better for them to use an ordinary snaffle, with
a rein in each hand. If they are at first given a double
bridle, the body will probably follow the movements of the
hands, because, at the beginning, they almost always carry the
hands and also the arms either to one side or the other.
24 HORSE AND MAN.
This faulty practice is avoided when the snaffle reins are held
one in each hand. We should bear in mind that it is easier
to put a beginner into a good position than to rectify a bad
seat later on.
To sum up, I may say that the chief good point about a
rider is firmness of seat, which is obtained by a correct
position and practice. The rider should have, not merely
blind pluck, but self-confidence and coolness, without which
he will not be able to utilise the useful things he has learned.
It is not necessary to know all about horses in order to
ride well. I prefer an unscientific man who can stick on any
rideable horse, to one who is strong in theory but weak in
practice. The purely theoretical man almost always
succeeds in making restive horses which he pretends to break
in. He may have enough firmness of seat to give the horse
an indication to move, but not sufficient to enable him to
enforce his orders when the animal " plays up."
Nothing is worse than to provoke a horse to resistance if
the rider has not the pluck to make him give in.
lady's seat.
Except as regards the legs, a lady should sit on a saddle
exactly like a man. For some time there has been talk of
ladies riding astride, which practice would deprive her of all
feminine grace, and would afford no useful result. The great
want in a man's seat is firmness, which would be still more
difficult for a woman to acquire if she rode in a cross-saddle,
because her thighs are rounder and weaker than those of a
man. Discussion of this subject is therefore useless. Ladies
who ride astride get such bad falls that they soon give up
this practice.
At all paces the shoulders should be parallel to the ears of
the horse, which is possible only when the hips occupy a
similar position. Therefore the position of the lady depends
LADY'S SEAT. 25
entirely on that of the hips. The two legs being on the left,
the right leg is hooked round the upper crutch, and is more
advanced and higher than the left leg, which presses against
the leaping-head, a little above the knee, and the foot rests
in the stirrup.
It has been proposed that ladies should sit on the right side
of the saddle. English and xAmerican journals have dwelt on
the bad effects of girls on only one side of the horse, and they
have tried to make out that this practice causes curvature of
the spine. As I judge only by practical observations, I can-
not say how it would affect children of five or six years old ;
but as I have often taught beginners of twelve or thirteen
years old, I can certify most positively that girls of that age
have nothing to fear on that score.
I am well aware that in England and America young girls
are given their first lesson in riding by coachmen and grooms,
who are apt to teach wrongly and to pass over, and even
accentuate faults. The same remark applies to many riding
masters who have studied both theory and practice, and who
succeed, only after a long course of teaching, in correcting
small mistakes, which are apt to become greater.
I maintain that if a lady is taught by a good master, her
figure, instead of being spoiled by riding exclusively on the
left side of the saddle, will increase in grace and suppleness.
We may therefore continue to make ladies ride only on the left
side. Placing her on the right side would be accompanied by
the serious inconvenience of making her hold the whip in her
left hand, which she cannot use as easily as her right. Her
whip hand acts the part of a horseman's leg.
The position of a lady on the left side of a saddle,
causes almost all the weight of her body to be carried to the
right side ; consequently, the left hip being freer from weight,
is apt to be stuck out behind the right hip, which is a fault
that ought to be avoided. The weight of the body ought to
26 HORSE AND MAN.
be equall}' distributed on both sides. Like a man in his
saddle, she ought to sit in her saddle exacth' as she sits in
a chair, namely, with the hips and shoulders parallel to the
ears of the horse. This is a question not only of correct
attitude, but also of strength of seat, which is the main thing.
A lady is rarely thrown to the left, because she is supported
on that side by the crutches, and, if need be, b}' the stirrup.
All the danger of a fall is therefore on the right, and it
increases in proportion as the left shoulder is drawn back.
It is easy to understand that if a horse makes an abrupt
movement, or makes a shy from the right to the left, the
upper part of the body will be forcibly thrown to the right,
a displacement which can be easily prevented by the lady
holding herself in a correct position, that is to say, if her
shoulders are placed as I have just indicated. If, on the con-
trary, the left shoulder is not so far advanced as the right
one, her equilibrium will be unstable and she will be in dan-
ger of falling off, which kind of fall should be provided
against, because it is dangerous ; for the lad}^ will fall on her
head, supposing that she gets clear of the crutches and
stirrup. If, in falling, her foot catches in the stirrup, or if her
skirt becomes hooked on the crutches, she will become
dragged without having any means of freeing herself
That which gives firmness of seat to the horsewoman also
endows her with elegance. Consequently, she need not sacri-
fice either of these advantages for the other. It is necessary:
Firstly, that the knees are brought as closel}' together as
possible, the right leg being firmly hooked round the upper
crutch, with its pressure acting from front to rear. The left
leg, on the contrary, by reason of the fulcrum afforded b}^ the
stirrup, exerts its pressure from rear to front. Secondly,
the left shoulder should be carried well forward, and the
body slightly bent forward, so as to make it more supple.
If the left shoulder is drawn back when the horse is at a
LADY'S SEAT. 27
walk, and consequently when all the weight is on the saddle,
the position of the lady is bad and particularly ungraceful.
When rising at the trot, her seat is still worse ; because the
left shoulder is jerked forward when she rises, and goes back
when she comes down on the saddle. This is the well-known
ungraceful cork-screw movement.
When the lady sits evenly on both sides of the saddle and
has a good position at the walk, her hips and shoulders will
easily remain well placed at the trot.
She should keep her body well under her when rising at
the trot. The upper part of the body makes no effort, but
allows itself to be raised by the movement of the horse. The
foot rests in the stirrup iron without stiffness, and the ankle
and knees act only as hinges. The slightest muscular con-
traction, or the least effort made by the ankle, knees or loins
will give the rider a stiff and ungraceful appearance, and will
cause fatigue. If the lady will carry out these rules, she will
ride in two-time, namely, one on the saddle and one in the
air. Otherwise she will come down too quickly, and will
mark two-times on the saddle, which will give her a useless
and fatiguing shock. I will refer to this fact at greater
length when discussing the position of a horseman at the trot
(p. 146).
A horsewoman should have great pliability of body, which
she will acquire by practice in riding and other preliminary
exercises, of which dancing is the best. It also depends on
certain small details of dress, about which I may give the
following advice.
A lady on horseback is apt to cut herself The slightest
crease in her clothes may cause an abrasion. For a long ride,
and still more for hunting, she should wear a short chemisette,
made of very fine material, and fitting close to the body.
The collar and cuffs ought to be strongly connected to this
chemisette, and not fixed to it merely by pins, which arc liable
28 HORSE AND MAN.
to fall out or hurt the wearer. I strongly advise that she
should wear socks instead of stockings ; because a garter is
always inconvenient and may cause serious wounds. The
socks should be furnished with a close-fitting collar of some
soft and elastic material, such as knitting or jersey, lined with
silk, or, still better, very fine doeskin. The trousers should
be strapped with india-rubber and should fit rather closely, so
that they may not wrinkle. The boots should have elastic
sides and not buttons, which might cause wounds. I prefer
ordinary boots to long boots, which are too hard, and are
consequently apt to cut the wearer under the knee, and to
prevent her feeling the horse with her leg. The corset should
be very short and low. A long busk is not only inconvenient,
but is also dangerous. I would not have touched on these
details but for the fact that the dress of the horsewoman is
closely connected with her strength of seat and ease in the
saddle. I have seen so many ladies returning from a ride in
pain, and condemned to spend many da}-s in a long chair, that
I am certain the points to which I have drawn attention are
important.
The head-dress of the lady should be firmU' arranged, so that
it may not occupy her attention, in which case she will think
too little of her horse. Then, if she loses her hat, she will
probably lose her head.
The choice of a saddle is of great importance, both for the
rider and for the horse. Its seat should be quite level, so that
the knees of the rider may not be higher than her seat, and
it should have but little stuffing, so that it may fit close to the
horse, and may not become shifted. The smallest displace-
ment of the saddle may seriously injure the animal's withers.
If the cantle of the saddle is too short, it will certain!}- hurt
the rider, and if too long, it will hurt the horse's loins.
A lady's horse should have high withers, so as to prevent
the saddle turninir round. Clreat care should be taken that
LADY'S SEAT. 29
the mane at the withers does not become pressed upon by the
pommel of the saddle, the irritation from which often causes
the animal to " play up."
A few words about putting a lady into a saddle may be
useful, not only for horsewomen, but also for men who have
the somewhat parlous honour of touching a lady's foot. I
regret to say that when being " put up " a lady generally does
the very opposite of what she ought to do. She places the
left foot in the hands of her male attendant, and jumps from
the right foot on to the left foot, while carrying the body for-
ward, with the result that all the weight falls suddenly on the
hands of the man, who is inevitably pushed backwards and
away from the shoulder of the animal. On the contrary,
when her left foot is on his hands, she ought to use the right
leg onl)^ to make a slight spring which will enable her, by
straightening her left knee, to hold the body upright and a
little inclined to the rear. This is a very simple movement,
and is exactly similar to that which one makes when getting
up a rather high step of a staircase. The lady should not try
to jump up, but should limit her spring to straightening the
left knee, while keeping the upper part of the bod}^ well bent
forward ; and she should use her arms, her left hand resting
on the shoulder of her attendant and her right hand on the
upper crutch. In acting thus, she will mount quite straight
by the impulse given by the hands, and will come natural])-
on the saddle, and will carry the seat a little to the rear. She
should not try to place herself on the horse, which is the busi-
ness of her attendant, but should merely occupy herself with
sitting down. If a lady attempts to jump into the saddle, she
will generally strike it and fall on the man,
I cannot help adding that the old practice of giving the left
foot is bad, and am unable to explain its origin or the reason
of its continuance. In fact, to be put on the saddle with the
left foot on the hands of the attendant, the lady, when she is
30 HORSE AND MAN.
raised up, ought to carry her seat from front to rear, and from
left to right, while the man at the same time makes a
movement from rear to front and from right to left.
Here we have a double displacement. If, on the contrary,
the lady gives her right foot, which is nearer to the
horse than the left, she need make only a very slight spring
with her left foot and to straighten the right knee, to come
naturally on the middle line of the saddle, and to sit down
without the slightest displacement. I do not claim the merit
of having discovered this simple method, which has long been
practised by many of the best horsewomen. I have had the
honour of putting into the saddle sovereign ladies who always
mounted in this manner. Ladies, without having previously
made up your mind, please try for a week this method of
being put up on the saddle, and I am certain you will
adopt it.
As soon as the lady is in the saddle she ought to place her
right leg over the upper crutch without waiting to settle her
skirt, so that she may avoid falling off in the event of the
horse starting to one side. I ma\' add that the hands of the
man ought not to quit the foot of the lad\' until her right leg
is in its right place. To dismount, the lady takes her foot
out of the stirrup and gives her left wrist to the attendant.
She thereupon removes her right leg from the upper crutch,
gives him the right wrist, and lets herself slip down to the
ground, while supporting herself a little with her arms. She
ought to alight on her toes, and should bend her knees, so as
to avoid any concussion, which, without this precaution, she
is apt to receive after a long ride, on account of her legs
being stiff and numbed. I repeat that the lady ought to give
her wrists, and instead of jumping ought to slide down. It
often happens that the lady throws herself from the saddle
and the cavalier takes hold of her by the waist. Not being
able to hold her up with his outstretched arms,^hc lets her
LADY'S SEAT. 31
slide through his hands, which is ungraceful and not par-
ticularly decent.
The question is often asked whether the lady's cavalier
should ride on her right side or on her left ? I do not think
that a fixed rule on this subject would work well. Under
ordinary conditions the man should be on the right, because
the lady, in order to turn her head towards him, is
obliged to carry the right shoulder back, which is the correct
position, as I have already said. Further, the gentleman,
being on the right, can, in case of necessity, help the lady,
to whom he cannot come close enough, on account of the
position of her legs, if he is on the left. If it happens that
there is danger on the left to the lady, by reason of the
presence of horses or carriages, he ought to place himself on
that side in order to protect her legs.
32
CHAPTER II.
ORDINARY RIDING.
Lunging a Horse — Close work, advancing — Collecting a Horse and direct Flexion
— Objects to be obtained by direct Flexion — Making a Horse quiet to mount
— How to hold the Reins — Teaching a Horse by the Whip to obey legs and
spurs — Horse mounted, first Defences, means for overcoming them — The
Walk— To halt and stand still — Changes of Direction— Lateral flexions —
Objects of Lateral flexions — Rotation of the Croup and Shoulders — School
Walk — The rein back — The 7-amener, collection, rassembler, and equestrian
tact — Side steps and two tracks — The trot — The canter — Voltes and demi
voltes at the canter— Changes of leg — The Hack.
LUNGING A HORSE.
I WORK all horses in the same manner. The animal
which is to be broken being brought into the school saddled
and bridled, I pass the reins of the curb and snaffle through
the throat-latch, so that the horse may not catch them with
his feet. I then buckle a lunging rein to the left ring of the
snaffle and let the horse walk at ease.
For every lesson the horse should have flannel bandages on
his forelegs, from the fetlock to the knee, so as to support
the flexor tendons and to guard the horse from getting
splints which are often caused by a green horse hitting
himself
Immediately after the lesson I take the bandages off the
forelegs and put them on the hind ones, and leave them on
for three or four hours, which period is sufficiently long to
LUNGING A HORSE. 33
prevent the legs filling and windgalls forming. If flannel
bandages are constantly left on, the tissues of the legs are apt
to become softened and the tendons to become stretched by
the action of the heat.
If he tries to get away from me I let him go, my object
being to make him keep close to the wall. If he docs not try
to get away and turns towards me, I show him the driving
whip, the sight of which will make him get away as far as the
lunging rein will allow him. I hold the whip in my right
hand, the rein in my left, and I let the horse free to go at any
pace he likes. The object of walking the horse in this way
round the school is to make him examine the ground and all
the surrounding objects which are new to him.
If he is lively he will probably plunge, and then canter or
trot, but he will soon steady down. If he is sluggish he will
be disinclined to go forward, and it may be necessary to
make him go on by showing him the whip. If that does not
produce the desired effect, we may touch him lightly on the
hind quarters, so as to make him trot or canter for about
five minutes. We should most carefully avoid making any
abrupt or rough movement which might frighten him.
I have said that I would give the animal five minutes' work
at a fast pace, but, of course, would not do so unless he was
in good condition. If he was not fairly fit, the duration of
the work would be shorter during the first few lessons, and
would be gradually increased up to the five minutes' limit.
When the horse has circled for five minutes to the left —
that is to say, with the left shoulder towards the inside of the
school — I throw the whip down and try to steady the horse by
my voice. I then shorten the lunging rein until he is close to
me. I speak softly to him and pat him on the neck, which is
a form of caress that all horses like. I also stroke his head,
if he will let me do so, and then unbuckle the lunging rein
and fix it to the off ring of the snaffle.
3
34 ORDINARY RIDING.
After a short rest I begin the same exercises to the right
for five minutes. When the work is over I again throw
down the whip, and call the horse to me, while at the same
time gently drawing him towards me by the lunging rein,
and then pat and stroke him as before.
In my opinion the foregoing exercise is the indispensable
first step in breaking, and, as I attach great importance to it,
I will give my reasons at some length as follows.
A young horse is almost always restless and timid ;
shadows, walls, and all sorts of trifling objects frighten him.
He rushes away from anything that startles him, and goes to
the part of the school which is unoccupied, while I remain by
myself in the centre. If I show him the whip, while advanc-
ing towards his side, he instinctively flies away and goes to
the wall, against which he can be easily kept b)' pointing the
whip towards his shoulder.
Being placed between the threat which I make and an
object which he fears, and from which he has fled, he returns
to this fixed object, which appears to him to be less terrifying
than the driving whip. When, thanks to this procedure, he
has several times crossed the place of which he was afraid, he
will eventually have no fear of it We may note that it was
not necessar}' to use punishment, which should be our last
resort.
Further, if the animal is too lively, I would give him a
good long turn at the trot, or even at the canter, if he prefers
that pace, in order to get rid of his excess of energy. If he is
dull, I teach him, by means of a few cuts of the whip, to go
forward. We must draw a distinction between a horse that
is soft and one that is sluggish. If the former is properly
fed and exercised he can become lively ; but the latter,
although he may be full of muscular vigour, does not like to
put forth his strength except when he pleases, a fact which
makes him dangerous to an inexperienced rider. We are
LUNGING A HORSE. 35
never certain except with a free-going horse. Although an
impetuous animal may get out of control and run a\va\-, I
prefer him to a sluggish horse. Pluck is the best quality in a
horse.
I have always obtained a good result with my equine pupil,
who quickl}' loses fear of the things which surround him,
because he has no one on his back to hamper his movements
and upset him. I easily obtain my result without a struggle,
and without having to put up with the plunges and shies of a
horse which has been mounted too soon, and which is liable
to roll over on the ground with me, on account of the
awk\\'ard use of his feet.
It is of great advantage to teach a horse to know, bear and
fear the lunging whip ; because if, later on, he refuses to go
forward when ridden by an indifferent horseman, the use of
the whip will make him obey. The sight of it will often be
sufficient to make him go forward. If he refuses to do so,
we should touch him lightly and carefully behind, because
an}- roughness or abruptness is apt to make him resist.
Lunging has the further advantage of enabling us to make
a horse trot out, by driving his hind quarters forward with
the whip. In fact, we can thus make a horse acquire the
habit of collecting himself. By being lunged in freedom, he
will gain suppleness, confidence, cleverness and sure-footed-
ness, which are the best qualities in a horse. A harnessed
horse puts his weight on the collar and a mounted animal
puts it on the hand of his rider ; but a horse which is
lunged is obliged to balance himself independently of all
support.
A horse which is lunged at a fast pace for five minutes to
the right, and for another five minutes to the left, gets in good
wind, on account of the work his lungs have to do. If he
was ridden, he would not get this exercise during his first
few lessons ; because they would be given at a walk.
3*
36 ORDINARY RIDING.
During the first two or three lessons, I let the horse go at
any pace he likes, provided that it is fast and that he keeps
to the wall. I make him trot in the subsequent lessons.
It is so easy to make a horse trot, that one ought to do
so with any horse in the third or fourth lesson without
an assistant. The old custom, recommended in almost every
book on the subject, of having two men to lunge a horse
is faulty, because it is impossible to have perfect harmony
in the movements of these men. It often happens that the
man with the whip touches up the horse when he ought not
to do so, and that the man who is holding the lunging rein,
stops the animal at the moment when his comrade is making
him go on. Of course, such a discord could not happen if
the breaker was by himself
Supposing that the horse is at the wall, and going to the
left ; the breaker, who is at the centre of the school, ought
alwa)'S remain facing the horse and at a line with his
shoulder, thus keeping him enclosed in the angle made by
the lunging rein and whip, the former held in the left hand,
the latter in the right hand. The breaker should alwa}^s
accompany the horse, but should not follozv him, and should
place himself so as always to keep the horse between the
lunging rein in front and the ^\'hip behind.
In order to accompany a horse \\\\ho\x\. following him, while
constantly remaining in a line with his shoulder, we need
only follow the diagonal, while alternately extending and
drawing back the arm. This precaution is essential, because
if we describe a circle, when following the horse round the
school, we shall get giddy and become unable to carry out
the work properly. By moving diagonally we can accom-
pany the horse as long as we like.
To make the hor.se trot, I touch him lightly behind with
the whip. It is better to touch the shoulder, but we should
not try to do] so, especially with a young horse, unless we
LUNGING A MORSE. 37
have great experience in using the whip. If, instead of
light!}' dropping on the shoulder, the lash touches or brushes
b\' the head, the horse will start back, and we shall then
obtain a movement which is the exact opposite of what we
wanted. xAlso, if the horse is a bit lively, we may stimulate
him with a click of the tongue, which is a form of stimulus
"\ve should not use too much, because it might upset other
horses when we are in compan\'.
If the use of the driving whip makes the horse plunge or
go off into the canter, as it often does, I soothe him by
lightl}- shaking the lunging rein and speaking to him at the
same time. The lunging rein should never be kept tight,
but should lemain in touch with the mouth only by its own
weight, and by the vibrations which the breaker gives it.
I have already said that the voice is a powerful help
in breaking. If, when we shake the lunging rein to make
the animal adopt a slower pace, we call out loudly " trot ! " no
matter how stupid he may be, he will soon connect in his
mind the effect produced on his mouth and the sound which
falls on his ears. At first he will obey only the combined
impression, but he will soon learn to obe}' the voice b)'
itself.
When I ha\'e obtained a free trot which is kept up for the
time required, I bring the horse to the walk by lightly
shaking the rein, in the same manner as I made him change
from the canter into the trot. Here also I use the voice
rather loudly, though mildly, in saying " whoa ! "
The next step is to make the horse come up to the
breaker. To do this, I gently shorten the rein and draw the
horse towards me, while walking backwards with very short
steps, so that he gradually gets closer to me. When he has
arrived within reach of m}' stretchcd-out arm, I pat him on
the neck and soothe him with the voice. I take great care
to avoid makinij the slightest forward mo\-ement with the
38 ORDINARY RIDING.
body, my wish being to give him confidence. If I were
to make a step forward, he would immediately spring back,
which result would be the opposite to that which I wished
to obtain. If nothing has frightened him while he is coming
to me, and if my pats on his neck and my voice have shown
him that he need not fear my presence, he will soon gain
confidence, and will of himself try to come to me, and all the
more readily when he finds that tranquility is to be obtained
only at the centre of the school. He ought to have sufficient
confidence to come up to the breaker without fear, but he
should do so only at a given signal. Our object is to make
him understand this signal without the use of the lunging
rein, which wall be discontinued later on.
I use the driving whip to make the horse come up to me
in obedience to my order, and I give him light and repeated
flicks on the buttock, ribs, or shoulder, while always seeking to
block the side from which he tries to escape. In order to
make the animal go forward, I sometimes touch him on the
breast, in which case his first movement is to run back ; but
I continue to hold him tightly with the lunging rein, and
while preventing him from running back, I call out '' whoa ! "
If he runs back, he does so because he is afraid of the
whip. An unbroken horse does not fly from a sting, flick, or
prod ; on the contrary, he goes up to it and lies against it.
We shall see further on that the effect obtained on a
mounted horse by the pressure of the leg or by a touch of the
spur is due solely to education. A horse in a state of nature
will do the very opposite to what he will do when broken.
For instance, stung on the right flank by a fly, he will bring
himself round to the right, until he meets some object against
which he can rub himself or even lie upon.
The sight of the driving whip makes him run away from it,
but its touch makes him go forward. As soon as the tension
of the lunging rein has shown him that he cannot get away
LUNGING A HORSE. 39
from the sight of the whip by running back, his instinct will
cause him to go forward. If at that moment the whip is
lowered and a pat on the neck given, he will gain confidence,
will understand what we want him to do, and will obey our
wishes, x^lthough we cannot obtain the result at the first
attempt, we shall do so in a few lessons, especially if the
breaker does not frighten the horse by some abrupt move-
ment when the animal is advancing.
We can dispense with the lunging rein as soon as the horse
will come freely up to us, when we show him the driving
whip. This first lunging work is only preparatory. It has
been used in all times, but has been applied and utilised in
different ways. It was employed in excess before the days
of Baucher, who disliked it. I think it is useful, supposing,
of course, that it is not employed to fatigue the horse.
In order to make a horse come up to me without the help
of the lunging rein, I use the same methods as when lunging.
At the beginning of the work I employ the rein a good deal
and the whip only a little. According as the horse pro-
gresses I diminish the use of the rein and increase that of
the whip, while always blocking up with the whip the side at
which the horse tries to escape from me, so as to make him
come up to me. Finally, he gets into the habit of coming up
to me on seeing tlie whip, and without my using the rein in
any way. I then teach him to follow me all over the school,
while always stopping him with the whip from getting away,
and making him promptl)^ go on b)' light flicks on the hind
quarters.
Finally I discontinue the use of the lunging rein. If, as
always happens, the horse refuses to obey the whip and tries
to escape from me, there is a battle, which consists in my
flicking the horse on the hind quarters until he comes up to
me, which result may at first appear improbable. However,
when the horse is pursued by the man round the school for a
40 ORDINARY RIDING.
sufficiently great number of times, his only idea will be to
stop. As the whip follows him all round the track of the
school and allows him rest only at the centre, he finishes by
coming to it, in the same manner as he learned when being
lunged. In order to facilitate this movement on his part, the
breaker ought to seize the moment when the horse appears
inclined to slacken his speed, to make him come away from
the wall, by showing him the whip in front, and at the same
time calling out "whoa!" which, from his lunging work, he
will have learned to regard as an order to come up to his
breaker.
If the horse refuses to come up and remains at the wall, we
should again follow him up, so as to bring him to the centre,
and should continue to do so until he obeys.
I may add that the breaker, by keeping himself out of
reach of kicks and blows with the fore feet, will make his
authority felt at a distance, and the horse will learn to obey
without being provoked into resistance.
I am not a believer in the caveson, except for really vicious
horses. If it is used, it should be light and well stuffed.
Having obtained the foregoing important result, I will pass
on to " close " work.
CLOSE WORK ; ADVANCING.
Having given up lunging, I take hold of the snaffle reins,
after having passed them over the animal's head. I replace
the driving whip by a cutting whip, which I use along with
the snaffle in the same way as I employed the lunging rein
and driving whip.
Having the horse with his right side parallel to the wall of
the school, I place myself close to his left shoulder and take
hold of the whip and the end of the snaffle reins with the left
hand. It goes without saying, that the re\crse aids are used
\\hen going round the other wa}\ I conceal the ^^•h^p from
CLOSE WORK; ADVANCING.
41
the sight of the horse b)- placing it along the outside of my
left leg. With the right hand I catch the snaffle reins close
to the animal's mouth and just below his chin (Fig. i), and
then take a few paces forward. If the horse also advances, I
pat him on the neck ; but if he refuses to do so, I touch him
up behind, close to the girths with the whip. Occasionally, a
green horse at first refuses to advance and requires a touch
of the whip, which is generalh^ sufficient. Some horses refuse
L(b"
Fie. I. — Leading: a horse forward.
to go forward, especially if we make them bend their necks,
in which case I replace the cutting whip by the lunging whip,
with which I hit the animal on the hind quarters and always
succeed in making him go on.
I wish to direct my readers' special attention to this decisive
moment, on \\hich contest depends our future success with
the horse. It is impcjrtant to understand that at this moment
the animal pays no heed to the demands of his breaker and
is ignorant of the breaker's means of coercion. He has not
yet learned to fear punishment, and knows little about the
reassuring nature of pats on the neck.
42 ORDINARY RIDING.
Appropriate punishment and reward are the two great
principles of successful breaking.
If my horse refuses to advance, it is evident that, from the
position I am in, it will be difficult for him to run back, but
not impossible, and it is necessary to look out for any move-
ment which a green horse may make.
To make him go forward, I extend my right arm, while
always holding the snaffle reins with the right hand at the
chin-groove, over which the curb-chain passes ; and I push,
instead of drawing forward, whilst holding the end of the
snaffle reins with my left hand behind my back. I lightly
touch the horse with the tip of the cutting whip a little
behind the girths.
If the horse is quiet and not too nervous and excitable, he
will go forward without rushing. He will often, however,
answer to the cuts of the whip by plunging, rearing, shying
violently to one side, or running back, which are the four
" defences " which a horse can offer in this case. Let us now
examine the best means of thwarting them.
If the horse plunges, we have only to raise his head, so as-
to put the weight on his hind quarters, taking care to keep
close to his shoulder, so as to avoid being struck by his fore
feet. A horse cannot plunge with his head high.
Rearing is more dangerous, because the horse may hit the
breaker a blow on the top of the head with one of his fore
feet, to avoid the bad consequences of which accident it is
well to wear a chimney pot hat, which has often saved me
from a blow on the head. When the horse rears, the right
hand should quickly let go the snaffle reins, only the end of
which should remain in the left hand, and then, if the breaker
turns to the right about, he cannot be hit, as his distance from
the horse will be equal to the length of the snaffle reins and
that of his left arm. Having allowed him to regain his feet,
go up very quietly to him, while carefully concealing the whip.
CLOSE WORK; ADVANCING. 43
If he again rears, bear strongly on the snaffle, but without
jerks. When he has tried to rear three or four times without
being able to succeed, he will soon give up the attempt, and
perhaps may throw himself on his side, which he can do only
to the left, as the wall is on his right. A touch of the whip
on the left side, and shaking him up with the left snaffle rein
will be sufficient to make him get up.
When the horse runs back, we should place ourselves in
front of him, and should pull strongly on the snaffle reins,
while slightly bending the knees and carrying the weight of
the body back, so that the horse can drag us back only with
difficulty, and consequently will soon become tired. I have
had so much practice in letting myself be dragged, while
keeping on my feet, that I can almost always stop any horse
at his second or third step. When he finds that we passively
and not actively resist his efforts, he will generally stop and
give a deep sigh. Fix him in this position, and try to find
out, which we can easily do with a little practice, if he is
going to yield or to continue his resistance.
The lesson should never be interrupted, and it should on no
account be terminated by reason of thz resistance of the horse.
When the horse has given in, I again gently try, as in the
previous manner, to make him go forward and do not stop
until I have succeeded. Almost always the animal promptly
gives in.
In the first part of this breaking, Baucher used to tr\- to make
the horse come forward by lightly touching him on the breast
with a cutting whip, while he held the snaffle reins at half-
length and stood facing the horse. As I have explained in
the chapter on lunging, I do not object to this method,
although it is open to the serious objection (jf rendering the
man liable to be hit b>' the horse's fore feet and of making
the animal ticklish. Besides, touching the horse on the breast
is of no further use in breaking ; but touching him on the sides.
44 ORDINARY RIDING.
as I have described, is the best preparation for the use of the
spurs.
According to the system of Baucher, one pulls the horse by
his forehand, and if the animal is thus made to move, he will
drag his hind quarters after him ; but by my method the
horse gets his hind quarters under him, and by their means he
pushes the forehand forward, which is the essential principle
of good riding.
COIXECTING A HORSE AND DIRECT FLEXION.
As soon as my horse goes well with me round the school to
the left, I make him change and begin similar work to the
•other hand. Then, when I am satisfied with him, I commence
collecting him. While going to the left and keeping myself
at his left shoulder, I take the bit reins in my right hand, at
five or six inches from his mouth. Keeping the buckle of the
snaffle reins in the hollow of my left hand, I seize with its
fingers the snaffle reins at about eight or nine inches from the
mouth, and I carry the left hand in advance of the animal's
head, in order to draw him forward. It is absolutely in-
dispensable to hold the snaffle reins in this way, if we wish to
prevent the horse from stopping, when we feel the curb reins.
Merely holding the snaffle reins horizontally will not do,
because we want to do more than to simply pull the animal
forward. It is also necessary that the pull of the snaffle is in
an upward direction ; because it ought to raise his head and
neck at the moment when the pressure of the bit prompts
him to flex his lower jaw (Fig. 2, jaw contracted ; and Fig. 3,
jaw and bit free,) which action on his part should be counter-
balanced by the pressure of the snaffle, in order that it may
not make him lower his head and neck.
I feel the snaffle reins in order to raise the head and neck,
and I then put equal tension on the curb reins, in order to
make him bend his neck and loosen his lower jaw. If the
COLLFXTING AND DIRECT FLEXION.
45
horse does not go freely forward, I take a stronger feeling of
the snaffle reins, and if he stiffens his neck and lower jaw, I
Fig. 2. — Jaw contracted.
make more use of the curb reins. I particularly recommend
that the tension of the reins should not be of a uniform and
continuous nature, but should consist of light pressures
sufficiently prolonged, so as not to form a jerk, and sufficiently
46 ORDINARY RIDING.
short, so that the horse ma}' not be inchned to bear his weight
on the bridle.
If he yields, even in the slightest manner, I give to him
and pat his neck. I then tr}' to get him to yield still more,
Avithout asking too much from him. I again giv^e to him and
pat him ; and so on.
We should take particular care to get the horse to give to
us, not only with his neck, but also with his jaw, which he will
do b\' opening his mouth. The bending of the jaw is the last
stage of flexion. Several horses, in yielding the lower jaw,
whether in direct or lateral flexions, bring the jaw from one
side to the other side. Although the jaw in this case does not
resist the hand, it \'ields by going to the right or left, instead
of yielding in the direction of the axis of the head. This in-
complete method of yielding can be corrected only b}' stimu-
lating the animal to go forward.
We can easily understand that if the lower jaw is carried to
the right or left, the horse will not be correctly in hand,
although his head and neck will be in a good position. His
appearance of being in hand is not real, because the contrac-
tion of the muscles of his lower jaw makes it impossible for his
mouth to be light. In these conditions the horse will never go
freely up to his bridle, despite the stimulus of the legs. If I
require an increase of impulsion, it is because the horse, b\'
escaping from the straight line, brings his head too near his
breast, in which case he will have a tendenc)' to get behind his
bit. It is therefore necessary to send him up to it.
Finally, if the jaw does not yield, the bending of the neck
will onl}' cause the weight to be brought back, and con-
sequcntl}- to make the horse rein back or get behind the
bit.
The entire principle of direct flexion consists in the alternate
opposing actions of the curb and snaffle. Whilst the snaffle
draws the forehand forward, a light pressure of the curb
COLLECTING AND DIRECT FLEXION,
47
steadies and bends the head, and causes the jaw to yield with-
out stopping the forehand.
To obtain this result, combined with lightness, we must ccn-
V
v^'^'
Fig. 3. — Jaw and bit free.
tinually practise the great principle of taking and giving ; the
former to stop resistance, the latter to reward obedience.
Having obtained it, we should again take, so as to make the
horse yield still more ; and so on.
48 ORDINARY RIDING.
A horse should not only champ his bit, but should also
relax his lower jaw to it (Fig. 3), which concession proves
that the bending of the head and neck is perfect. With
this object, when the lower jaw readily yields to the tension
of the curb, we should prolong this tension until the horse
completely loosens his hold on the curb, and we ought to
keep touching him lightly on the side, so as to prevent him
stopping (Fig. 4).
It is, of course, understood that this work ought to be done
with great lightness of hand. We can gauge the sensibility
of the mouth by an alternative feeling of the curb and snaffle^
and can thus at once find out if the horse has a hard or
soft mouth. In this manner we readily get good, that is to
say, ligJit hands, with which we can manage almost any horse
by the continued play of " take and give." It is a great
advantage to have good hands, which will be sufficient for
all ordinary work. But we can take and give for all our
life without being able to render an account of what we are
doing, in which case neither the hand nor the horse makes
any progress. Finally, the action of the hand would be
limited to giving when the horse pulls, and pulling when he
gives. This faculty may be called the possession of a bell
in the hand, and is in fact the movement of a bell in all
its beaut)^
The ivell-trained hand acts in the contrary m.anner, because
its role is to break in the horse, that is to say, to advance
his education. It remains fixed in position by strongly closing
the fingers when the horse pulls, but the moment the horse
yields his lower j^w, the fingers should be relaxed with the
rapidity of an electric flash.
A good hand gives when the horse takes, and takes when
he gives. A ivell-trained hand gives when the horse gives,
and takes when he takes, and that instantaneously.
In all cases we ought to guard against confounding hardness
COLLECTING AND DIRECT ELEXION.
49
of mouth with the resistance which is due to a faulty position
of the head. A horse which carries his head low is always
heavy in hand, because he puts all his weight forward, but
it does not therefore follow that he has a hard mouth. If
we simply change the position of his head, and place it high, it
will not bear on the hand, and we will be able to find out what
kind of a mouth he has.
Fig. 4. — Going forward when mobilising the lower jaw, so as to
prevent the horse getting behind his bit.
It is a mistake to think, as many do, that a horse which
slavers or foams at the mouth has a good mouth. To produce
this soapy foam, a horse must contract his tongue, ancl will not
then be able to have his mouth free, at rest, and ready for the
fingering of his rider. A horse produces this foam by con-
stantly turning his tongue, or by rubbing it against his hard
palate, by passing it over the bit, or by making it into a
ball at the back of his mouth. In all these cases, the only
4
50 ORDINARY RIDING.
remedy is to put a small movable plate of the shape of a
figure of eight, with its centre on the top of the port of
the bit, upon which it can revolve. This apparatus will
also prevent horses letting their tongues hang out of their
mouths.
Sometimes a horse foams at the mouth by playing with
one of the cheeks of the bit, which we can prevent by putting
the mouthpiece a little higher up in his mouth and tightening
the chin-strap, so that he cannot reach the cheeks of the bit
either with his tongue or lips.
A good moiitli will always continue fresh during work with-
out being either dry or wet.
If the flexion has been made in the manner I have indicated,
and by the methods I have described, the horse will have his
neck high and bent at the poll ; the axis of the head will be a
little beyond the perpendicular, the mouth open, and the curb
free (Fig. 3). In order that the flexion may be irreproachable,
it is necessary that the muzzle should be on a Ime with the
upper part of the shoulder (Fig. 5). The bending of the neck
should bring the direction of the head near to, but not behind
the perpendicular, which faulty position can be produced only
when the neck is bent at a point too near the withers. By this
position I have my horse very lightly on the bit. Whereas
Baucher, who liked to have his mount behind the bit, drew the
animal's head back beyond the perpendicular, and thus put the
horse into this position.
I will now describe the mechanism of direct flexion, as I
understand it, and as I have practised it, with this single
difference, that, for the sake of clearness, I take for granted
that the horse is halted ; although I will explain later on,
that at first I make the direct flexion while going forward.
The majority of riding masters practice this flexion in
an entirely different manner. To give an account of what
ought to be the direct flexion, which is the fundamental
OBJECTS OBTAINED BY DIRECT FLEXION. 51
principle of riding, we must first know what is the desired
result to be obtained from making it.
OBJECTS TO BE OBTAINED BY DIRECT FLEXION.
I. To balance the horse by the height of his neck. It is very
rare that horses are naturally well balanced. On account of
Fig. 5. — Muzzle on a line with upper part of shoulder.
their conformation, all horses have a tendency to be heavy in
front, and the majority of them have this defect ; the cause
being the distance which the head is removed from the base
of support. The further the head is away from the centre of
gravity the lower it is, and the more weight is on the
shoulders. The result of raising the neck, so as to bring the
head near to the centre of gravity, is to more or less equalise
the distribution of weight. As good horsemanship depends
52 ORDINARY RIDING.
on the distribution of weight, as we shall see further on ; the
first step in breaking ought to be the equal distribution of
weight, so that good equilibrium maintained during pro-
gression may later on give lightness to.every movement.
Raising the neck and putting equal weight on the fore-
hand and hind quarters will allow them full freedom and
energy, and will put the horse in such a position that he
will only require to be stimulated. With the neck high,
the hocks are easily brought under the centre of the
body, and the action of the fore legs becomes lofty. In a
word, raising the neck gives good equilibrium and grace
by lightness.
In racing, one's sole object is to gain in length without
paying any attention to high action. Consequently, in
training, one guards against raising the neck. Here we
prove the principle that a horse extends himself as much as
possible by " daisy cutting."
But there are horses which are heavy behind, and one
might think that if it is good to raise the neck of a horse
which is heavy in front, it would be necessary to lower the
neck of the animal whieh is heavy behind ; but this is not so.
As I have just explained, the conformation of the horse and
the relations between his levers are such that the equilibrium
of his mass can be obtained only by raising the neck.
The horse which is heavy behind is inclined to get behind
his bit, and has his hocks either too far removed or too near
his centre. In the former case the horse is too much
stretched out, and in the latter the croup is unduly lowered,
and the points of the buttocks are much further back than
the hocks.* Here, instead of a naturally bad distribution of
the weight of the mass, as with a horse heavy in front, we have
* This position is dangerous, because the horse is ready to rear. The danger
of being behind the bit is restiveness, which causes rearing, witli the probability
of the animal falling backwards.
OBJECTS OBTAINED BY DIRECT FLEXION. 53
a bad voluntary distribution of the forces in an animal which
holds himself back and which does not wish to advance ; and
his hocks do not do their work of pushing" the mass forward.
If we overload the forehand by lowering the neck, we add
still more to the weight, and consequently we increase the
difficulty of the work required from the hocks.* We must
therefore raise the neck in order to lighten the forehand ; but
we should raise it from below upwards, and not from front to
rear, while taking care not to exaggerate the movement and
to keep the hand very light. A high position of the neck is
the first condition of good equilibrium, and having obtained
it, we should seek to give freedom to the hind quarters, while
bringing them into action, and making the horse go freely
forward, which we do by the flexions of the well-placed head,
by the loosening of the jaw, and especially by the legs. A
horse which is heavy in his hind quarters is behind his bit,
and if he does not wish to go forward, he is behind the
legs. With such an animal we must employ great lightness
of hand and great energy of the legs, so as to change his
distribution of weight by making him go up to his bit.f We
cannot obtain this result by a low position of the neck, which
is the chief obstacle to lightness.
2. To fix the neck in the axis of the body by connecting to the
shoulders the head rendered light by flexion. The unbent head
is heavy at the end of the neck, which has become too
movable. Hence the proverb, " Heavy head, slack neck."
This is a case similar to that of holding a fishing-rod b)- its
thin end. The flexed head, on the contrary, moves with
lightness on the high neck, which is kept without stiff'ness on
the axis of the body by the sole action of the good
* Without taking into consideration that a depressed position of the neck will
give only more spring to the act of rearing.
f In such cases the driving whip, which obliges the horse to go forward, is a
good preparation for the use of the legs.
54 ORDINARY RIDING.
equilibrium of the levers. Head, neck, and shoulders fixed
in the axis of the well-balanced body, and making a supple
and homogeneous whole. This is the action of flexion.
3. To obtain lightness by the relaxation or flexion of the Jaw.
Having the body balanced and connected in all its parts, the
flexion of the jaw enables us to regulate collectively with
extreme lightness all the movements from rear to front,
and from front to rear, by receiving on the hand the impul-
sion of the mass which the legs throw on the bit, and which
the hand, in its turn, partly sent back to the rider's legs.
The hand only retains and sends back to the centre the
amount of impulsion which is necessary to maintain equili-
brium. The greater portion of the impulsion is naturally-
employed to propel the body forward. The flexibility from
front to rear of the arm of the bent and jointed lever formed
by the neck, head, and jaw, progressively increases from rear
to front ; that is to say, from the shoulders to the neck, from
the neck to the head, and from the head to the jaw. In
other words, we hold the fishing-rod by its butt end.
Thus, all the force developed by the horse is concentrated
in the hand, the slightest action of which on the bars bends,
first, the jaw, proportionately to the impulsion ; secondly, the
head* by the jaw ; and thirdly, by the head, the neck ; the
neck reacting with its greatest effect on the shoulders. The
expression employed to define the reciprocal position of the
horse and rider is most exact. We have really our horse in
hand.
With respect to these remarks it is necessar}- to point out
that the position of the head is singularh^ favourable to the
action of the reins. In fact, the curb, which acts almost like
*The head ought to oscillate from a position a little beyond the perpendicular
to the perpendicular, but never in rear of it. The position which I have indi-
cated enables us to get by the shortest way to the end of the lever, and to obtain
the greatest eft'ect t)y the smallest effort.
55
Fig. 6. — Correct preparation for direct flexion.
Fig. 7.— Preparation for Baucher's direct flexi
56 ORDINARY RIDING.
a second snaffle, if the head is low, presses freely on the bars,
and develops all its power when the head is raised, provided
always that the head is kept a little beyond the perpen-
dicular. The moment the axis of the head comes behind the
perpendicular, the action of the curb is false, because it works
from below upwards. Then the horse begins to draw his
chin into his breast.
Such, I consider, is direct flexion and its object.
We can see that this flexion, as I practice it, is not done
by chance or simple routine. On the contrary, I have care-
fully given my reasons, and I have touched on all details to
justify my practice.
Unfortunately Baucher, who was the first to improve the
art of flexions, by making it the base of his method, did not
give a complete account of its mechanism. This did not
matter much to him, because his marvellous equestrian tact
remedied every deficiency. Where his theory was false, his
hands and legs by themselves rectified, more or less
conscientiously, the error of his doctrine.
Baucher, however, could not put his tact into his books,
in which he left his good and bad doctrines. I consider that
by criticising him and by showing where he has failed, I shall
render increased homage to the great horseman. I maintain
that the flexion which Baucher has described, and which
is practised every day,* has done much to discredit in the
minds of horsemen this most useful exercise, which I con-
sider to be the first condition of good equitation.
Baucher's faulty flexion, which is in very common use
to-day, is made at the withers instead of at the poll. It
lowers the neck, and causes the horse to place the weight on
his shoulders, that is to say, it aggravates the natural fault
in equine conformation, and it makes him liable to fall by
* Alas ! ihe faults of masters are acquired more easily than their good qualities.
57
Fig. 8. — Incorrect and frequently employed flexion.
Fig. 9. — Lowering the head — a faulty practice.
58 ORDINARY RIDING.
carrying his head low, and to draw his chin into his breast
by bringing his head behind the perpendicular. We must
note that this fault was originated by Baucher, who, during
the greater part of his career, made the flexions at the
withers by lowering the neck. Compare Fig. 6, which
shows the flexion I have described, with Fig. 7, which
illustrates Baucher's flexion, and which I have taken from his
book. It is well to note that Baucher's horse in Fig. 7
has his legs stuck out in front, and consequently it is im-
possible for him to go forward. Nothing could be worse !
Compare the correct flexion, shown in Fig. 5, with that
in Fig. 8, which is the more frequently practised of
the two.
Towards the end of his life Baucher recognised this
mistake (see his last edition, 1874); but he restricted himself
to raising the head of the horse, without making the flexion
when it was high. Whatever he did and whatever errors he
made, he was an incomparable horseman. The people of
to-day who make faulty flexions succeed only in ruining
their horses. There is no reason for stopping when one has
started on this road. Certain authors have thought it right to
systematically lower the neck, than which there is no better
means of ruining a horse ! As a great curiosity, I have
shown in Figs. 9 and 10 two illustrations which appeared
in recently published books, and which show the lesson of
lowering the neck. That could be called the art of teaching
a horse how to break his knees !
This explains how it is that many people say that they
have made their horses perform flexions without any good
result, a fact which should not surprise us. As we have just
seen, the flexion is such a delicate thing that an incapable
horseman who practises it, will often spoil a horse instead
of improving him. If, on the contrary, the reader under-
stands the principles and practice described in this chapter,
59
Fig. I o.- Lowering the head— a faulty practice.
Y\cr. 1 1. —Direct flexion when going forward.
6o ORDINARY RIDING.
he will always be certain to obtain by flexion the benefits
which he has a right to expect.
To thoroughly explain the mechanism of flexion, I have
been obliged to suppose that the horse was halted. But
I must explain, contrary to what is everywhere practised,
that I begin the direct flexion while going forward. With
this object, I place myself at the shoulder of the horse,
which I stimulate by a click of the tongue, while drawing
him forward by a stronger feeling of the reins of the snaffle
(Fig. ii). Apart from this, the flexion is done exactly as
I have indicated.
When I have obtained a certain number of flexions of
the jaw, I let the horse walk freely beside me for a few
moments, and I carefully avoid prolonging the flexions,
although I frequently begin them again. When the
horse has got into the habit of readily doing the direct
flexion at the first indication of the reins by relaxing his
jaw, the breaker should modify his method in order to
make the animal assume as nearly as possible the conditions
he will be under when mounted. This will be a new form
of work.
The breaker, always in the same position, and being on
the near side of the horse, holds the reins of the curb and
snaffle in his right hand at about six inches from the jaw.
The left hand holds the end of the snaffle reins and the
cutting whip, the point of which he keeps on a level with
the animal's side. Under these conditions, at the moment
when the right hand demands the direct flexion, the whip
performs the office of making the horse go forward, as before
described (Fig. 4).
We are then placed under the same conditions as when
mounted. No longer, as was recently done, the forehand
draws forward the hind quarters, which now get under the
body, and propel the forehand on the head held by the
OBJECTS OBTAINED BY DIRECT FLEXION. 6i
reins,* i.e., by the hand of the rider. In this manner the
horse learns to go forward without leaning on the bit, and
is then perfectly light, in the same way as we ought to
make him later on when he is mounted. The work which
I have just described not only prepares the mouth of the
horse in an admirable manner, but also makes the hand of
the rider skilful. There is no doubt that it is easier to make
the jaw supple when standing still than during movement ;
but there is the risk of making him keep behind the bit,
which inconvenience, or rather danger, is avoided when going
forward (Fig. 4). I insist on this point ; because, if the work
of loosening the jaw during movement is certainly longer and
more difficult, it guards us against the great danger of putting
the horse behind the bit, which is always the inevitable result
of the first flexions. Therefore, take your time and do well.
Although, as a rule, I maintain that it is of the greatest
importance for the whole of this work to be done when going
forward, I am obliged to admit that it would be impossible or
at least extremely fatiguing to do it with certain horses which
throw themselves suddenly on the hand, or which have their
heads too low. Personally, I have never found these faults
carried to such an extent that I have been unable to obtain
direct flexion and relaxation of the jaw while going forward.
If the work is stationary, we should take the utmost care to
prevent, at all hazards, the horse from getting behind his bit
If he reins back ever so little, we should immediately send
him forward by touching him on the side with the whip, while
holding the end of the snaffle reins in the left hand (Fig. 4).
If the horse stretches out his hind legs behind, or his fore legs
* We will notice in Fig. 4 the manner in which the right hand of the
breaker holds at the same time the reins of the snaffle and those of the curb.
The former are held between the thumb and closed index finger, and keep the
neck high by their upward pull. The latter are held more or less horizontally,
and serve to loosen the jaw, the left curb rein being passed between the middle
finger and the ring-finger ; and the right, underneath the little finger.
62 ORDINARY RIDING.
in front, he is also behind his bit, and should be immediately
sent forward.
A horse may be behind his bit without backing, and this
may happen even without the animal moving his feet. He
will have this tendency if a perpendicular dropped from the
point of his buttocks comes behind his hocks, in which case
the weight will be on his hind quarters. We should then act
energetically on the snaffle, in order to bring the body for-
ward and maintain the balance of the body during flexion, or
to avoid a return of the tendency to get behind the bit.
After this preparation, direct flexion becomes easy when
mounted, especially as the action of the legs in propelling the
horse on the hand is more energetic and effective than that of
the whip.
Here the chief point is to begin, not by the action of the
hand, but by that of the legs, which ought to be used
progressively. In mounted work, as in flexion on foot, it is, of
course, necessary that the hand makes the concession at the
moment when the horse yields, in order to retake its action
immediately afterwards. The entire practice of flexions is
comprised in timely taking and giving. It is, of course,
understood that the legs should always remain close to the
animal's sides, as much for obtaining a definite concession of
the jaw as for avoiding the tendency to get behind the bit.
It is also taken for granted that the flexion should never be
made at a halt, when the horse is mounted, which is a most
objectionable practice. As we can obtain relaxation of the
jaw only by light touches of the spur, the horse contracts the
habit of resting on the spur when standing still. As we have
then no means of making him go forward, or of preventing
him from reining back, he becomes restive.* This result is all
* Baucher made the mistake of practising the flexion when mounted at a halt.
He naturally proceeded by light touches of the spur. Only his great tact saved
him from making his horses restive.
OBJECTS OBTAINED BY DIRECT FLEXION. 63
the more certain when the horse no longer dares to go up to
his bridle when moving forward, on account of the pre-
ponderance which the hand has on the legs, whenever the
animal wants to advance.
Fig. 12. — Baucher's flexion when mounted.
Finally, the work of making the horse go forward consti-
tutes the great difference between my system of equitation
and that of Baucher.
My first lesson has been to make the animal go forward.
In his Dictionnaire raisonnce (V equitation (1833), page 112,
64
ORDINARY RIDING.
Baucher writes : " During the first lessons the entire half-hour
should be occupied in stationary work, except the last five
minutes, during which the rein-back will be practised."
Twenty-five minutes of stationary work and five minutes of
reining back is a deplorable waste of time. For a lesson of
Fig. 13. — Correct flexion when mounted.
half an hour's duration I would devote thirty minutes to
forward work, without any stationary work or reining back.
We shall subsequently see that this difference in method is
found in all the work.
Naturally, Baucher's flexion is as incorrect in mounted
work as iri worl< on foot. Fig,, 12, which is borrowed without
any change from his- book, enables \is to judge his work b}^
comparing it with Fig. 13, which represents correct flexion.
OBJECTS OBTAINED BY DIRECT FLEXION. 6$
Fig. 14, which is taken from a recent work,, shows in an
exaggerated form all the faults of Baucher's bad flexion. In
it the head is low, far trom the centre of gravity and behind
the perpendicular ; the horse has all his weight on his
Fig. 14. — Exaggerated example of Baucher's incorrect flexion.
shoulders, and is ready to bring his chin into his breast ; the
muscles of the jaw are contracted, and the action of the curb
is in a downward direction, and is consequently false. This
caricature of breaking is simply perfect ! The exact opposite
of all these conditions is what we should seek to obtain from
direct flexion.
' 5
66 ORDINARY RIDING.
MAKING A HORSE QUIET TO MOUNT.
To make a horse quiet to mount, we must adopt a method
by which we can easily stop him from annoying the rider, or
preventing him from getting into the saddle. Let us examine
the means we should employ, and let us place ourselves in
such a position that we will be able to circumvent any defence
which his instinct or bad habits may prompt him to make.
The vicious or restive horse rears, lashes out, strikes with
his near forefoot, or cow-kicks with his near hind. With such
an animal we should make use of the lunging rein and driving
whip, and make a feint of putting a foot in the stirrup while
standing close to the near shoulder. If he rears, we can hit
him thoroughly with the lash of the whip across his buttocks.
As he is held by the lunging rein, we can remain sufficiently
far away from him to avoid being struck. Every time he
rears we should begin again until he yields. If he reins
back, we should employ similar methods. If he kicks, raise
his head and loudly scold him. If he strikes out in front, cut
him with the driving whip on the offending leg.
Besides horses which resist in this manner, there are others
which are simply timid, nervous, restless, ticklish, or irritable,
and which do not remain as quiet as they ought to do,
although they do not really "show fight." What will they
do? They will perform only four movements — namely, go
forward, run back, shy off to the right or to the left, against
which we should act as follows :
I take the near rein of the snaffle in my left hand, and with
the same hand I catch hold of the mane at about the middle of
the neck in such a manner that there is a slight tension on the
rein which I hold. I pass my right hand, in which I have my
cutting whip, over the neck, seize with it the off snaffle rein,
which I draw up only slightly, and finally take hold of the
pommel of the saddle with the right hand (Fig. 15).
MAKING A HORSE QUIET TO MOUNT. 67
I then face the left shoulder of the horse. If he runs back,
a cut on the croup with the whip will bring him forward.
This can be repeated twenty or thirty times till he yields.
If he goes forward, I bring him back by feeling the reins. If
he shies to the left, I draw his head to that side, and conse-
quently bring his hind quarters to the right. Similarly, if he
Fig. 15. — Proper way to mount.
shies to the right, I draw his head to the right, so as to make
him carry his hind quarters to the left.
He makes his defences, when the rider touches the stirrup
with his foot, when he puts his foot into the stirrup, or when he
raises himself by his straightened left knee, and before he has
passed his right leg over the saddle. We should not go to
the second or third of these movements until we have made
the horse perfectly steady in the preceding movement. We
should not place ourselves in the saddle until the animal
remains steady during all the time wc are standing on the
5*
68 ORDINARY RIDING.
near stirrup iron, at which moment it often happens that
the horse attempts one of the defences already described. If
the movement is only slight, we can correct it by the action
of the reins without changing our position. If it is violent,
we can place our foot on the ground and correct him with the
whip.
Finally, we should bear in mind that as soon as we are in
the saddle, we should have the snaffle reins in their respective
hands, and we should hold them only just short enough to
enable us, by a light feeling on them, to steady the horse, in
the event of his " playing up."
I ought to admit that my method of getting into the saddle
is contrary to the principles which are generally taught. In
fact, it is always laid down that to mount, the rider ought to
take both reins of the snaffle and a lock of the mane near the
withers in his left hand ; place the right hand on the centre of
the saddle, raise himself on the stirrup, and, when his left knee
is straight, carry his right hand quickly from the cantle to the
pommel, while passing his right leg over the horse. He then
sits down. By this system the rider is unable to counteract
any movement made by the horse. Further, at the moment
when the right hand passes from the cantle to the pommel, the
equilibrium of the rider is as unstable as possible, and can be
upset by the slightest cause. Precisely on account of this want
of equilibrium, the rider falls, instead of sits, down on the
saddle, and by falling in this manner he can unfortunately
hurt himself, especially on the pommel, if the horse makes a
single step to the rear.
With the method which I advocate, the rider is able to avoid
any accident, to stop any "playing up," or even any movement
on the part of the horse ; because he holds a snaffle rein in
each hand.
When I lunge a horse, I take care to girth him with a
moderate degree of tightness before putting him into a trot.
MAKING A HORSE QUIET TO MOUNT. 69
And as lie gets a bit slack from trotting, the girths do not in-
convenience him when I mount. I always carry out this
procedure when mounting a difficult horse for the first
time.
Grooms are in the habit of girthing up their horses very
tightly, and it would be contrary to a knowledge of the weak-
nesses of human nature to think that they would give up this
practice on the very day when I try to succeed at what they
have failed to do. On that day they girth up more tightly
than ever. They know that the tighter a horse is girthed up
the more he will plunge, and therefore they feel certain that
the)' will presently have the innocent pleasure of seeing me
chucked over the ears of the horse. Nevertheless I encourage
them to girth up more tightly, and after they have squeezed
him as tightly as they can I take him by the bridle, walk him
about for a few minutes, and the moment before putting my
foot in the stirrup I let out the girths one or two holes. I am
then in the saddle, and the animal gives a great sigh of
relief, which for the moment prevents him from thinking of
pla)'ing up.
I never allow my horses to be held when mounting them.
All horses become quiet if not held, and they will gain confi-
dence if we mount and dismount several times consecutively,
while patting them on the neck. We ought to mount as
quietly and lightly as possible. Above all things, we ought to
avoid bustling the horse when starting ; because, if he expects
we are going to do this, he will never stand quietly to be
mounted.
I never require anything from the horse which I mount for
the first time. I am content if he walks straight on. I keep
the reins separated, I feel only those of the snaffle, and I never
touch the horse with the spurs for the first few lessons. I
ride him a few times round the school to the right and to
the left, while leaving him as free as possible, supposing, of
yo ORDINARY RIDING.
course, that he does not play up, which he will very rarely do
if I require almost nothing from him.
If he carries his head too low, I try to raise it by almost
imperceptible touches on the snaffle reins, which I draw
upwards, and not from front to rear. If he holds his head too
high, I feel the curb reins very lightly, and in such a way as
not to stop his forward movement. If he stops on account of
the action of the curb, I let the reins loose and apply my legs
behind the girths. In this case the legs have an effect similar
to that of the cutting whip during work on foot. I keep on at
the horse until I have obtained forward movement, which is
the great end that has to be obtained at any price.
Having obtained this forward movement, I prolong it, as I
have said, for a few turns round the school, while trying to get
the head into a good position ; but I work very lightly, and
always in such a manner as not to stop the horse. If I obtain
only a little play in the mouth, I get off, and make a few
flexions on foot until he obeys. I then give him some carrots
and send him to the stable.
Carrots ought always be cut lengthwise and never across^
in which case they might stick in the animal's throat. I have
seen a horse almost choked by swallowing carrots cut across.
I do not give sugar to a horse, because if he is bridled and plays
with his bit, it will produce a foam that will soil one's clothes,
which is the smallest objection. A more serious one is that
sugar given in the stable predisposes a horse to crib-bite.
He begins by licking his manger, and, finding the taste
agreeable, he finishes b)- persistently biting it, which is a
habit that will often make him crib-bite or wind-suck.
In this mounted lesson, I have asked the horse only to go
forward, while making him lightly work his jaw. Further, as a
general rule, we should not demand from him several things at a
time, because he will be apt to confuse them, and we may mistake
for disobedience a simple want of comprehension on his part.
Off snaffle rein
tnd of
curb reins
Fig. i6. — Equal tension on all four reins.
Curb '
reins
Fig. 17. — Action of the curb; little finger brought towards the body.
Curb rem.b
Off snaffle rein
Curb reins
Snaffle
reins
Fig. 18. — Action of the snatTle ; thumb brought towards the body.
72 ORDINARY RIDING.
HOW TO HOLD THE REINS.
There are three orthodox ways for holding the reins,
namely, the English, German, and Frencli. I do not hesitate
to say that the French way is the best.
As the snaffle is higher in the mouth than the curb, its
principal action is to raise the head of the horse, and that of
the curb to lower it. In other words, the snaffle is an
elevator ; the curb, a depressor. Therefore, the reins should
occupy the same respective positions in the hand, as the
snaffle and curb do in the mouth, namely, the snaffle reins
should be above the curb reins.
Contrary to this very simple principle, the English place
both reins at the same height in the hand and hold one rein
between each finger. The Germans act in a still more con-
trary way to the principle in question, by holding the snaffle
reins below the curb reins, supposing that the hand is in
a vertical position. It appears that the Germans have even
less common sense than the English.
Reason tells us that the reins should be held in the French
manner ;* the hand vertical, the left curb rein under the little
finger of the left hand ; the right rein between the ring finger
and the middle finger, while their ends pass between the
thumb and index finger. The two reins of the snaffle are
joined in the same hand, and taken between the thumb and
index finger (Fig. i6). With the reins held in this manner
and without displacing the hand, we are able, by the mere
play of the wrist, to obtain the movements which are indis-
pensable for acting on the mouth ; supposing, of course, that
the animal is broken.
1st. The hand placed in position exerts an equal tension
on all four reins (Fig. i6).
• Is it not strange that in the French army the (icrnian metliod of holding the
reins is adt)ptecl, namely, the snaffle rein under the curb rein ?
73
Fig. 19.— Action of off curb rein ; knuckles lowered.
Curb reins
Off curb rei
Curb reins
Snaffle reins
Fig. 20. — Action of near curb rein ; knuckles raised.
Off snsffle rein
Near curb rem
End of yi
snaffle reins
fnd 0/ curb re/ns
Fig. 21. — Separating the curb and snaffle reins.
74 ORDINARY RIDING.
2nd. Action of the curb ; the httle finger brought towards-
the body (Fig. 17).
3rd. Action of the snaffle ; the thumb brought towards
the body (Fig. 18).
4th. Action of the off curb rein ; the knuckles lowered
(Fig. 19).
5 th. Action of the near curb rein ; the knuckles raised
(Fig. 20).
We can obtain all the necessary effects on the mouth of the
horse by the rotation of the wrist from rear to front (Fig. 17) ;
from front to rear (Fig. 18) ; from left to right, i.e., prona-
tion (Fig. 19) ; and from right to left, i.e., supination (Fig. 20).
When the reins are held in this manner, they are kept
apart as far as possible, supposing that they are in one hand.
The effect obtained is almost similar to that which would be
produced if the reins of the curb were held in the left hand
and the snaffle reins in the right hand, a little above them.
We can easily, if required, use both hands ; because the right
hand can take up the snaffle reins or put them back into the
left hand without disarranging or even touching the curb
reins (Fig. 21).
Finally, if we wish to have all four reins separated, namely,
the near ones of the curb and snaffle in the left hand, and the
off ones in the right hand (which is often necessary), we have
only to take the off reins in the position in which they are, by
placing the right hand between the reins of the curb and
those of the snaffle in such a manner that the off rein of the
curb will come under the little finger of the right hand, and
the off rein of the snaffle between the thumb and index finger
of the same hand, in exactly the same position as the reins
are in the left hand.* We thus keep in the two hands the
*Fig. 22 shows the right hand being passed between the off rein of the curb
and the off rein of the snaffle, and Fig. 23 shows the right hand being closed
on these two reins. Fig. 24 shows the reins separated.
75
bnaffle reins
Curb reins
rem
Curb reins
Fig. 22. — Passing the right hand between the off curb rein and off snaffle rein.
Near snaffle rein remaininQ m the left
_ hand
r> Off snaffle rem held by tfie
'la oy me
right hand
r curb rem remaining iri
tn'e fe\i tiand
Off curb rein tal<en by the
right hand
Snaffle reins I* /// '^ ^""^^ '^elns
Fig. 23. — Closing the right hand on the off curb rein and on the off snaffle rein^
f^ear snaffle rem
Snaffle reins
Fig. 24. — Separating the rein:
Off curb rein
Curb reins
^6 ORDINARY RIDING.
same distance between the reins of the curb and those of
the snaffle as determined by the httle finger and thumb.
By an inverse movement, we can replace the four reins in
the left hand, in the position which they previously occupied.
I need hardly add that, until the breaking of the horse is
fairly well advanced, we do not draw up all four reins, which
would consequently tend to combine and sometimes even to
■confuse their effects. When we have to deal with a green or
insufficiently broken horse, in which case we may require to
produce very quickly precise and particularly decisive effects,
it is well to separate the reins.
TEACHING A HORSE BY THE WHIP TO OBEY LEGS
AND SPURS.
I invariably begin my lesson by repeating the former exer-
cises, but every day I require something new from the horse.
As soon as the horse goes freely in every direction with a
slight play of the jaw, I teach him to obey the leg and then
the spur. This work should be done on foot and by means
of the cutting whip.
While facing the horse, I take the snaffle in the left hand*
close to the mouth so as to hold the head high. With the
whip, which I hold in my right hand, I touch the horse very
lightly just behind the girths, at the place where the spur will
act, and at the same time I carry his head to the left.-f* The
horse should thereupon carry his haunches to the right. He
will show that he obeys by taking one or two steps in that
* The buckle of the bridoon rein ought to remair. in the left hand during all
the work on foot.
t This is what is termed lateral effects, because the effect on the forehand and
that on the hind quarters are produced on the same side. In diagonal equitation,
which is rational equitation and the consequence of good breaking, the effect on
the forehand is always on the side opposite to that on the hindquarters. It is
the only way to secure the movements in their entirety.
TEACHING A HORSE BY THE WHIP. 77
direction. I then stop him and pat him on the neck. If, on
the contrary, he strikes out in front or kicks, on account of
being touched by the whip, I rate him loudly and hold his
head very high, which will oblige him to lower his croup.
It is of the greatest possible consequence that the patting
on the neck should immediately follow the act of obedience
on the part of the horse, in the same way as punishment
should follow disobedience. This is the fundamental principle
of breaking.
If the horse throws himself on the whip, that is to say, to
the left, which ticklish horses are inclined to do, we must
carry his head forcibly to the left, so as to bring his hind
quarters to the right ; but should not punish the animal,
because, as I have already pointed out, his action is instinc-
tive. When we have put him several times through this
work, which does not fatigue or trouble him, he readily yields,
and does it on both sides. I recommend the breaker to be
content with two or three steps. He should stop and pat the
horse on the neck each time the animal obeys. I recommence
this work very often.
When the horse readily yields to the whip on both sides,
we should not turn his head to the side opposite to that
towards which he turns his hind quarters. He should be kept
straight, so that he may obey only the indication of the whip.
This work with the whip prepares the horse to bear and
understand the action of the leg and spur. At the same time,
it places the head in a good position, and it is an excellent
and indispensable suppling exercise before coming to the
lateral flexions which we will presently consider.
Baucher practised the lateral flexions before teaching the
horse to yield his hind quarters to the whip. This method is
wrong, because, when we begin the lateral flexions, the
instinct of the horse makes him carry his hind quarters to the
side opposite to that towards which we bend the neck. If we
78 ORDINARY RIDING.
have not taught obedience to the whip, how can we straighten
the hind quarters ?
HORSE MOUNTED — FIRST DEFENCES — MEANS FOR
OVERCOMING THEM.
In the preceding chapter I have taken for granted that
when I am mounted, the horse will go forward, if I want him
to do so. As the animal will not always be obedient, it is
well to be forearmed against any probable or even possible
resistance which he may make. It is therefore necessary to
keep the legs close to his sides, in order to avoid being taken
off our guard by an abrupt movement, and, above all, to lean
the body well back, so as to put the weight on our seat. We
are then ready for anything that may happen.
If the horse tries to buck, we should press him forward with
the legs and hold his head high. It is not hard to sit a for-
ward plunge when the head is kept high.* But the rider is
easily displaced if the horse bucks without going forward,
places his head between his fore legs, and arches his back. In
this case, as the rider is not able to make the horse go for-
ward, he should turn him to the right or left by means of the
snaffle. Each time he tries to stop by lowering his head, he
should be turned afresh ; but it is not necessary to insist on
turning him more to one side than to the other side.
All horses have a soft and a hard side to their mouths. At
first, if the horse resists when we try to turn him to the right,
we should content ourselves by trying to turn him to the left.
The great thing is to prevent him from bucking without going
forward, his bucks being made in order to get rid of his
rider.
Later on, when the horse has made some progress in his
* Bucking without going forward is the most difficult of all movements to sit.
If the horse cannot be made to go on and if he continues to buck without
advancing, it will be impossible to sit him.
HORSE MOUNTED— FIRST DEFENCES. 79
breaking, it would be evidently wrong to let him turn to the
right, if we wanted him to go to the left ; but at present we
should consider only his acts of resistance. It is certainly a
great point gained to be able to prove to him that he cannot
get us out of the saddle. If he succeeds in doing this, we
ma\' be certain he will continue to try on the same form of
defence.
The danger of at first requiring the horse to turn to which-
ever side we wish, consists in the fact that by doing this we
run the risk of prompting the animal to add a second act of
resistance to the first one. In fact, when we wish to turn the
horse to the left, for instance, we are obliged to take a strong
pull on the left rein, and may thus make him pointe (half
rear) or rear* by throwing too much weight on his hind
quarters.
The pointe or lancade is a forward spring in which the
forehand is kept higher than the croup. Like all other
forward movements, it is not dangerous, because its displacing
effect is not great.-}- The movements of the loins and croup
are, however, very disconcerting to the rider. When the
horse rears, he stands up on his hind legs, which he keeps
fixed on the ground. This is a very dangerous form of
resistance and may cause the animal to fall backwards.
In my youth, when my horse reared, I used to put both arms
* We may succeed in preventing the rear or the '■'■pointe " by the vigorous use
of the spurs. But to do so, we should seize with precision the fleeting moment
when the horse holds himself back and is about to throw his weight on his hind
quarters. If the spurs are driven in at this moment, they will send him forward
in a disordered manner, no doubt ; but that does not matter, because they will
have prevented him from fixing his hind legs on the ground. If the rider allows
this critical moment to pass, the use of the spurs will be dangerous, because it
will still further prompt the animal to rear.
t In the half-rear the rider ought to bring his body forward, keep his legs
close to the animal's sides, hold his hands low, and leave the reins slack
(Fig. 65). In this illustration, the off reins are lightly felt because I was try-
ing to make the horse canter to the right on three legs. We can see that the near
snaffle rein is quite loose.
8o ORDINARY RIDING.
round his neck and bring my head to the right ; consequently,,
the horse's head was against my left shoulder. I subsequently
saw the inconvenience of this position, in which one is too far
forward on his neck when he brings his fore legs down on the
ground. And as we are then obliged to give him his head,
he is at liberty to send us over his ears by a strong kick with
both hind legs, or to give us a blow in the face or chest with
his head, in the event of his throwing it up.
From a very long experience I have found the following to
be the best means of avoiding accidents which may happen
from rearing. Separate the reins — as one should always do,
when a horse rears — and take hold of the mane in the left
hand at about the middle of the neck. When the horse
stands up on end, bring the body well forward by the left
arm ; and when he comes down again, push the body back
into its place by quickly straightening that arm. If the
animal makes another attempt at rearing, again bring the
body forward, again push it back ; and so on, until he ceases to
rear. From the moment we stop trying to make the horse go
forward, we are able by this means to put up with the horse's
rearing for any length of time without difficulty. If he kicks,
our straightened-out arm will act as a prop, and if he springs
to the right about or left about, it will furnish a support which
will keep us in the saddle, and will enable us to avoid hanging
on to the reins, which is the usual cause of accidents. I feel
certain that the foregoing position is the best for keeping the
rider in the saddle, when a horse rears, or, rather, it is the
least bad, because the position of the rider is never good in
such a case.
I havej^had good luck with regard to rearing ; for although
I have ridden a great number of rearers, none of them has
upset me.
I do not believe that horses voluntarily throw themselves
backwards. As far as I can see, they simply lose their
HORSE MOUNTED— FIRST DEFENCES. 8i
balance. Usually the following happens : The horse by
suddenly getting up, causes the body of the rider to go back-
wards, which is sufficient to upset the animal. When a horse
is standing up on his hind legs, he may be compared to the
centre rod of a pair of scales which is in equilibrium ; and then
the slightest movement of the body of the rider, whether
forward or backward, forcibly draws the horse in the former
direction or in the latter.
I have said that I do not believe that horses voluntarily
throw themselves backwards. I mean that a horse will not
deliberately throw himself backwards as a means of resist-
ance. His instinct of self-preservation will be sufficient to
prevent him doing this. But I know that horses which are
suffering from disease of certain nervous centres fall back-
wards, and sometimes dash their head against a wall.
Here we have no concern with animals which are affected
by a disease similar to madness in man, and which are
unsuitable for any kind of work.
I have, however, broken, and seen broken by other breakers,
horses which had immobility or megrims. But they were only
violent and irritable, and their eyes became injected with
blood if upset in the slightest. In fact, they had only the
appearance of megrims. To succeed with such animals, we
require to have all the good qualities of a breaker and rider,
especially pluck.
Some horses which are affected with only a certain degree
of immobilite can be broken. Gaulois, which was a superb
Hanoverian horse, was supposed to suffer from this disease.
I made him into an excellent school horse, and rode him for
several years. It is true that Gaulois, like many other horses
which are reputed to have iminobihti, showed symptoms of it
only when he " played up."
I am greatly surprised that very few of all the authors who
have written on equitation say nothing of the struggles which
82 ORDINARY RIDING.
one always has with horses to a lesser or greater extent. To
believe many of them, the breaker is on a bed of roses, and if
he will use only their methods, he will be certain to make the
horse obey. What is the reason of this silence on their part ?
Are they afraid to frighten their readers, or do they wish to
make them believe that there are no struggles ? I cannot
say ; but in any case it seems to me preferable to speak the
whole truth, and to forewarn my readers of the accidents that
may happen during breaking, so that they may not be
surprised if the animal does not immediately submit to every
demand.
I have seen a great number of good breakers at work, and
they all had battles to fight ; Baucher more than any of the
others, because he required more.
The true talent of the breaker consists in making himself
master of the horse, especially in the event of a fight, by
suppling him, and by the employment of a rational method of
breaking ; because we must not forget that the horse always
struggles against his rider, more or less openly, until his
education is complete.
But we do not arrive at this result without more or less
violent struggles. Those who have not had experience of
these battles, upon the result of which depends the submission
of the horse, begin by provoking the animal to resistance, but
they do not dare to continue the attack. In this case the
horse quickly understands that he is master. He will renew,
as often as he likes, the form of defence which has served
his purpose, and thanks to which he is certain to have the
last word. This is the way to spoil the breaking.
My practice is altogether different. The moment the horse
shows fight I shake hiin up vigorously, but rationally.* We
should not tickle the horse with the spur, which would
* To stop a horse " playing up," lean Imck and lower the hands. Raising the
hands, which will also raise the centre of gravity, will be certain to cause a fall.
c*
HORSE MOUNTED— FIRST DEFENCES. 83
only aggravate the animal's resistance. On the contrary, our
attack on him .should be somewhat brutal, so that he rfia)^
immediately feel that his strength must )'ield to superior
force. Here the real difficulty is to have the pluck to attack
vigorously. Very few people make up their minds to do this,
in which is the only means of security ; because the horse,
astonished at the brutality of the attack, will submit, although,
if lightly tickled with the spur, he will increase his resist-
ance, and will soon get the best of his rider.
It is evident that whereas the attack should be vigorous, it
should be made in as rational a way as practicable, that is to
say, in a manner which will overcome the horse's defence by
" oppositions."* But, I repeat, the chief thing above all
others is the vigour, the energy of the rider. As regards
myself, once in the struggle, I pay little heed to lateral or
•diagonal equitation. I don't care if I increase the commo-
tion ; my great point is to be master, and to make the horse ^
understand that his defence is in vain. To achieve this grand '
result, when a horse contents himself by merely indicating a
resistance, I do not hesitate to provoke him to carry it out
fully, so as to bring him to reason. Here is the true secret
•of breaking, namely, to obtain the absolute submission of the
horse. A horse's breaking is not definitely completed if he
has made no show of resistance, because there may be
struggles for supremacy in the future. The object of breaking
is the destruction of the free will of the horse. As long as a
breaker hesitates to provoke struggles which he feels are
close at hand, and which he knows are inevitable, his breaking
is not complete.
We must also say, in a general wa}', that the tact of the
* To make an " opposition " is to do an action contrary to that which the horse
wishes to do. We succeed in this simply by combining the "aids," so as to
oppose the forehand to the hind quarters, or the hind quarters to the forehand,
namely, to carry one of them to one side, in order to throw the other on the
opposite side
6*
84 ORDINARY RIDING.
breaker ought to consist, throughout the whole course of
breaking, in discovering the defences which the horse is
preparing, and in anticipating and counteracting them before
they are made. This is more especially necessary in the
properly-called defences of the horse, which are not always
produced in the form of violent or unruly movements. It
constantly happens during breaking, that the horse, in order to
refuse to do what is asked of him, obstinately does what he
was previously taught. This is the history of every lesson.
During all the breaking, the defences of the horse are pro-
duced alternately to the right and left. When, by the force
of insistence, we have rendered one side supple, w^e may be
greatly astonished to see the horse use, as a defence, what we
have just taught him with much trouble, and to refuse to do
that which he did without any hesitation the day before. In
this case we must recommence the work and carry it on until
obedience is equally obtained on both sides. If there is a
difficulty in making such a horse canter with, for example^
the near fore leading, as soon as we make him do so, we will
find that in every case he canters with that fore-leg leading,
and refuses to lead with the off fore. In order to make him
canter with the off fore leading, we must begin over again all
the work we did in teaching him to canter with the near fore
leading, and alternate these two forms of canter, while making
him do the canter in which there is greater difficulty, more
frequently than the other kind of canter. We should con-
tinue in this way until obedience is perfect on both sides.
When a horse makes a defence always on the same side, we
may be sure that he does so on account of pain or of faulty
conformation.
Later on, when the breaking is more advanced, we shall see
the horse use, for example, the Spanish trot as a defence
against doing the passage or the piaffcr. In every case he
will try a less energetic work, in order to escape from a more
TO HALT AND STAND STILL. 85
fatifruinsr one. The ruses of a horse are infinite. The
breaker has to checkmate them b}- tact, art and energy.
THE WALK.
It is most important that a horse should walk with long,
regular and free steps, which can be obtained only by
allowing the animal great liberty of head and neck. If the
horse is lazy or dull, he should be made to go on, by closing
the legs. If he is impetuous, impatient, or fidgety, he should
be patted on the neck and encouraged by the voice. He
should be at once stopped if he begins to trot. No mistake
should be made between the trot and jog, which are entirely
different paces. Jogging, which is often adopted by the
horse, is very difficult to correct when it has become a habit.
It spoils the long striding walk, and is very fatiguing to the
rider. Keeping the horse in hand shortens the steps of the
walk, which become higher and shorter, according as the neck
is raised and the head is brought into a vertical position. The
same thing occurs in the trot and canter. The well-collected
horse is handsome, but he does not cover much ground.
TO HALT AND STAND STH.L.
It is absolutel)' necessary to be able to stop the horse when
one wishes. As a rule, the halt ought to be made pro-
gressively and not abruptly. It can be made at any pace,
and often even in cases when a sudden halt is indispensable.
The means for stopping the horse is always the same —
namely, raise the snaffle reins while drawing them back with
an equal feeling on both reins, so as to bring the weight on
the hind quarters ; at the same time, close both legs strongly
to bring the hocks under the animal's body, and feel the curb
reins. The horse is then between the hands and legs.
I cannot say that these three movements should be abso-
lutely simultaneous. They certainly come one after another,
86 ORDINARY RIDING.
but so closely together that the intervals are imperceptible.
Anyhow, they ought to be executed in the order I have indi-
cated. If, for instance, the movement of the legs precedes ever
so little that of the snaffle, the effect will be to make the horse
go forward, which will be the opposite to what is wanted.
This method of stopping the horse is the best and should
be the only one used. The halt should be made without con-
cussion. It is then painless for the rider, saves the horse's
loins and hocks, and is easy, because the hocks and pasterns
bend. To stop himself, the horse acts simultaneously with all
the parts of his body, makes no local effort, and preserves all
the elasticity of his loins, which bend and become slightly
concave. If we stop the horse only by the hand, and without
the help of the legs, the forehand will become arched in order
to resist the impulsion received, and will push back the hind-
quarters by a counter stroke in removing it from the centre.
In this case the loins become stiff and convex. The shock
which results- is painful for the rider, and often dangerous on
account of its violence, and is very bad for the horse, on
whom it inflicts pain in his mouth, shoulders, loins, and
fetlocks.
A halt, no matter how sudden it may be, should be smooth;,
if it is not so, it is badly executed.
The halt ought to be done by the same means at every
pace. It is, of course, understood that the faster the speed,
the more difficult is the halt, and the more should the rider
lean back.
The horse ought not only stop himself as quickly as his
rider wishes, but should also remain standing still as long as
he is required, wherever he may be. It is somewhat difficult
to make an impatient, nervous, or excitable horse stand still
at this time. We should calm him down, so as to gradually
accustom him to his surroundings. We .should begin in the
school when we are alone, and should pat him on the neck and
CHANGES OF DIRECTION. ^y
speak to him. Each time lie wishes to advance or go side-
ways, we should put him back in his place, and should not
allow him to take a step in any direction. If we allow him
to go to one side or the other, no matter how little, the
first movement will probably be followed by a second one ;
and so on. I repeat, that the best way to calm him down and
get him to stand steady, is to pat him on the neck and speak
kindly to him.
If the horse is alone and in an enclosed place, he will
readily give in, but to teach him to stand steady in a street,
we should bring other horses into the school and make them
move about. When he stands steady under these conditions,
we should renew the exercise outside, in some quiet place,
and should then, little by little, try him in places where there
is more traffic. I have already said that habit is every-
thing for a horse. Therefore it is only necessary to
accustom him to stand in the middle of the noise and
movement of the street, and to make him understand that
he will get pats on the neck for so doing.
After all, great gentleness, patience and gradual training
are the best means for making a horse stand still in any
place as long as we like.
CHANGES OF DIRECTION.
At first, all changes of direction should be taught at
the walk.
To turn to the right, we should lightly draw the off
snaffle rein with the right hand to the right, and ncjt towards
our body, so as not to stop the horse.
We find that the animal slackens his pace when he turns ;
because the forward reach of his shoulder which begins the
movement is decreased, so that the off fore leg of the horse,
if the turn is made to the right, covers only about half the
distance of an ordinary step. This period of arrest causes
88 ORDINARY RIDING.
the croup to swerve, because it cannot go forward, notwith-
standing its acquired impulsion. But if, at the moment
when the animal yields his head and neck to the pull of the
right rein, we slacken the hand, while supporting the legs,
we thereby force the right leg to take a pace as long as usual,
and shall consequently avoid the period of arrest, by obliging
the croup to follow the shoulders.
The rider can thus straighten the croup when it swerves
in turning, and can do it easily, because he feels to
what side the swerve is made, and consequently knows which
leg to employ. As we do not know to which side the
deviation of the croup may be made, w^e would run a great
risk of making a mistake, if we were to say in advance what
leg we ought to employ.
The question of using the outward or inward leg in
turning has been greatly discussed. The old school recom-
mended the inward leg, because they said that it helped the
turning movement. Baucher maintained, on the contrary,
that we ought to use the outward leg, so as to prevent the
hind quarters being swung round to the outside.
The practice of Baucher has been generally adopted.
The old teachers were wrong. They said that to turn to
the right, the rider had to bring the animal's shoulders to the
right by feeling the right rein, and to push the hind quarters
to the left by the right leg. This is lateral equitation in
all its beauty. But the}' did not take into consideration
the fact that the direction, not only of the shoulders, but of
the entire horse, had to be changed, and that consequently
the animal should remain straight.
The following is the simple solution of this problem. We
should appl}' an equal pressure of both legs. Then, if the
horse swings his hind-quarters round to one side, we can
keep them straight b)' the pressure of the outward leg.
The hind-quarters ought to follow the track of the
CHANGES OF DIRECTION, 89
forehand without deviating from it in the sHghtest degree
The horse ought ahvays to keep his liuid-quarters in the
same direction as the shoulders. It is the rider's business
to decide whether he should apply a more or less strong
pressure with one leg or with the other leg, according as the
horse swerves to one side or the other.
As a general rule, when we turn to the right, the hind-
quarters are inclined to swing round too much to the left ;
and vice versa. Therefore, unless in exceptional cases, we
ought to apply the outward leg somewhat more strongly
than the inward one when we turn.
In turning, the action of the leg, the office of which is to
prevent any deviation of the croup, should never precede
that of the hand, but should immediately follow it.
Another way is at first to turn the croup inwards, by
doing which, the movement of the head, and immediately
afterwards that of the neck and shoulders, is made difficult.
Besides, the arched condition of the croup and shoulders
will prompt the horse to resist the action of the rein.
We occasionally meet horses which naturally or by habit
go sideways. In this case, they always bring their croup to
the same side. If, for instance, they carry it to the right,
that is to say, inwards, when we turn them to the right, we
shall be obliged to apply the inward (right) leg more strongly
than the outward one. But if, in turning such a horse to
the left, he continues to carry his croup to the right, a
stronger application will have to be given by the outward
(right) leg. Therefore, with the same animal we may some-
times have to apply the inward, and at other times, the
outward leg.
To get the horse to readily change direction, and to give
him the required mobility, we should make him perform in
the school, different exercises, such as doubters^ voltes, demi-
voltes, and changes of hand.
90
ORDINARY RIDING.
The doublcr is a straight Hnc which we take, either across
or down the centre of the school, after having started from
some spot in the wall. Having arrived at the opposite
wall, we turn, and continually go on to the same hand.
(Fig. 25).
k .......
Fig. 25. — Doiibkr.
The volte is a circle which we describe on some point.
But, at the beginning, it is best to do the volte b\' leaving
the end of one of the long sides o{ the school. As a horse
has always a tendenc}' to enlarge the circle, he will keep
in bounds b\' the angle formed b}- the two walls which face
him. (Fig- 26).
CHANGES OF DIRECTION.
91
The demi-volte is made in the middle of one of the small
sides of the school. As it finishes on two tracks, we should
not ask the horse to do it before teaching him to move on
two tracks, which I will explain further on. (Fig. 27).
Whatever may be the pace at which the demi-volte is
Fig. 26. — Volte.
made, the shoulders should be the first to leave, and to
arrive at, the wall ; that is to say, the horse should always
remain on an oblique line. The demi-volte is usually done in
a very incorrect manner. Nothing is rarer than a well-
executed demi-volte.
It often happens that the rider uses his outward leg too
92
ORDINARY RIDING.
much in a change of direction, or that the horse, of his own
accord, carries his croup to the inside, or simply goes down
the centre. To remedy this, we should start, as for a demi-
volte, from the usual place ; but should continue to " double,"
while taking care to keep the horse very straight. If this
Oemi- volte to the right
Fig. 27. — Demi-volte.
does not suffice, we should deceive the animal by a demi-
volte ; thus doing, as I term it, a counter-demi-volte. (Fig. 27.)
We start, for instance, to the right, as for a demi-volte ; but
having arrived at the middle of the school, we finish the demi-
volte to the left on two tracks. The horse, who was wanting
to carry his croup to the right, is obliged to carry it to the
left by the vigorous action of the right leg, which at first was
CHANGES OF DIRECTION.
95
the inward leg, but which in this manoeuvre becomes the out-
ward one. There is no better exercise than this for keeping
the horse always straight and attentive ; because, by alternating
the demi-voltes and the counter-demi-voltes, it is impossible
for him to become " routined."
Fig. 28. — Diagonal change of hand.
There are three changes of hand. The most simple is the
diagonal chajige of hand, in which we go along one of the
diagonals of the school, on leaving the wall at the beginning of
one of the long sides. (Fig. 28.)*
* If we start diagonally at the end of one of the long sides of the school, we
will cross the school from one angle to the other, without having changed the.
hand.
94
ORDINARY RIDING.
To do the second or reversed cliange of hand, we start as in
the preceding movement, from one of the angles of the school,
always beginning at one of the long sides ; but having arrived
at the centre, we return by a half circle to the wall of the long
side which we left, and which we, of course, take on the left
Fig. 29. — Reversed change of hand.
hand, if we had it on the right hand, and vice versa
(Fig. 29.)
The counter-change of hand is the most complicated one.
In doing it, we start by entering the long side on two tracks,
and, having arrived at the centre of the school, we return to
the other end of the long side from which we started, while
CHANGES OF DIRECTION.
95
keeping on two tracks for the whole time. At the canter,
this movement requires two changes of leg, the first in the
middle of the school, and the second at the wall. If the rider is
going on the right, as in Fig. 30, he will begin at the canter
with the off fore leading. Having arrived at the centre of the
Fig. 30. — Counter-change of hand.
school, he will make the horse change, and canter with the
near fore leading, up to the wall, where he will make him
change to the off fore. We can see that in the counter-change
of hand there is no change of hand.
In a like manner we describe circles and figures of 8 in the
middle of the school. This is the best kind of work for sup-
96 ^ ORDINARY RIDING.
pling the horse, and is also the most certain means for making
the rider use his two legs in a timely way.
We do not learn to always keep our horse straight by con-
tinually " going large " ; because in this case the croup can
swerve only to one side. Also, I often work my horses, while
keeping them at one yard, and in large schools, at two yards
from the wall
We may further note that during the entire period of
breaking, the horse tries to keep as little straight as possible.
He will understand that if he carries his croup to one side he
will escape being collected, which consists in the hind quarters
propelling the body in the direction of its axis.
The best work for suppling the horse is the figure of 8 per-
formed a yard from the wall, at the walk, trot and canter; but
it should be done with the greatest possible correctness, namely,
with a light inward flexion of the neck, an energetic applica-
tion of the outw^ard leg, and support from the inward leg.
By preparing a horse to readily change the diagonal at the
walk, we also prepare him to start into the canter, and to
change his leg. On arriving at the centre, we make the horse
take two or three steps to the side, and we start him in the
required position on a new diagonal. We should take great
care to keep him straight, especially at the canter, because at
this delicate work, the horse has always a tendency to throw
his croup inwards, so as to escape the outward spur, which has
helped to straighten him, and against which he tries to guard
himself Hence the necessity, as I have recommended, of
opposing the inward leg. Finally, we can obtain impulsion
only by closing both legs.
LATERAL FLEXIONS.
Up to the present I have made the changes of direction
only in a rudimentary way. In the same manner, as my first
lesson was to drive the horse forward, I only require him at
LATERAL FLEXIONS.
97
first, for the changes of direction, to turn and follow the line
on which I place him. In every case I go from simple things
to complicated ones. When the horse unresistantly obe}-s
everything, from the first indication to all the changes of
direction, we ha\-e to solve the new problem of displacing the
■f^^g- 31- — Preparation for lateral flexion ; jaw contracted.
entire body of the horse, while keeping it in equilibrium and
lightness. Lateral flexion is the preparation for the movement
thus executed. To make the lateral flexion to the right,* for
instance, we should stand at the near shoulder of the horse,
and take the bridoon reins in the left hand and the bit reins
* We may note that I here recommence the work on foot. I always practise
the foot work and the mounted vsork in the same lesson.
98 ORDINARY RIDING.
in the right, in exactly the same manner as for the direct
flexion ; and, having placed the hand and neck in the same
position as we would do for the direct flexion, we make that
flexion. When the jaw is relaxed and the flexion complete,
we push the head of the horse to the right, by light pressures
of the left hand on the bridoon reins, which we hold high, and
drawn from rear to front, in order to prevent both the lowering
of the neck and any tendency which the horse may have to
get behind his bit.*
At the same time, the right hand lightly feels the curb reins
from behind, while carrying itself to the right in such a manner
as to principally tighten the right rein,t until, the lateral
flexion of the neck to the poll being complete ; the tw^o reins of
the curb acting equally in giving and maintaining the play of
the jaw (Figs. 31 and 32 ), which ought to be the same as in
direct flexion.
At the beginning, we ought to be content with even the
appearance of obedience, and we should not want the horse to
do more than to turn his head slightly, while opening his
mouth. We must practise him very often at this work, and
try to progress by requiring more exactness each time in
these suppling exercises. We will certainly finish in obtain-
ing complete flexion, by never employing force and con-
tenting ourselves with a small degree of progress at each
lesson.
In equitation we obtain much by requiring only a little at
* See Fig. 31, preparation for lateral flexion, jaw contracted; Fig. 32,
lateral flexion, jaw relaxed.
t The left rein of the curb, however, remains slightly tense. If the right rein
only acts, it will pull the muzzle, and the head will no longer be in a vertical
position.
We may note that I give here the first lesson of obedience to the two similar
impulsions in the changes of direction. Up to this I have used the right rein
only to turn to the right. I now begin to teach the horse toobey the two simul-
taneous impulsions acting in the same direction, namely, the near snaflle rein
which pushes, and the off" curb rein which pulls, both acting from left to right.
LATERAL FLEXIONS.
99
a time. Patience then, and no roughness, which will always
prevent us from obtaining our end.
The exact position for the lateral flexion is the same as for
Y\g. 32. — Lateral flexion ; jaw relaxed.
the direct flexion, except that the neck, while remaining
flexed at the poll, from front to rear, is also bent to one side
(always at the poll), in such a manner that the direction of
the head is perpendicular to what it was in direct flexion,
7*
loo ORDINARY RIDING.
and faces the side upon which the flexion was made. The
neck, of course, remains high, as in direct flexion, the
muzzle being at the height of the upper part of the shoulder,
and the head in, or a little beyond, the perpendicular *
(Fig- 33)-
Thus, as we have seen by the right flexion, this flexion is
generally done in quite a different manner. The onl}- way
to find out what the lateral flexion ought to be, is to consider
the result we wish to obtain from it.
OBJECT.S OF LATER.A.L FLEXION.S.
1. To preserve, by the high position of the neck, the equili-
brium of direct flexion in changes of direction.
2. To strengthen and bind the entire forehand in the changes
of direction, by arranging all the parts in such a manner as. to
make the whole as compact and supple in the turning move-
ments, as in the direct movements.
In changes of direction, the shoulders naturall}' cover
the ground, while the hind quarters give the propulsion ; but
* In doing the lateral flexion we should take care not to alter the distribution
of weight. To counterbalance the effect of the flexion, the horse has a natural
tendency to make an opposition with the shoulder of the side away from which
the head is turned, and to put the weight of the forehand on the left leg if the
head is bent to the right. This is inevitable as long as the jaw resists, but the
moment it yields, its flexion, involving that of the neck, brings about an equal
distribution of weight on both legs. If we allow the horse to contract the habit
of opposing the shoulder of the side opposite to the flexion, the equilibrium, and
consequently the lightness, will be destroyed. In changes of direction, as in
movements on two tracks, the shoulder of the side opposite to that of the flexion
will always be late. The great difficulty in these exercises is to make this
shoulder move. Hence we should always try to relieve it by making only a
slight bend, whilst the snaffle rein of the side opposite to the change transfers the
weight to the inward shoulder (which has less ground to cover), by throwing the
weight at each stride to the side towards which the animal is proceeding. This
method enables us to obtain great propulsion in work on two tracks. A too
complete flexion will stop this propulsion by overloading the outward shoulder.
At first one is always astonished to learn that the flexion to the right overloads
the near shoulder, which is the natural result of the attempt made by the horse to
counterbalance the effort demanded of him.
OBJECTS OF LATERAL FLEXIONS. loi
the rider has no direct action on the shoulders. He acts only
on the neck through the mouth, and on the shoulders
through the neck. Lateral flexion, by strengthening and
binding all the parts together, places them in a state of
reciprocal dependence, which enables the rider to act on the
entire forehand. Without flexion, the fishing-rod, as I have
alread}' said, will be held by the thin end ; that is to say.
Fig. 33. — Correct lateral flexion.
there will be a heavy head (because it is far from the centre
of gravity) at the end of a slack neck. The action of the
reins, instead of directing the mass, is therefore limited to
bringing the head towards the forehand, which remains fixed
on the ground, in proportion as the horse is on his shoulders.
3. To preserve lightness in the cJianges of direction by the
flexion of tJie jazv.
In all movements, impulsion makes the horse a single whole.
I02 ORDINARY RIDING.
It is the hind quarters zvhich, by getting imder the centre, bind
themselves to the forehand * If all this propulsion was accu-
mulated on the bars of the flexed and movable lower jawf —
which should be connected to the entire forehand in such a
way that the flexibility! of the arm of the lever would be
always increasing from the shoulders to the jaw — the hands,
both in the changes of direction and in direct movements,
would send back with extreme lightness § to the legs, a part
of the propulsion which they have received from them. We
can thus make the entire body of the horse into an energetic
and harmonious whole by the good equilibrium of the levers,
and by the well-regulated use of the forces in changes
of direction. We will thus obtain lightness, and will
continue to have the horse in hand in all the changes of
direction.
In the foregoing remarks I have described what I consider
to be the nature and object of lateral flexion, and have tried,
as in the description of direct flexion, to give reasons for my
practice. Unfortunately the greater number of those who
teach horses flexions, do the work in a hap-hazard way,
without accurately understanding the nature of the result
which they ought to try to obtain.
I must say that Baucher did not give a better account of
the mechanism of lateral flexion, than he did of direct
flexion. Or, rather, he committed the same fault in lateral
* Many authors speak of connecting the forehand to the hind quarters, which is
an absurdity, because the hind quarters throw themselves on the forehand during
propulsion. The " aids " keep the body in good position by restraining or
regulating the force which comes from the hocks.
t When the jaw does not yield, nothing yields, and the horse changes his
position all in one piece during the changes of direction. He turns like a boat.
\ The only lateral movement in lateral flexion is done Ijy the poll ; the
jaw bends exactly as in direct flexion.
§ In lateral flexion, as in direct flexion, we should work the levers in such a
manner as to obtain the maximum effect l)y a minimum effort.
OBJECTS OF LATERAL FLEXIONS. 103
flexion as in direct flexion, because the latter is a prej^aration
for the former. This faulty flexion, which is adopted by
those who have followed him, is made at the withers instead
of at the poll. Here, again, as in direct flexion, we find the
exciting cause of the lowering of the neck, which changes a
useful exercise into an injurious one. In it the head is low,
the bend of the neck is at the withers instead of at the poll,
and the head of the horse is in profile instead of facing one.
Fig. 34. — Incorrect lateral flexion,
A comparison of Fig, 34 (wrong flexion) with Fig. 33
(correct flexion) shows us at a glance the advantages of the
lateral flexion which I ha\-e described, and the faults of the
flexion which is commonly practised. To complete this
criticism, I need only repeat all what I have said about the
wTong method of direct flexion and its faults.
We need not be surprised that flexions have been
blamed for softening the neck ; that is to say, for rendering it
movable, independently of the remainder of the body, which
104 ORDINARY RIDING.
is precisely the result of lateral flexion at the withers ;
whilst lateral flexion at the poll, on the contrary, stiffens
the neck, and binds all the forehand in such a manner as to
displace it from the whole, which is an indispensable result, as
I have explained, because the rider has no direct action on
the shoulders. Head low and isolated from the body by a
movable neck, which yields of itself without drawing the
shoulders, and allows the horse to oppose every movement of
the neck by a movement of the shoulders in an opposite
direction, with consequent impossibility of directing the fore-
hand, and the results of a lateral flexion at the withers and of
a lowering of the neck which follows it.
Contrary to direct flexion (which I never practise, either
on foot or mounted, except when going forward), lateral
flexion at first is done on foot, when the horse is standing
still, on account of the difficulty of putting the hind quarters
in movement. In mounted work, I practise lateral flexion
only when going forward. I make it an absolute rule, once I
am mounted, never to ask my horse anything except when
he is advancing, and I have consequently avoided making
my school horses inclined to get behind their bit, which is
the usual danger in high school breaking.*
In mounted work, lateral flexion is made by the same
mechanism as on foot. In order to bend the neck to the
right, the near snaffle rein, tightened and drawn to the right,
keeps the head high, and, being pressed against the upper
part of the neck, it pushes the head from left to right, while
the off curb rein, slightly tightened, aids this movement, and
loosens the jaw (Fig. 35).
* I have already said that a high position of the neck can be obtained only
during forward progression, and that the reason I keep the necks of my horses very
high is because I continue to drive them forward during all the work I give them.
In fact, the greater the forward impulsion, the more do the hind (juarlers get
under the centre, and the more is the forehand lightened.
OBJECTS OF LATERAL FLEXIONS. 105
As the first care of the rider should be to keep his animal
straight, he should use both legs to obtain impulsion, the leg
of the side opposite to the bend of the neck being applied
more strongly than the other leg.
When the legs act simultaneously, they are agents of pro-
pulsion ; but when one acts stronger than the other, it is an
^'g- 35- — Correct lateral flexion when mounted.
agent of direction. One leg should never act by itself : the
simultaneous action of both legs is propulsion ; the pre-
dominance of one over the other is direction. Finally, as the
hands are much more effective for guiding than the legs, they
should be used in a very light manner.
- The fundamental error of Baucher's lateral flexion is as
well marked in mounted work as in foot work. Compare
Fig. 36, which I have taken from Baucher's book, with
Fig. 35, which represents correct flexion.
io6
ORDINARY RIDING.
Fig. 37) taken from a recent book, shows clearh- that
many persons of the present day who claim to practise
lateral flexion have no idea of its mechanism or object.
Fig. 36. — Baucher's lateral flexion when niountecl.
The lateral flexion I have described is a suppling
exercise, whether it is done on foot or when mounted, and
OBJECTS OF LATERAL FLEXIONS.
107
is of great importance. Equilibrium, lightness and mobility
depend on the flexions and on getting the horse in hand,
and until he has learned all this, it would be folly to ask for
more. It is therefore of the highest importance to make the
lateral flexion complete, so as to obtain extreme obedience
from the horse.
Fig. 37. — Incorrect lateral flexion.
But when we practise lateral flexion in later work
(changes of direction, work on two tracks, etc.), we ought to
content ourselves with a very slight lateral flexion of the
neck,* which, like the head, should always be well placed.
We can understand that a too strongly accentuated flexion
checks the effect of propulsion by throwing all the weight
on the outward shoulder.
* As long as the jaws work we have lightness, and the slightest indication is
sufficient for changes of direction.
io8 ORDINARY RIDING.
The suppling exercise, which we term lateral flexion, is
not the less necessary, because it demands much in order to
obtain little. But we must recognise the fact that in later
work it is enough to obtain a slight bend of the neck,
provided that the head and neck are always well placed, and
above all things that the jaw is loose.
Fig. 38. — Lateral effects in rotation of croup and shoulders.
ROTATION OF THE CROUP AND SHOULDERS.
When I have successively made the horse readil}' }'ie]d to
the whip, and to perform the lateral flexions with equal
facility, I have then to combine both these movements into a
single movement.
I have at first taught him to )deld to the \\hip from left to
right, while helping the movement with the near snaffle rein,
which draws the head to the left, so as to carry the croup to
the right. This work is called " lateral effects " (Fig. 38);
because the two effects are produced on the same side (left
rein and whip to the left). Having done this, I succeed,
ROTATION OF CROUP AxXD SHOULDERS. 109
little by little, in making the horse give A\iiy, by holding the
head straight (Fig. 39), which is called a " direct effect."
Now it is necessar)' for him to yield, by adopting '' diagonal
effects " in the same way, namely, with the whip on the left
and th-e flexion on the right (Fig. 40).* For that purpose,
without using the snaffle rein, the end of which is in m)' left
1 ig- 39- — Direct eft'ects in rotation of croup and shoulders.
hand,f I catch hold of the near curb rein, quite close to the
mouth, with the left hand, while the right hand, at the height
* I have already explained that lateral equitation is only a preparation for
diagonal equitation, which is the only rational method, and by which alone we
can obtain combined effects. Everyone understands that the action of the rider
should be effected diagonally, for the simple reason that the movements of the
horse are produced diagonally.
t For the better explanation of the action of the reins, I have omitted the
snaffle in Fig. 40.
I may remind my readers that the proper way to hold the ends of the snaffle
reins is to have the buckle in the hollow of the hand (Figs. 38 and 39).
no
ORDINARY RIDING.
of the horse's breast, holds both the whip and the off rehi, for
which the withers act as a pulley (Fig. 40). The horse will
then make the direct flexion. I then try to obtain the
beginning of the right lateral flexion by raising the head by
means of slight upward jerks on the curb, and by pressing
the head to the right, while at the same time I make the
croup give way by working the whip from left to right.
Fig. 40. — Diagonal effects in rotation of croup and shoulders.
Finally, I increase these effects, until the yielding of the neck,
jaw and croup is complete.
I thus succeed in making the horse pivot, while I do the
complete lateral flexion.
I purposely use the word " pivot," which expresses m\' idea
in an incomplete manner, but which accurately discribes
Baucher's method of doing this rotation. In fact, during the
rotation of the croup, according to his plan, the forehand
ROTATION OF CROUP AND SHOULDERS, iii
remains stationary and serves as a pivot, which I have found
to be a mistake. During breaking, none of the parts of the
horse should be stationary, because immobihty often degener-
ates into a means of defence. Therefore, instead of making
the horse pivot, I tr}- to make him describe a very small circle
with the forehand round the centre, and a large concentric
circle round it with the hind quarters.
Of course, I do not pass abruptly from lateral effects to
direct effects, or from direct effects to diagonal effects. On
the contrary, I go imperceptibly from one to the other, so that
the horse may well understand what I want him to do, and
that he may not evince any surprise or confusion. The
employment of lateral effects has been a preparatory step
towards the execution of the movement by direct effects.
In the same way, direct effects are only a preparatory
measure for diagonal effects.
This work would be of no use if its only object was to
make the horse give way to the whip. Its great end is, with-
out frightening the horse, to prepare him to obey the legs at
first, and the spurs subsequently and by degrees.
We now come to mounted work, which I do by again
passing from lateral effects to direct effects, and from direct
effects to diagonal effects, as during work on foot.
If, when in the middle of the school, I wish to obtain the
rotation of the croup {reversed pirouette^ from the left to the
right, I bring my left heel close to the animal's side. As a
green horse does not know what I wish him to do, his first
movement will be to lean against my leg, at which movement
the good effect of the preceding work will come to my aid.
I touch him lightly with my whip on the left side, as near as
possible to my heel, and I avoid above all things touching him
too far back, which would be almost certain to make him
kick. At the same time I use the left snaffle rein to make
him carry his croup to the right. I can assure my readers
112 ORDINARY RIDING.
that no horse will resist these indications, if they are gently
employed.
I use the near snaffle rein according to the amount of
resistance which the horse often makes at first. I draw the
head a little more to the left, while continuing to touch the
animal's side with the heel and whip if the resistance is great.
The horse is forced to yield to these three forces acting on
the same side.
As soon as the horse takes a step to the right, I stop him
and pat him on the neck. I then let him go quietly round
the school, in order that he may think over what he has just
done. It is most important always to let a horse be free and
quiet after he has obeyed. A horse will accept this as a
reward, which we should not be chary in giving him. Stop-
page of work and pats on the neck are the only means to
make him understand that he has done well. We are so often
obliged to have recourse to punishment during breaking, that
we ought to eagerly seize the opportunity of patting him on
the neck, when he shows the slightest sign of obedience. The
more we pat him on the neck, the less will we be forced to
f)unish him.*
As I have just said, by letting the horse walk at ease for a
few moments, we give him time to understand the movement
which he has just done and the indications which cause him
to do it. Apparently the horse yields only physically, but in
reality it is his intelligence, or, to speak more correctly, his
memory to which we appeal. We must therefore work on his
memory, and for that reason I allow him the necessary time
to permanently remember this fact.
Having let the horse go quietly round the school, I do the
* The greal art in breaking is to reward and punish in an appropriate manner
in order to do which we must seize the exact moment of obedience or resistance.
Here we must bear in mind the fundamental principle of breaking, namely, that
reward should follow obedience as quickly as punishment follows disobedience.
ROTATION OF CROUP AND SHOULDERS. 113
same exercise over again, twenty or thirty times, without
changing the side, until he obeys the moment I close my
heel to his side. I then give him similar work with the right
leg.
When the horse accurately obeys both legs, I put on
dummy spurs (stump spurs), in order to accustom him to
obey something more severe than the heel. Then, each day I
increase the effect of the leg, while diminishing that of the
whip, which I gradually discard.* Later on I come to the
spur.
I use the whip, only to aid the memory of the horse, and to
induce him to obey the spur without frightening him. We
should not forget that the effect of a touch of the spur on a
green horse at the beginning of the breaking, is exactly
similar to that of the sting of a fly, which he at first tries to
drive away with his tail. If he does not succeed in this, he
will cow-kick on the side he is pricked. If the insect does
not fly away, he will look out for some object, such as a wall
or tree, upon which to lean or lie, in order to crush the author
of his sufferings, the fly. Therefore, when we give him the
first touch of the spur, how can we expect that his first move-
ment will not be to cow-kick or to lean against a wall ?
We may see that it is a grave mistake to use the spur with-
out having prepared the horse for it, by making him succes-
sively obey the whip, leg, heel and dummy spur.
If we spur a horse which is neither prepared for nor
accustomed to it, he will not understand its meaning, and will
not obey. If we try to force him to do so, he, not knowing
w^hat we want him to do, and feeling the pain which we inflict
on him, will instinctively defend himself. The more severe the
attack, the more stubborn will be the resistance at first, and
* I have already said that I discard the whip when mounted, and I take it up
again only to make the horse obey the leg and to obtain the first extension of the
legs in the Spanish trot. In both cases I continue the use of the whip for only
two or three lessons.
8
114 ORDINARY RIDING.
the more energetic the subsequent defence. If the horse is
soft, he will lean against the spur ; but if he is impetuous, he
will immediately make a most violent defence, and the break-
ing will have failed in every way. Some animals will become
restive, others will become maddened at the mere approach of
the leg, and the breaker, instead of having taught anything,
will have rendered education impossible.
It is always thus in breaking, the great difficulty being to
make the horse understand what we want him to do. As we
can appeal only to his memory,* the means which we employ
with him should be simple, and should be invariably the
same.
In riding, the horse ought to be taught to understand that
the spur is simply an " aid," and that it becomes a punish-
ment only when he plays up.*f-
Many persons who have only a superficial knowledge of
equitation imagine that, instead of touching the horse behind
the girths with the spur, it is more rational to keep the knee
tightly pressed against the flap of the saddle, and by drawing
back the heel to spur the horse on the side. Nothing can be
more faulty than this method, by which the spur slides along
a large extent of the side. By it we succeed only in tickling
the animal and provoking him to defend himself, and we
are unable to spur him with sufficient power to drive him
forward and to paralyse his defence. The further back the
* For this reason, I have already said that in the same lesson we must care-
fully avoid requiring the horse to do two or more things which might confuse
him. As his comprehension is very slow, we ought to guard against perplexing
him.
t It often happens that the horse throws himself on the spur, sometimes to one
side and sometimes to the other. In this case we ought to effectively correct
him with the spur, for which object I place him in the middle of the school, and
drive my heel and spur into his rebellious side, so as to make him bring it round.
When he has thus made two or three pirouettes, I stop and begin again the work
I left off. If he again resists, I recommence the work, until he has thoroughly
iven in.
ROTATION OF CROUP AND SHOULDERS. 115
spur is drawn away from the i^irths, the nearer it approaches
the most tickHsh spot. In fact, horses are not tickhsh near
the girths, but all of them are ticklish further back.
Besides, in this kind of attack, the lower part of the leg
cannot remain close to the animal's side, because the foot
swings backwards and forwards ; the result being that the
attack is sudden, instead of the horse being prepared for it by
a gradual pressure of the leg. It should, on the contrary, be
capable of being regulated with precision, so that it can be
light, well-marked, or extremely severe, according to the
resistance offered by the horse to the indications given by the
rider's legs.
When spurring a horse just behind the girths, the knee
should be turned a little outwards, so that the spur, like a
sword, may be brought at right angles to the side, progres-
sively and with certainty. The scratching and fraying form
of attack is made without precision and by jerks.
Those who believe that the fact of the knee being slightly
turned outwards diminishes the firmness of the rider's seat,
should be taught that the rider gets his strongest grip by
means of the upper and back part of the calf of the leg.
Therefore the position which the leg occupies when it spurs
the horse just behind the girths, is the one which is most
favourable to the rider's firmness of seat.*
Gripping too tightly with the knees pushes the thighs
upwards, and causes the rider to be more or less raised out
of the saddle.
By gripping with the hollow of the leg just behind the knee,
we have, on the contrary, perfect adherence from the buttock
to the heel. Besides, we can do fine work with the horse only
* The fact that all beginners and had riders instinctively assume this position,
in order to get the greatest possible firmness of seat, prevents them from being able
to use the spurs. Besides, every rider instinctively adopts this position when
his horse plays up.
8*
ii6 ORDINARY RIDING.
by always keeping the heels close to his sides. With the
knees and toes turned inwards, the heels are too far from the
sides, and can work only by jerks. Good horsemanship
cannot be practised without progressive and delicate!}' effected
transitions.
When the horse readily yields to the legs, I change the
feeling on the reins b}- degrees. It is always necessary to
finally place the head of the horse on the side to which it is
directed. Nevertheless, the change should be made so
gradually that the animal will not notice it.
At first he wall yield to my leg only when I use it, while
feeling the rein of the same side — a lateral effect. 1 gradually
diminish the tension of the rein, until he will obey the leg by
itself, and I then employ both snafifle reins to keep his head
straight — direct effect. Finally, I succeed little by little in
using the opposite rein — diagonal effect.
Here progress will be similar to that which was obtained
when doing the same movement on foot ; solely by the aid of
the w^hip, that is to say, the horse will finish by rotating his
croup to the right, while keeping his muzzle to the right ; and
vice versa. At this work I never require complete lateral
flexion when mounted. A very slight bend towards the side
to which we are going is sufficient.*
Having obtained this result, I teach the horse to do the
simple pirouette, in which he turns his shoulders round his
hind quarters.!
We should not onl}- supple the hind quarters, but should
* When the horse readily yields to the action of the legs, it is well to use them
alternately ; but only as an indication, to make the hind quarters slightly yield, in
which case a step or two will be sufficient. The rider will thus succeed in
sending the hind quarters from one leg to the other leg, and to measure this
action. This is the beginning of "equestrian tact."
t This work can be properly done only when mounted, on account of the
necessity of supporting the hind quarters and of pressing the horse forward.
ROTATION OF CROUP AND SHOULDERS. 117
also give to the shoulders the greatest possible mobility, which
is an indispensable quality for every kind of work.
We can exert no direct action on the shoulders, as we can
on the mouth and hind quarters. The impulsion to put them
in movement is given by the hind quarters, which are put in
action by our legs ; and the direction is given by the mouth,
which receives the indication of the reins.
I shall now describe how I make the shoulders rotate,
namely, how I do the pirouette from left to right.
Having halted the horse in the middle of the school, I
carry both hands to the right and close the legs, in order to
prevent a retrograde movement ; the left leg being pressed
more strongly to the side than the right leg, so as to prevent
the horse from bringing his hind quarters round to the left. I
work the snaffle reins simultaneously with the legs, the off
rein being lightly drawn to the right, but not backwards,
while the near rein pushes the shoulders to the right. The
near rein performs another office, as follows : If the horse>
having carried his shoulders to the right, wishes to throw his
hind quarters to the left, a slight pull of the near rein gives
immediate help to the left leg to keep the croup in its place,
by carrying the head more or less to the left, according to
the extent the hind quarters have swung round to the left.
At the beginning we should make a large circle rather than
a small one, which would be a true pirouette. In this way
we keep the horse in hand, and we easily prevent him getting
behind the bit, which we should always take the utmost
care to do.
The absolute necessity of avoiding any tendency in the
horse to get behind his bit, makes it dangerous during the
first period of breaking to teach, simple or reversed pirouettes,
which are excellent exercises for both man and horse, when
they are sufficiently advanced in their education.
The reversed pirouette has the great fault of leaving the
ii8 ORDINARY RIDING.
shoulders inert ; and the ordinary pirouette, that of fixing
the hind quarters on the ground.
We cannot get a horse to do a pirouette, if we drive
him forward.
At the beginning of breaking we should not emplo}' any
movement which will leave one part of the horse stationary,
for the great point is to make the horse move with his whole
body.
Instead of pirouettes, it is better to do ordinar)' and
reversed voltes, in \\hich we can alwaj's press the horse up to
his bridle. The volte is, in fact, onl)" a pirouette described on
a large circle.
In the reversed volte, the croup describes the great circum-
ference. A horse which enlarges the circle has a tendency
to get behind his bit. In the ordinar}' volte the shoulders
describe the great circumference. Then, if the horse
diminishes the siz2 of the circle, he has a tendency to get
behind his bit, to avoid which fault he should be kept be-
tween the legs. We should ask him to do only movements
which bring his whole body into pla}-, and we should keep
pressing him forward.
SCHOOL WALK.
When the horse is well in hand at the ^^■alk, we can make
him do the "school walk," which is a shorter, lighter, and
more cadenced pace than the ordinary walk. In it, the feet
are put down in the same succession as in the trot, from which
it differs only b>' the fact that its steps are shorter.
To obtain the school walk, ^\•e should use the legs energeti-
cally and the hands moderately ; should make numerous
movements with the horse's whole body by means of these
aids ;* and should cover as little ground as possible, by
* By this I mean the movements of the horse as a whole which bring liini into
hand, namely, to send him by the legs on the hand and to send a part of the
impulsion from the hand to our legs. _
THE REIN-BACK. 119
shortening the steps. Too long steps show that the horse has
not begun to collect himself, without doing which his steps
cannot be in cadence.
The school walk is an excellent form of gymnastics, in
which the combined " aids " of the rider bring all the powers
of the horse into play. It makes him supple, graceful, light
and well posed ; in other words, it puts him into perfect
equilibrium, and it prepares him finall}' for the artificial paces,
and especially for the rassenibler, which of itself brings him
to the passage and piaffer.
I teach the horse to do all the changes of direction at this
school walk ; but only when he can do them easily at an
ordinary walk.
THE REIN-BACK.
People generally, when trying on foot to make a horse
rein back, commit the great fault of holding his head as high
as possible while pushing him back. The exact opposite of
this should be done ; because, by raising the head while
pushing the horse back, we overload the hind quarters,
which require to be light in order to perform this move-
ment.
In fact, the hind quarters are the first to move, which
they cannot do freely if they are overloaded. Even if we
tr}' to push back the horse onl)' a little, we will make him
get behind his bit and rear, which is a most serious vice.
To make a horse rein back properly, we should, on the
contrary, put the preponderance of weight on his shoulders.
In order to do this, I slightly lower the head of the animal *
by light, downward pressures on the snafifie reins. '
I stand directly facing the horse, and seize with each hand,
* Reining back is the only work during which I put extra weight on the
shoulders.
120 ORDINARY RIDING.
close to the mouth, a snaffle rein, with which I push him
back. I need hardly say that in this position the rein-back
is very easy, the horse being on his forehand and his loins
and hocks relieved. The hind feet, like those in front, will be
easily raised instead of being dragged, and when the animal
is pushed back by the snaffle he will not be able to arch
himself.
We ought to be contented with two first steps to the rear,
and should then pat him on the neck and bring him forward.
We should frequently recommence this work, which is better
than prolonging the rein-back, which at first will fatigue the
horse, who, not having his loins and hocks suppled, will have
his joints more or less stiff at this new work. The more we
prolong the work, the less will we impress the memory of the
horse ; because we do not stop to pat him on the neck and to
make him understand that he has done well. Finally, we
must bear in mind that all work which fatigues the horse
discourages him, if he is not brought up to it by degrees and
prepared by successive suppling lessons.
I never require from a horse more than ten or twelve steps
when reining back, and I then bring him forward the same
distance, while keeping him continually in hand. I never
make him do this movement more than three or four times
consecutively.
We rarely fail to obtain the rein-back by the means which
I have described, and which should be invariably combined
with great gentleness.
It sometimes happens that the hor.-e refuses to rein back,
either from stubbornness or from pain. I have seen horses
resist all known means, even the most violent ones, which,
unfortunately, are nearly always employed with these
animals.
In such cases I stand directly facing the horse. I hold in
each hand a snaffle rein close to the mouth, and I simply step
THE REIN-BACK. 121
on his feet while pressing him backwards. I have never met
a horse which would not yield to this method.
When the horse reins back without stiffness, and with the
head lowered, I try to make him do the same movement with
the head more and more raised, for which object I place
myself at his shoulder, and I do the direct flexion in reining
back. I thus endeavour to obtain a very free rein-back with
the horse well in hand.
If the horse reins back too quickly, in order to escape from
the bit, I draw the snaffle reins forward so as to make his
retrograde movement more slow. This is the normal rein-
back, for which the preceding w'ork is only the preparation.
It is evident that if the horse is ready to rein back at
the very first sign of the direct flexion, there will be no
necessity to lower his head, and still less to tread on his feet.
The lowering of the head is useful only to prevent him
getting behind his bit. I therefore do not practise it unless
the animal shows signs of wanting to rein back.
When the horse readily reins back by means of direct
flexion when held by the hand, I begin to put him through
the same work while on his back.
In mounted work I do not force the forehand. In fact, it
is dangerous to pull on the mouth, which action throws too
much weight on the hind quarters, and may consequently
lead to his getting behind his bit and rearing. Also, I never
attempt the mounted rein-back unless I am certain that my
horse will go freely forward by a pressure of the legs, which,
in m)' opinion, is the best means of mobilising the hind
quarters, and with which I always begin the rein-back. I feel
the bit reins only lightly, in order to make the horse lower
his head after I have halted him. I then close my left heel,
and the horse, being already obedient to the legs, raises his
near hind as if he was going to take a step to one side,
because he was taught to give way to the spur. At this
122 ORDINARY RIDING.
instant I gentl}- feel the off snaffle rein in a backward
direction, but not to one side, which would have the effect of
turning his head. The near hind foot, which is in the air,
places itself firmly down on the ground behind the off hind,
at the moment when the off snaffle rein makes the off
shoulder go back. I then close my right heel. At the instant
the horse obeys the indication I give him — namely, when
he raises his off hind, as if to take a step to one side — I
utilise this moment to give a backward pull on the near snaffle
rein, the off hind being of necessit}' placed in rear of the
near hind at the instant the near snaffle rein brings the left
shoulder back.
Having obtained two steps of the rein back, I am content,
and I hasten to pat the horse on the neck to show him that
he has done well.
When the horse has often done two steps, and then four, he
will be able to rein back easily.
I do not use spurs at the beginning of the rein-back, so as
to avoid exciting the animal unless he is ver}- sluggish and
does not answer readily to the legs.
I have just shown the way to proceed at the beginning,
when teaching a horse to rein back. But we must not
conclude that we should always continue the same effects of
the legs separately. That would, in fact, make the horse
swa}' his bod}' from right to left, which would be wrong,
because, when he reins back, he should alwa}-s remain as
straight as he does when he goes forward. When the horse
understands the movement, and when he can easily take his
first steps backwards, we should use both reins and both legs.
The rein-back will then be correct ; and if the haunches have
a tendency to deviate out of the straight line, we can easil}-
straighten them b}' pressing a little more strongly with the
leg of the side towards which the croup deviates, than with
the other \e<z.
EQUESTRIAN TACT. 123
When I say that I use a certain rein or a certain leg, I
mean the leg or rein which ought to have the stronger action.
During the entire work both reins should be lightly felt, and
both legs ought to be kept close to the side. Continual
co-operation ought always to exist between the hands and legs.
It is certain that a horse can rein back without the help of
the diagonal aids, and that a rider who knows nothing about
the principles which I have just enunciated, can make him do
so. But he will never succeed in having his horse in hand,
with the head high, as if he were going forward, the hind legs
being raised as high as the fore ones, and, above all things,
\\ith the points of the buttocks not further to the rear than
the hocks.* We should thoroughl}^ understand that these
conditions are essential in retrograde movements.
THE " RAMENER," COLLECTION, " RASSEMBLER," AND
EQUESTRL\N TACT.
Before going further, we may recapitulate as follows the
results we have obtained : The horse carries himself very
freely forward on the legs being brought close to his sides ;
he correctly does the direct and lateral flexions of the jaw ;
is well in hand ; yields immediately to the action of each leg ;
easily executes the respective rotations of the haunches and
shoulders ; and performs all the changes of direction with
facility.
It must be well understood that during all the time m}'
horse does these suppling exercises while I am on foot, I had
also given him the same work mounted, and that I only seek
b\' general effects to confirm and improve the results obtained
on foot.
Respecting flexions and collection when mounted, I ought
to remark that it is more easy to profit by acquired
propulsion than to create it. B}' this I mean that, if I am at
* If this condition is not fulfilled the horse will be behind the bit.
124 ORDINARY RIDING.
the walk, I have two things to do, namely, first, to create
impulsion by the legs ; and, second, to make the horse do
direct or lateral flexion. At the end of a turn at the trot and
canter I am, on the contrary, full of impulsion, and to get the
horse in hand I need only a fingering of the reins (in direct
or lateral flexion), while keeping the legs close to the sides.
Under these conditions there is no risk of the horse getting
behind his bit, and he then comes most easily to hand.*
We now come to the ramener, collection, and rassembler.
If the ramener and collection belong to ordinary riding, the
rassembler pertains only to scientific equitation. I therefore
crave the forbearance of my readers for discussing at present
the rassembler, which is the last stage of the general effects, of
which the ramener at first, and subsequently the collection,
are only the beginning.
The word ramener, which is borrowed from Baucher, means
nothing else than direct flexion.
The ramener is only the first part of getting the horse in
hand, and signifies that the horse's head is high, his head
perpendicular, and that he champs and plays with his bit,
when the rider feels it by means of the reins ; but owing to
deficient impulsion he is not light in hand. The effect
obtained is localised in the jaw and in the upper part of the
neck. It is therefore only partial and leaves the general
equilibrium incomplete. It is the first step towards perfect
distribution of weight ; collecting the horse is the second, as I
have just said ; and the rassembler is the last. I mention the
ramener only out of respect for the authority of Baucher,
who, working on the horse while standing still, brought him
* When the horse will not obey the diagonal effects, it is an excellent lesson
for him to finish the trot or canter by a well-marked lateral flexion, with the
opposite leg very close and with great impulsion. The direct flexion is made
naturally, if the time of halting is correct ; because we ought to stop the horse
between the legs and hands (with both legs close) when he is full of forward
movement.
EQUESTRIAN TACT. 125
back {rainener) ; but I try to obtain direct flexion only during
forward movement, which at once enables me to get the
horse in hand. I therefore exclude from my vocabulary
the word ranioicr, which indicates a backward action, and is
therefore entirely opposed to my system of riding.*
Direct flexion should always be preceded, sustained, and
completed by the action of the legs pressing the hind quarters
on the forehand.
The legs ought to take and give like the hands, and with
the hands, that is to say, simultaneously and in the same pro-
portion. This constitutes general movement. If the hands
give and the legs continue their action, the horse will be out
of ] land, because the propulsion developed by the legs will no
longer be received by the hands. If the hands act without
the legs sending them any impulsion, the horse will bring his
chin into his breast or will get behind his bit ; because his
hocks have been left too far behind him. The expression
" take and give," as I have explained it when speaking of
direct flexion, therefore applies as well to the action of the
legs as to that of the hands. Legs and hands should always
act in harmony, according to the desired result. We get the
horse in hand by this combination of the alternate actions of
the legs and hands acting on the whole.
Getting the horse in hand, which is an excellent term of the
old school, is the result of equilibrium during propulsion,
obtained and preserved by direct flexion, resulting from the
action of the legs impelling the hind quarters on to the fore-
hand. Here wc are in the best conditions of good horseman-
ship. The hind legs, being well under the body, drive it
forw'ard and maintain equilibrium by the high position of the
* A sluggish horse which does not go up to his bridle, and which answers
badly to the action of the legs, would be ramejiil'd if his neck was bent at the
withers according to the system of Baucher. The raniener never conduces to
good equilibrium, but on the contrary destroys it, and does not help to get the
horse in hand.
126 ORDINARY RIDING.
neck.* The momentum of the mass ends at the bit, namely,
at the end of the arm of the lever (of which the flexibility
from front to rear increases from rear to front), whence the
hand of the rider sends back, in its turn, the amount necessary
to maintain equilibrium,*!- towards the hind quarters, which by
a fresh spring again impels all the mass forward ; and so on-
This horse is thus truly in hand.:J: In my opinion, he ought
at the same time be on the hand. The horse is on the hand
when, being in direct flexion, he closes his jaw on the bit from
time to time, so as to remain in constant communication with
the hand of the rider. ||
* When the hind legs are well under the body, the croup is low, and con-
sequently the forehand is high.
t Naturally, the greater part of the force of propulsion is employed to send the
horse forward.
I People often make the mistake of saying that a horse which " cracks nuts "
is well in hand.
Ahorse that " cracks nuts," continually snaps with his teeth, whatever may
be the position of the neck, but more often when it is high. It is true that this
horse is light, but he is not in hand. For a horse to be in hand he should obey
the indications of the hands on the reins, which he cannot do unless he lets go the
bit. A horse which " cracks nuts " gives himself up to this trick, but he never
releases the bit. Nevertheless, the mobility of the jaw caused by this habit is a
proof that the horse does not stiffen his jaw, and he is therefore always light. From
which we can conclude that the horse which "cracks nuts" is generally well
balanced. For all ordinary riding he has a sufficiently delicate mouth, but if we
want to do high-school work with him, it is indispensable that he should champ
and yield to the bit each time the rider requires him to do so, that is to say, he
should be in hand. For that object it is absolutely necessary that he should be
made to give up his nut-cracking trick, by progressive and rigidly correct flexions.
We will thus succeed little by little in making him release the bit and get into
hand.
I wish to draw my readers' particular attention to the following important dis-
tinction : When the horse " cracks nuts " he retains command of his lower jaw ;
but when he is in hand, the rider has control over it.
\ The horse which pulls at the hand is not on ihe hand ; he is beyond it.
When a horse which is on the /i^wrf seeks to force it and go beyond it, we should,
according to Baucher's teaching, pull him up, put him into flexion, and set off
again. My advice is to press him up to the hand by an energetic use of the legs,
at the risk of upsetting him, and I thus succeed in getting him into hand by
impulsion.
>*.
EQUESTRIAN TACT. 127
Finally, the horse comes up again on the hand when the
impulsion communicated by the legs brings the hocks strongly
under the animal's body and sends him freely on the bit'
which is possible only when the horse is in hand to a
maximum extent, which form of control is the rassenibler.
It is necessary that the tension of the reins is light enough to
allow the propulsion to pass, but great enough to establish
contact between the bit and the hand, and to give us the
feeling that as the impulsion comes freely on the hand, we can
dispose of it as we like.
As the neck in this case is necessarily high, and as the
action of the horse is lofty, the meaning of the expression,
" the horse comes up to the hand," is perfectly clear.
We can now understand what is meant by the horse being
between the Jiands and legs, both of which send back impul-
sion to each other, so as to preserve equilibrium while going
forward.
The school horse should be completely enclosed betzveen the
hands and legs ; and the hack should be in front of the legs
and on the hands, so that he can lean a little with the bars
of his mouth at fast paces. The horse which does not
answer to the legs is behind the legs. He has too much
weight on his haunches ; in other words, he is behind the bit.
Every horse is not capable of being perfectly rassenible'd,
which is the extreme limit of being in hand ; but every horse
ought to be trained to get into hand with good equilibrium,
no matter what may be the work for which he is required.
The hack, hunter, charger, and even the carriage horse,
acquires a good position only by being got into hand, in
which case the equilibrium is straight or horizontal.*
It is generally thought that the object of getting a horse
* Straight or horizontal equilibrium is the distribution of weight for a hack,
and is between that of the race-horse, which is too much on his forehand, and
that of the school horse, which is too much on his haunches.
128 ORDINARY RIDING.
in hand is to give him a fine carriage, which no doubt is
valuable, but is its smallest advantage. Equilibrium, which
is the result of getting the horse in hand, gives mobility,
namely, the facility of instantly doing, without effort or
fatigue, every required movement at all paces. i\lso, this
equilibrium keeps the horse sound during severe work ;
because it requires from each part of the horse only those
efforts which come naturally to him. We thus avoid wearing
the animal out prematurely ; because no special strain is put
on any particular organ.
If army horses were sufficiently suppled b)- a first course
of breaking, and if the soldiers who ride them understood
equestrian equilibrium, and knew how to take advantage of
opportunities, our cavalry would gain in appearance, firmness
of seat, and staying power. The men \\'ould ha\-e more
confidence in themselves and their horses, and they would
be more active, more skilful and more energetic. The horses
would stand more work, and they and the government budget
would be relieved from needless expense.
We must not think that the horse should be always kept
in hand. I certainly do not advise that this should be done
the whole time one is hacking, hunting, foraging or charging.
So far from that, I am the resolute enemy of keeping the
horse always collected. We should know how to be able to
get the horse in hand, whenever we wish to do so, and at
all paces ; but only from time to time, and when occasion
demands. It is of the utmost necessity at certain moments
of difficulty, as, for instance, when we think the horse is
going to play up, and when the animal, from fatigue, softness
of constitution, or some other cause, goes in a lumbering,
unconnected manner. Getting him into hand restores his
balance and is of great use in every respect.
As I have already said, all horses can be got into hand, but
only some are sufficiently well shaped to be rassemb/c'd.
EQUESTRIAN TACT. 129
The rassenibler, which is the act of getting a horse into
hand to a maximum extent, is the complete equihbrium of
the animal in all his movements. It is the perfect form of
collecting the well-suppled horse. In it the loins, hind-
quarters and hocks are flexible ; the hocks stoutly press the
mass forward ; the shoulders are free and movable ; the neck is
high and the jaw readily obeys the feeling of the rider's hands
on the reins, and all the parts of the horse being in action
and equalh' enterprising, combine to form an energetic,
harmonious and light whole. The equilibrium is so perfect
and so unstable, that the rider feels that he can make his
horse do whatever he desires by the slightest indication
of his wishes. Both of them, so to speak, are in the air.
They are ready to fly !
How can we succeed in bringing to perfection and in
refining the art of getting a horse into hand, so as to obtain
this ideal of equilibrium ?
If we have well understood the action of collecting a horse,
and the coming and going of the forces of the legs to the
hands, and of the hands to the legs, we will remember that
the hands allow the amount of impulsion necessary to the
forward progress of the mass to pass, and throw back
towards the hind quarters only the amount of impulsion
required to preserve balance. This is obtained by the delicate
and constant play of the fingers, which may be compared
to the fingering of a piano as regards delicacy and speed.
The question is : what proportion of the force ought the
hand allow to pass through it, and what proportion ought it
retain ? We should measure this proportion with absolute
precision at each stride, by the correct combination of the
" aids," so as to send to the hind quarters only the amount of
force necessary to maintain equilibrium with a maximum of
propulsion. Equestrian tact consists in doing this. If the
fingers do not work with enough decision, the centre of
9
I30 ORDINARY RIDING.
gravity will be carried to the front a little too much, and the
horse will be ready to go beyond the hand. If they act too
strongly, too much weight will be put on the hind quarters,
and the hocks will be brought too far back. In both cases
there will be no rasseuibhr. The fingering of the reins
should regulate with absolute precision the distribution of
the propulsion.* We have to solve this problem at
each stride, which is not identical to the preceding one or to
the following one. Here is the end we have sought.
We can succeed by work and perseverance to get the horse
in hand in a manner which approaches the rasscnibUr, and
even to occasionally obtain the rasseinbler ; but very few
riders can keep up the rassembler by a scientific fingering
of the reins.*f-
* In order that the rider may properly feel his horse — that is to say, when the
rassembler is perfect — the harmony and union between him and his animal
should be such that the force of propulsion and the effects of the whole should
be transmitted without intermission or interruption.
The propulsion and the effects which the whole sends from the rider to the
horse, and from the horse to the rider, are like an elastic ball. The spur, so to
speak, goes to seek for this ball in the hind legs of the horse, and makes it
come up close to the heels of the rider, whence, passing by the seat, it ascends to the
withers, follows the upper part of the neck to the poll, falls into the mouth, where
the hands receive it, and, following the lower part of the neck, it returns to its
starting point, where it is picked up and sent on again by the legs. Therefore,
this ball continually goes round a circuit when the horse is rasseinblSA. To make
this comparison perfectly exact, we should say that it is a football which leaves the
legs and arrives at the mouth, and a billiard ball which comes back.
t It is impossible, to obtain and preserve a good rassembler unless the horse
has been kept perfectly straight during his course of breaking. If we do not
succeed in holding the animal in this straight line, which begins at the poll and
finishes at the tail, the horse will escape being rassewble'd. If any part deviates
— haunches, shoulders, or jaw yielding laterally, instead of yielding in a straight
line — the result will be spoiled propulsion, and without complete propulsion
there can be no 7-assembler.
Being able to feel that the horse is straight is the first manifestation of eques-
trian tact. The moment the slightest deviation is perceived, the legs send the
hind-quarters to each other, whilst the effects of the hand, which combine with
the effects of the legs, straighten the forehand. At this moment the rider
succeeds in getting the equestrian feeling {equestrian tact) by the more or less
fine perception of the succassive positions of the forehand and hind quarters,
until the animal is perfectly straight.
EQUESTRIAN TACT. 131
Although I have ridden horses for fifty years, I did not
obtain perfect rassembler until the last ten years. It is
true that I worked for a long time according to the somewhat
inexact data of Baucher. But the fact is that for many
years I continually felt the rassembler escape me, by the dis-
placement of the centre of gravity, whether to the front or to
the rear. I had to greatly refine my tact and consequently
my " aids " to obtain the complete rassembler, and to preserve
it with a maximum amount of propulsion.
But this is not all. There are not only direct movements,
but also those to the side and when turning. In these move-
ments one leg always predominates, in which case the
impulsion which comes on the bit is not equally distributed
between the two hands. The right leg throws more
impulsion on the left hand, and vice versa. It is therefore
necessary, in order to preserve equilibrium in turning to the
left, that the left hand, while remaining bound to the right
hand, sends back to the centre a larger amount of force,
which is all the more difficult to measure ; because this hand,
while keeping up the rassembler, has to regulate the change of
direction.*
If we now reflect that in all work of equitation, the horse,
whether going forward or keeping himself back, constantly
tries to escape to the right or to the left, by his haunches
or shoulders, we will see that in order to maintain perfect
equilibrium we have to simultaneously perceive all the actions
of the horse and all those which are being prepared, so as to
combine them by opposing them, by the simultaneous action
of the " aids," and to produce from them the desired
ideal of equilibrium.
I said a short time ago that the rassembler in direct move-
* The difficulty is so great that Baucher acknowledges that the " lightness "
(read rassembler) escaped him in changes of direction. The fault was less his,
than that of the bad position of the neck which I have pointed out.
9*
132 ORDINARY RIDING.
ment is the end of equitation. The continual rassejnbler,
not only in side movements and turning, but in all movements,
whatever may be their combinations, is the supreme refine-
ment of riding — the full possession of the ideal. Thus the two
organisms are so combined that the man is one with his horse ;
the former perceives the efforts of the latter so directly and
rapidly that each action of the man responds so surely and
rapidly to a corresponding action of the horse, that the
animal expects it, and lends himself to it instantaneously.
Then the horse has only reflex actions. The only brain he
has is that of his rider. I am right in saying that it is the
ideal of which we dream.
How can we obtain this tact, this keenness of perception,
this refined and rapid feeling of all the efforts of the horse
in every degree, preparing the efforts which are going to
follow ? This cannot be taught in a book. For these faculties
we require practice, work, and, above all things, natural
aptitude and love for horses.
By his seat and legs the rider ought to feel with absolute
certainty everything that goes on under him, as for instance,
if the hocks are brought more or less under the centre, or if
they remain behind ; what legs are raised, and to what height,
and if the croup is going to deviate from the straight line.
By his hands and legs, helped by his eyes, the rider ought
to be able to feel the actions and above all things the tenden-
cies of the jaw, head, neck, and shoulders. As the forehand
begins the movements desired by the animal, we can say that
" the hand ought to feel the ideas of the horse.""^
* High school work naturally demands very complicated efforts wliich
the rider ought to feel on account of the precision which it requires.
The most difficult effort to perceive is that which is called "the magpie
f jump," which the horse makes by simultaneously placing his two hind feet on
the ground, so as to relieve himself. When the movement is softly made and
the pasterns bend, it is difficult to catch. However, if we allow a horse to con-
tract this habit, he will lose all regularity of action.
SIDE STEPS AND TWO TRACKS. 133
Thus the rider will have the feeling of the complete equili-
brium of the horse, and the free disposal of his forces at any
moment.
I cannot say more on this subject, except to advise my
readers to devote themselves to practice.*
SIDE STEPS AND TWO TRACKS.
I was obliged to discuss the rassembler, which belongs to
scientific riding, when referring to collecting a horse, which
subject leads up to the rassembler. I have even to speak at
the same time of the side step and the " two tracks," because
these two movements are closely connected ; although the
former pertains to ordinary riding,i- the latter belongs ex-
clusively to high school riding.
The first remark to make, is that in side steps — and still
more in the " two tracks," because the speed is faster — the
rider ought to freely carry his weight to the side towards
which the horse is proceeding. The necessity of this is
emphasised by the fact that the side movement of the
horse naturally displaces the rider towards the side away
from which the animal is going. Consequently, when the
side movement is rapid, the rider can be very easily thrown
off to the side away from which the movement is made.
Therefore the rider ought to lean to the left, on the saddle
and stirrup, during side steps from right to left. This position,
which unites the rider to the horse, by giving them the same
impulse, has the further advantage of relieving the right
* Pictures of a rassenibWA. horse cari be seen in photographs in this book.
I attach great importance to these photographs, because they are free from all
trickery. If we study them with attention, we will see even in the most
energetic school work, that my horse maintains straight or horizontal equilibrium.
In ordinary school equilibrium, the horse is often too much on his haunches.
The great impulsion which I try to obtain always keeps my horse in horizontal
equilibrium, however high the action of his fore legs may be.
t The great utility of this movement is that it enables us to place our horses
where we like, and at all paces, when liding in the open.
134 ORDINARY RIDING.
shoulder, which has more ground to cover than the left one.
We require a certain amount of practice to attain this result ;
because, as I have already said, the side movement of the
horse naturally puts the rider into the opposite position.
I never begin to teach the side steps when the horse is going
along the wall, which would uselessly increase the difficulty,
by the want of impulse resulting from the change in direction.
By removing the horse from the wall, I forcibly stop his
forward movement,
I make the horse do the first side steps at the end of a
change of hand, from right to left for instance. I am on the
track, going to the left, with the wall to the right. On
arriving near to the wall which, at the end of the change
of hand, will be to my left, I carry both hands to the left,
while closing the legs and acting vigorously with the right
leg. The near snaffle rein draws to the left, and the off rein
applied against the neck, presses the shoulders equally to the
left. We can see that these are absolutely the same " aids "
as those for the rotation of the shoulders, although the move-
ment is made while gaining more ground to the front. If
the horse resists the right leg, I have recourse to the off rein,
to make him carry his haunches to the left.* Even if the
animal makes only two or three side steps, I am content with
his progress, I pat him on the neck, and slacken the reins.
After that, I make the horse do a change of hand from left
to right when leaving the wall, which is on my left. While
thus going obliquely, I hold him as straight as possible, and
when I arrive near to the wall, which will be on my right,
I carry my hand to the right and I apply the left leg, while
pressing him up to the hand by means of both legs. I may
add that the hand ought to profit by the supplemental
* In other words, I have recourse, as I always do, to lateral equitation, in case
of resistance proceeding from the incomplete education of the horse. But at the
stage of breaking to which we have arrived, his education ought to be sufficiently
advanced for diagonal equitation to give us all its results.
SIDE STEPS AND TWO TRACKS. 135
impulse, to transform the forward movement into a movement
from left to right, with the least possible resistance *
I continue this work for a sufficiently long time, and
accentuate it according to the progress obtained, by which
I ^\•ish to say, that at first I am content to make the horse
take two or three side paces. Later on, w^hen he gets more
expert, I require more from him, always at the moment when
we arrive close to the wall, so as to obtain five or six side
steps. Further on, I begin the side steps at the middle of
the school, so that I can make him do twelve or fifteen steps.
I finally make him do the shoulder-in.f
* Energetic impulse is the first condition of correctly executed work on two
tracks. It results from the firm support of the inward leg, providing that the
outward leg has a predominant action.
If, during v/ork on two tracks, the inward hind leg of the horse is carried away
from the body instead of being brought under its centre — as would be the case if
there was sufficient impulsion — the horse will be inclined to get behind his bit ; the
cause of this fault being the insufficient energy of the inward leg of the rider,
the action of which ought to be supplemented by a corresponding action of the
outward leg.
t I do not put the horse's shoulder to the wall until he has been well trained.
A horse has only too great a tendency to allow himself to be guided by the wall,
instead of giving himself up exclusively to the "aids." I greatly dislike con-
tinual work close to the wall. If the horse is straight and limits himself
to following the wall, whatever the pace may be, he will let himself be guided
by this permanent obstacle, much more than by the rider's "aids." He will
even take a kind of moral support from it, and his natural tendency will always be
to slightly carry away his croup, and to get the shoulder close to the wall ; hence
the difficulty of holding him straight, and of keeping him well between
the legs.
In movements on two tracks, the wall leads the horse so well and helps him so
much in keeping his shoulders in the proper direction, that he quickly begins to
shave the wall too closely, which often becomes a " defence " on his part.
If we remove the horse from the wall, we will be obliged to direct the
shoulders with the hand, which ought to be the only guide. If the horse, when
doing the shoulder-in, gets behind the bit, and brings his hind quarters too
close to the wall, we should stop the movement on two tracks without changing
the position of the horse, should push him forward with the legs, and make him
go down the centre of the school. No exercise is better than this to give impulse
in the movement on two tracks, and to make the horse independent of the
wall.
136 ORDINARY RIDING.
The number of side steps which we succeed in ob-
taining is of little consequence. The essential thing is to
see that the horse is well placed — the shoulders being always
more advanced than the croup — which is the only position
that facilitates the side movement. Position is everything.
At the beginning of the work I try to give cadence to the
horse, but only at the moment I am going to get him to do
side steps. By the expression " to give cadence to the horse,"
I mean the school walk. At this pace a horse has great mobility,
and the side movement is made more easy, because the fore
legs and hind legs can move more readily, without touching
each other, which is impossible at the ordinary walk.*
Up to this, I have purposely used the expression " side
We are never completely master of a horse which we have allowed to contract
the habit of always keeping close to the wall, which is a bad preparation for
riding in the open, and also for high school work, the first condition of which is
that the horse should be always between the legs of the rider, or, to speak more
precisely, should be solely guarded by the " aids. " It is therefore well to work
the horse at a distance of one or two yards from the wall.
When the horse has got into the habit of pressing his shoulder into the wall,
how are we to put him straight ? And if we wish to take him away from the
wall, to go down the centre, to do a demi-volte, or to set off on " two tracks,"
what " aids " should we use ?
Let us suppose that the rider is on the right hand. He will then instinctively
feel the off snaffle rein to bring the left shoulder away from the wall, which is a
mistake, because in pulling the off rein he will bring the head and neck to the
right, but the more he draws them to the right, the more will the lateral flexion
of the neck push the left shoulder to the left. The proper way to bring the left
shoulder away from the wall is to draw the near snaffle rein rather high and
forward on the neck, then carry it to the right, while lightly feeling the
off rein, and we will then bring the whole neck along with the shoulders to the
right.
* To make side steps from left to right, the horse should pass his near fore and
the near hind, one after the other, over their respective off legs, in order to gain
ground to the right. When the horse is at the ordinary walk, the pace is too
slow and two low for the legs tojpass over their fellows without touching them.
In the sidestep, at the school walk, each of the near legs passes successively its
corresponding off leg, and (this is the important point and results solely from the
cadence) is put on the ground only at the moment when the off leg is just raised.
They therefore cannot hit each other.
SIDE STEPS AND TWO TRACKS. 137
step," and not "two tracks," because we always begin by-
going to one side, which is far from the two tracks.
When a horse does the work I have just described, it is
said that he goes sideways^ no matter how bad may be the
position of his head and neck. But for this work to merit
being called " work on two tracks," the position should
be correct. Yet the position is correct, and a horse moves
truly on two tracks when he goes obliquely forzvard on two
parallel lines, the one made by the forehand, the other by
the hind quarters. He thus advances from the side, witJi the
head and forehand always leading the hind quarters. The
head and neck ought to be kept high and slightly bent to the
side towards which the horse is going. Above all things,.
he should be well in hand, light, and in a cadenced pace.
In my opinion, this is the longest and most difficult work.
If we seek to obtain it complete and correct from the
beginning, we will either get no good result, or we will cause
the horse to at once resist, because he had not passed
through the " mill " of lateral, direct and diagonal efforts
which I have described.*
My reason for laying considerable stress on the subject of
" two tracks," is that this work has a great influence on all
the subsequent breaking, where we always meet during pro-
pulsion the same combined action of the diagonal " aids."
When the horse knows how to go on two tracks, he will
seek every means to escape from the rassembler. At first,
he refuses to yield to the direct leg ; he then yields too much
* A horse which his rider persists in working only by means of lateral efit'ects,
can never become a good school horse : he is ungraceful, and his work is dis-
united. In fact, in lateral equitation, he carries his head and neck to the opposite
side to which he is moving ; and further it is impossible for him to do the rasseni-
i/«',<because, when we work with the two "aids " of one side we have nothing
to support the other side, which consequently escapes us.
We should therefore continually work both reins and both legs ; but it is
principally the double action of the opposite rein and leg which should play the
chief part in all movements.
138 ORDINARY RIDING.
and forces the opposite leg. He escapes by going too quickly to
one side.
I will suppose that the rider is placed with his shoulder to
the wall and is going to the right. The horse which tries to
checkmate all the efforts the rider makes to keep him in
hand and in good position, begins for instance, to lean
against the rider's left leg [putzi'ard leg or direct leg). The
spur pricks him and forces him to give way. He then tries
to get behind his bit. In order to drive him forward, it is
necessary to employ the right leg {outward leg or opposite leg).
As we hardly ever use the spur of the opposite leg, from fear
of straightening him, the horse will finish by pressing against
this leg and by saving himself by running to one side, which
will prevent us getting him in hand and regulating his work
on '' two tracks."
The remedy is simple. It is sufficient, when the horse
throws himself on the opposite leg, to attack him vigorously
with the spur of that side, in order to make him straighten
himself. We must adopt this plan each time the horse throws
himself to one side, which he will soon give up doing.
As we may see, the best system is to throw into disorder,
in order to establish order. This procedure, which is
criticised by all those who have not the audacity to practise it,
is the only one which incontestably establishes the power
of the breaker over the animal. By it, the horse learns' that
there are insurmountable obstacles to the carrying out of his
wishes. That point being settled, if we keep him balancing
between reward and punishment, he is ours.*
* Every horse which knows how to go on " two tracks " makes an abuse of it.
When horses are accustomed to do demi-voltes and changes of hand on " two
tracks," they often put themselves sideways when their rider wishes them to do
these movements while holding them straight, and by this defence they escape
being rasse//id/c''d. By holding the horse straight, we make him bring his hocks
under his body, which is the very thing he tries to avoid doing by placing himself
sideways. The remedy is in the legs of the rider. Later on, when the breaking
has been finished — the horse being kept at the rassembler in all the school move-
ments— he will not be able to obtain help from this defence.
SIDE STEPS AND TWO TRACKS. 139
According as we quicken the pace at the work on "two
tracks," in order to pass from the school walk to the ordinary
trot, or even to the fast trot, it becomes more and more
difficult to employ the " aids " in an appropriate manner.
We should, in fact, hold the horse very straight in the hand,
because every effort to straighten the hind quarters, or to
support the forehand, diminishes the propulsion, which ought
to be extremely energetic. To obtain a maximum of impulse
at the quickest pace, we must keep the forehand and hind
quarters absolutely on their own respective tracks, and must
combine the energy of our legs, which give the impulse, with
the delicacy of the constant action of the diagonal effects,*
which enable us to keep the horse in position, without
diminishing the impulse in any way.
This movement is perhaps the most inconvenient one, on
account of the extreme difficulty of correctly combining the
effects of the " aids " with great propulsion. Not the least diffi-
culty is to hold the horse always straight. The direction of the
impulse, even in work on two tracks, will always pass between
the two ears, if the head is well placed.
The correct position during work on two tracks at a fast
trot, is very difficult to keep. In fact, the energy of the pace
increases the natural disposition of the rider to carry his body
to the side opposite to that to which he is going. Hence
the necessity of continual watchfulness on his part.
The great difficulty as regards the horse, is to make him
quicken the trot without breaking into the canter. This is
the touchstone of impulse, and the proof that the animal
answers freely to the " aids."
Work on two tracks, as I do it, in no way resembles the
* The delicacy of the diagonal effect combines admirably with the energ)^ of
the legs, because it results from the preponderance of one "aid" over the other.
Besides, the true action of the "aids" is: legs energetic, heels delicate, and
hands light.
I40 ORDINARY RIDING.
sleepy work on two tracks which we generally see in riding
schools. I pay particular attention to demanding energetic
work, and I keep my horse full of enterprise, which is the
exact opposite of what is usually done. If my mount is en-
terprising, he becomes so on account of my legs having been
enterprising in the first instance.
In sleepy work the horse obeys conditionally ; in energetic
work he obeys without conditions ; he keeps nothing in re-
serve and he gives himself up to his rider, which is the first
condition of equitation.
Figs. 41 and 42 show Germinal (a thorough-bred by Flavio
out of Pascale) at work on " two tracks " at the school walk.
In Fig. 41, the horse begins by putting himself into position,
at which he is perfect in Fig. 42. We can see how far the
correct position is from the crossed position, which many
riding masters adopt in work on " two tracks " ; the result
being that they stop all impulse.
The impulse appears greater in Fig.42 than inFig. 41, because
the horse, which is going on two tracks from left to right, was
photographed at the moment when he rested his right hind
foot on the ground, the right being the side to which he was
going. In Fig. 41 (two tracks from right to left), the near fore
foot, which forms the support, belongs to the side (the left) to
which the horse is going.
A comparison of these two illustrations enables us to tho-
roughly understand the movements of the horse's legs during
work on two tracks.
THE TROT.
To make a horse trot, we must begin by slackening the
reins, and increasing the pressure of the legs a little. We
ought to avoid striking him with our heels, which might upset
him. But if he is sluggish, we may at first make him feel
the heels, and afterwards the spurs, but only after a pressure
fe
THE TROT. 145
of the legs. At first we must limit ourselves to the short trot,
and, above all things, we should make the animal do it in a
correct and cadenced manner, that is to say, the foot-falls
should be equal as regards time. xAs the horse is supple, and
has been trained to obey the " aids," he will soon do what we
require.
At first it is well to allow the horss to be as free as possible,
in order that we may see if he trots level naturall}'. If at
first we keep him in hand when trotting, he will not go freely,
and if there is an inequality in his gait, it will be difficult to
judge whether it is due to a fault of conformation, unsound-
ness, or bad horsemanship, namely, erroneous effects produced
by the " aids." The reins, especially those of the curb, ought
to be only very slightly felt. If the horse carries his head too
high, we should use the curb reins. The fact of the head
being carried too high and in a backward direction, crushes
the hind quarters. If, on the contrary, the head is too low,
we should use the snaffle reins ; but should not draw them
to the rear, because that would stop the propulsion. We
should give light quick pulls to these reins alternately, without
jerking them, while taking care always to keep the hands
high. We had best trot the horse only twdce round the
school, stop him, bring him into hand, and do the same
things over again several times.
When we have got the horse into a good position at the
trot, with his neck high,* and the line of his face nearly per-
pendicular, but a little farther advanced than the vertical line,
we can keep up this pace for a longer time. We should
gradually work up to this, because the more tired a horse
becomes, the lower will he carry his head. If we prolong the
work, he will become heavy in hand, in which case we should
stop him by strongly closing the legs, and, having got him
completel}' in hand, should set off again.
*This naturally increases the height of his action.
10
146 ORDINARY RIDING.
When we have succeeded in trotting for five minutes to each
hand without fatigue, and, above all things, without the horse
" breaking," we can make him go faster. We should, however,
avoid abruptly passing from the short cadenced trot to the
fast long trot, which would upset his balance, and would un-
expectedly throw a considerable weight on his shoulders.
At first we should increase the speed of the pace only towards
the end of a turn at the trot. During the last couple of turns
round the school, for example, we may act vigorously with
the legs, while taking only a light support on the snaffle reins,
the action of which should be limited simply to keeping the
head in place.
By practising these exercises we shall succeed in making
the horse do all he can at the trot, as regards high action
and speed.
xAbove all things, we ought to avoid trying to make the
horse trot faster than he can do ; for such an attempt will
probably teach him the false and ugly gait of trotting in
front and cantering behind.
There are two ways of riding at the trot, namely, the
French (bumping in the saddle) and English (rising in the
saddle). The former is of no practical use, although it is
an absolutely indispensable school exercise,* for giving a
good seat to beginners when they trot without stirrups ; but I
disapprove of it for all other purposes. It is fatiguing to the
rider, and still more to the horse. I cannot understand
why it has been used for such a long time in the army.
When we rise at the trot there are neither jerks nor reactions.
The rider should have his loins slighcly bent, and con-
sequently the upper part of his body should be inclined a
little forward. He should not try by rising to follow or to
anticipate the movements of the horse, but should let himself
be raised. His ankle joints and knees acting together will
* It is the foundation of all good riding. Without it there would be no seat.
THE TROT. 147
sustain his movement, and will make him descend softly into
the saddle, and into the cadence marked by the pace of the
horse. He should always rise from under himself, that is to
say, he should let the horse raise him, while helping the
movement with the knees and ankle joints ; but the upper
part of the body should do nothing. Otherwise, the muscles
of the loins and shoulders will be contracted, the rider will
become stiff, and will not be firmly united to his horse. The
body ought to rise and fall as a whole.
The rider who hollows out his back, in place of using only
his legs, necessarily carries his abdomen forward when he
rises, and backward when he descends into the saddle, than
which nothing can be more ungraceful.
Only one-third (the ball) of the foot should be placed in
the stirrup. If the foot is " home," the ankle will lose all its
elasticity, and consequently the trot will become stiff and
painful.
The natural trot of a horse which is not upset or suffering,
is an alternate and absolutely identical movement of the
two diagonals.
At the rising trot, the rider can trot either on the left or
right diagonal biped.*
The rider is said to trot on the left diagonal biped, when he
rises at the same moment that the horse raises his left
fore foot, and comes down on the saddle, when the horse
puts that foot on the ground.
In the well-executed English trot, the rider rises and comes
down only once during the succession of the two bipeds. He
rises and descends along with the left biped, for instance,
without the right biped having any influence on his move-
• In equestrian language, the diagonal always takes its name from front to
rear. Thus, the right rein and left leg is the right diagonal, and the left rein
and right leg is the left diagonal. It is the same with the legs of the horse, the
right fore and left hind forming the right diagonal, and the left fore and right
hind the left diagonal.
10*
148 ORDINARY RIDING.
ments. But if he is not in rh}'thm, he will come down too
soon on the saddle, and will receive a shock from the right
biped, as the result of the straightening of the left hock. He
will come twice in the saddle and will ride incorrectly.
The rider ought to be able to ride at the trot equall}' well
on one biped, as on the other biped, and should be able to
change from one to the other, so as to relieve himself, and
especially the horse, during a long journe}', but this requires
a certain amount of practice to do. A rider ought to
learn how to know on what biped he is, which is difficult at
first. It is best to begin a preliminary study at the walk,
while raising ourselves in the stirrups at each step the horse
takes, as if he were trotting. We have thus time to see
what movement of the horse we are following. After
a little practice at this exercise, we can start again into
the trot.
It is worthy of note that each rider naturally adopts one
particular biped, and almost always without knowing that he
does so, and he becomes so habituated to it that he feels ill
at ease when he changes to the other biped.
If we wish to have a fine trotter, we should complete his
education in the open, after having made him do in the school
the exercises I have just described. On a road a horse lends
himself more readily to the work, and goes freer than in a
school. As we have space in front of us in the open, we are
able to keep up the speed of the pace for a longer time ; but
in a school the corners oblige us to slacken a little at frequent
intervals.
All horses do not trot in an equally free manner. Certain
animals readily maintain this pace, if the speed is moderate ;
but if the speed is increased, they will break into a short canter.
It is correctly said that such horses k^sp tJiemselves back. It
is very important not to allow a horse to change his pace
without giving him the indications to do so, but it is not less
THE TROT. 149
important to make the horse, whenever we Hkc, exert himself
to the utmost at his trot.
If a horse starts into the canter when we want him to do the
fast trot, we can at first try gentleness in order to correct this
habit, which is only idleness. We can stoja him and pat him
on the neck, to reassure and calm him, and then put him
again into the trot. This plan generally succeeds with
impetuous horses, but it has no good effect on lazy ones, with
which we should do just the contrary. When an animal
breaks into the canter to avoid the fast trot, we should
vigorously push him forward into the gallop, and should keep
him at it for a certain distance, say for 500 or 600 yards,
which is to be the punishment of his resistance and laziness.
After a few experiences of this kind he will perceive that, so
far from obtaining relief by breaking into the canter from the
trot, he lets himself in for a severe and trying pace. This
plan is within the reach of everyone. There is another which
I can recommend, but which requires a greater knowledge of
riding.
When the horse of his own accord breaks into the canter,
in order to escape from the fast trot which his rider wants
him to do, he naturally leads with the easier leg of the two.
I have already ^said that every horse has one side more easy
than the other. We can therefore thwart him in the pace he
has taken by pressing him forward at the canter, while making
the other leg lead ; for instance, with the right leg if he has of
his own accord struck off with the left leg. We will then
employ the near snaffle rein, in order to keep back the left
shoulder, which takes the lead, and the left leg to press the
haunches to the right.*
We should apply the opposite " aids " if the horse leads with
the right fore leg. It is self-evident that this plan, like the
* It will be noted that I am doing lateral equitation here ; my reason being
that I take for granted that the horse is either imperfectly broken or unbroken.
I50 ORDINARY RIDING.
preceding one, is applicable only to horses which are im-
perfectly broken. When a horse is well broken, he never
breaks into a pace which we do not want him bo adopt.
If a horse does not readily take to the trot, we should not
be too ready to think he is lazy or bad-tempered. The fault
is often due to the fact that the rider's hands are bad for a
sensitive mouth, because they are either too heavy or they
move about too much. It may happen that the bit is too
severe,* or that the horse's mouth is sore, from having been
bruised. Also, the horse may be suffering in his loins or
other parts, and his reason for changing the pace may be only
to relieve himself In all these frequently occurring cases, the
best remedy is to remove the cause.
In place of first putting the blame on the horse, which is
only natural, the rider ought perhaps begin by trying to find
out if he himself is not the culprit.
The following is an excellent means of finding out if
soreness of the mouth is the cause of the horse not trotting
true. Instead of allowing him to bear on the snaffle, leave its
reins perfectly loose and catch hold of a good-sized handful of
the mane near the middle of the neck, and draw it towards
you. Horse dealers use this plan every da}'.
The trainers of trotters, whose only object is a maximum
of speed, generally let their horses take a very strong bear-
ing on the hand. The regularity of the pace and lightness of
mouth are of little matter to them. Their horses, being im-
petuous, always pull very hard, and the rider, on his part,
pulls no less vigorously on the mouth ; because he thinks that
the more he pulls, the faster will the horse go. This is a
great error ; because, by pulling too strongly on the mouth,
we throw the weight of the bod)^ on the iiind (juarters, and we
* Thin mouth-piece, long cheeks, high fJort, each one of which conchlions will
of itself make the bit severe ; and c<jml_)ined, tlicy will conveil it into an
instrument of torture.
THE TROT. 151
thus fatigue the loins and hocks. To make a horse trot well,
we should simply try to get him to lean on the hand. No
doubt, in a flat race, as at the trot, the rider to some extent
carries the head and neck of his horse ; but he should take
care to carry it iipivards and not backivards, by doing which
he would infallibly check the power of the loins and hocks.
To study the exact conditions of trotting races, I once went
and lived at Dozule, which is a small village in Normandy. I
had previously ridden on, the flat and across country, and as I
had also broken three or four school horses, I thought I was
going to astonish the Norman lads by my science. I admit,
in all humiHt}^ that the most surprised one was your humble
servant.
At Dozule there was a brave bo>- called Pascal, who was
very well up in everything about horses, and especially about
trotters. I had known him for a long time, and we had
previously arranged together the plan of my sojourn at
Dozule.
Pascal had charge of the training of two remarkable
trotters, which belonged, if I remember rightly, to the
Marquis of Croix. This was about the end of 1864.
On the morning after my arrival, we were in the saddle,
and at first we walked on the trotting track, which was a mile
and a quarter in length. Then we began to trot, and Pascal
beat me easily. I took my defeat with a smile, because I
thought tliat his horse was faster than mine. On the follow-
ing day we changed horses, and Pascal again beat me. I
admit that I was all the more annoyed, because the same result
was reproduced the following fifteen da}'s, on each one of
which Pascal rode the horse on which I was beaten by him
the previous day.
He pulled with all his might at the reins and jerked them,
which he called " ringing " his horse. I told him that his way
of riding was not rational ; but he replied that it was the only
152 ORDINARY RIDING.
way to get all the speed out of a horse, and apparently he
was right. I then asked him to let me ride the same horse
for a fortnight, during which time we ran no races together.
During this period, I succeeded in making the horse take only
a light bearing on the hand, and to hold his head steady,
and finally I beat Pascal four times running. I afterwards
obtained, in an equally shorL time, the same result with
the other horse.
The two horses having been placed with confidence on the
hand, and having the free play of their hind quarters, trotted
as a whole without breaking and almost without fatigue.
According to the system of Pascal, on the contrary, they
broke, trotted almost always disunited, and also were soon
knocked up. I was also closer to the horse than he was ;
he made violent movements, while I made none ; and finally,
having succeeded more rapidly than he could in getting my
horse at full speed, I was able to maintain it longer.
I do not claim that I gave more speed to my horses, but
with my handling they did their work with confidence and
ease, whilst he hurt their mouths and fatigued them, which
fact was to be seen at the winning post. Not having to make
the same efforts when I rode them, they were neither blow-
ing nor sweating after the trot.
Trotters which are trained according to Pascal's method,
are generally unpleasant and sometimes dangerous to ride.
In fact it is difficult, when they have once started, to stop
them quickly. Nevertheless, if taken out of training and
given suppling exercises, they will very often do excellent
service.
Pascal had the great advantage over me of knowing his
horses, and he knew — at least, I like to think he did — when
they were at their top speed. This knowledge is much more
important than is generally thought. If a jockey who has
not a knowledge of pace, is riding a trotter which is going at
THE CANTER. 153
full speed, he will probably try to make him go faster, and by
pressing him on, will make him break into a gallop.
The feeling which makes us press on a horse under all
conditions is very natural. Nothing unnerves us more than
to ride a race alongside a horse which keeps a neck in front
of us. Nevertheless, if the trotter we are riding is at the top
of his speed, we should take care not to force him beyond it,
which would cause him to gallop. In order to put him back
into the trot, we would have to slacken speed, and would
consequently lose several lengths.
Finally, when we ride a trotting race, we should know the
moment the horse has attained his highest speed, which we
should keep up as long as possible. The result of the race
will then become a question of staying power ; because the
animal which can keep up his highest speed for the longest
time, will have the best chance.
We should note that in a trotting race a rider should
keep his mount at the top of its speed from the start. We
will see further on that this is not the case in flat-race
riding.
THE CANTER.
Of all paces, the canter is the most difficult and complicated.
Few riding masters succeed in making a horse do the move-
ments they require at the canter.
I never begin the canter before getting the horse thoroughly
under control, by which I mean that he should be physically,
and, if I may say, morally obedient to me in all his paces ;
that he should be supple, well in hand, and should readily
yield to the legs.
I expect, above all things, the loins, haunches and hocks to
be perfectly supple, and the horse to obey the effects of the
whole without hesitation, in order that I may be able to utilize
the resulting' forces as I wish.
154 ORDINARY RIDING.
Having obtained these conditions, I am certain to presently
succeed in placing my horse in a proper position for the canter,
and to immediately get the canter which I wish the horse to
do, and not the one he desires to perform.
If the horse obeys the legs, I shall be able to prevent him
from going sideways, which is an extremely bad habit, and
which is better to prevent than to punish. It is much more
difficult to straighten a horse which is accustomed to throw
his hind quarters to the right or left, than to teach him to
canter straight from the beginning.*
At the canter, the rider ought to keep his body straight.
If he leans too much forward, each stride of the canter will
throw him on to the animal's neck. If he is too far back, the
loins will become hollow, and the body will consequently
become stiff.
The horse canters either on the near fore or off fore. He is
said to lead with the off leg, when the right legs are in
* In the school, when a pupil wishes to make his horse strike oft' into the canter
with the outside leg, he generally puts him too much sideways. I take for granted
that he is going to the left, and wishes his horse to strike off" with the oft" fore.
He will then carry his hands to the left, which will be all right, if he does it
only just enough to put the weight on the left shoulder. But if he does not succeed,
he will probably carry his hands more and more to the left and he will turn his
horse into the position of shoulder-in. The horse at this period of breaking
does not know how to do the shoulder-in at a canter ; because his teacher should
have begun by making him canter straight on the inward and outward legs before
doing that. The pupil thus succeeds only in destroying all impulse, and in
making the canter impossible, by causing the horse to get behind his bit. He
should, therefore, carry the hands to the left only just enough to put the weight
on the left shoulder, but not sufficient to place the animal sideways. If the horse
puts himself in an oblique position, he should not insist on making him canter,
but should straighten him, and should begin starting him oft' again, while
holding him straight.
Starting well is not everything. We should keep the horse straight.
When the horse canters with the outward leg leading, the rider, at starling, and
also to keep up the pace, has always a great tendency to place the horse sideways
by bringing the shoulders in, and by placing the horse on two tracks. If we
persist in this fault, all progress will be impossible ; because the horse can never
canter correctly on two tracks, if he has not learned at first to canter straight on
the outward leg.
THE CANTER. 155
advance at the moment the}' come on the ground. In the
canter to the left, the left leg.s do this.
To teach a horse to canter on the off fore, we ought
to close both legs, carry both hands to the left, and feel
the off reins a little stronger than the near reins.* In
this way we put the weight on the near shoulder, without
bringing to the left the head, which should alwa}\s remain
straight, with the end of the muzzle slightl}- inclined to the
right.
As soon as a horse has learned to keep in a good
position, he should be put into movement. The hind
quarters, which act the part of a propeller, ought to push
and carry the fore hand forward. To bring the hocks
under the bod)% I increase the effect of the legs, while
pressing equall}' with them, Finalh', I use a stronger
pressure with my left leg, and I carr}- it a little further
back than my right one.f
If the horse has some "go" in him, the effect of the legs
will be sufficient to send him up to the hands (bridle). At
this moment, I raise my hands while feeling the reins, and I
profit by the impulse given by the legs, to raise the horse,
while preventing him extending himself and breaking into a
trot. If the horse is sluggish, we should prolong and increase
the action of the legs, and if need be, we should use the
spurs.
Under these conditions, it is difficult for the horse not to
lead off with the off fore. It ma)' however happen that he
leads off with the near fore, or trots. In either case, I stop
him as quickly as possible, and I replace him in the position I
have previously described. I then begin again, and continue
* I always begin by using the snaflk, whatever may be the pace I am
teaching.
t By means of the left leg, the rider throws, so to speak, the weight of the
horse's body on his right leg, which sends it to the hands.
156 ORDINARY RIDING.
to do so, until he leads with the off fore.* As soon as he has
done three or four strides on this leg, I stop him, pat him on
the neck and let him walk round the school in perfect freedom.
After that I do the same exercise three or four times.f
Baucher, by a singular error, recommended lateral equitation
for starting at the canter. In his edition of 1846, page 219,
he advised for starting with the off fore leading, to carry the
hands to the left — which would put tension on the right rein
— and to apply the right leg. I attribute this error to the bad
flexion of the neck which he practised. The neck being low
and bent at the withers to the right, causes the left shoulder
to be rounded, and the effect of the left leg would bend the
tzuo ends of the horse tozvards the inside, that is to say, to bring
his head and croup towards each other. The effect of the
right leg, on the contrary, is to partly remedy a bad equilib-
rium resulting from the faulty flexion of the neck. How could
Baucher reconcile this practice with his great principle — in
turning — of " applying the leg of the side opposite to which
the turn is made" (Edition of 1846, page 189)?
* If the horse starts disunited, that is to say, if the forehand canters to the
right, and the hind quarters to the left, we should increase the action of the
" aids " to obtain the canter which we require, and if the hind quarters in this case
are disunited, we should use the left leg energetically.
I advise beginners who find some difficulty in understanding the canter, to
exercise prudence, for there is nothing worse than to try to remedy a fault which
does not exist. At first, lean forward a little, so as to see with which leg the
horse canters. If the right shoulder is in advance when the fore feet come down,
we may be certain that he is leading with his off fore. We should now feel our
seat, and the regularity and suppleness (ease) of the displacement of the body
will tell us if the canter is well united, in which case the horse will be leading
with the off hind as well as with the off fore. But if the displacement of the
seat is done in a jolting manner and with a double shock, the canter will lie dis-
united, and the near hind will be leading.
We can then, but only if we are absolutely certain, use the left spur to drive
the hind quarters to the right, and keep the left leg close to the animal's side, in
order to force him to remain united.
■f I have already said that we should always finish with the new work, so as to
impress it on the memory of the horse.
THE CANTER. 157
According to this system, it is necessary when turning to
the right at the canter to use a stronger pressure of the right
leg, in order for the horse to lead with his off fore ; and the
left leg, in order to turn to the right. The inconsistency is so
evident, that it is sufficient to merely point it out. Everyone
knows that if a horse has learned to canter with the near fore
leading, b\' means of the support of the left leg, the effect will
be to make him change his leg, and not to turn to the right.
I think it is useless to describe the means by which we
make a horse lead with his near fore, because they are
naturally the opposite ones to those which we have just
described. We ought always to begin the canter with the off
fore * leading, and for this object we ought to make the horse
circle to the right in the riding school. I never ask the horse
to lead with the near fore until I can readily make him canter
freely with the off fore leading. This is a matter of a few
days, the number of which we cannot exactly fix. Some
horses easily lead with the off fore, but others find this
difficult to do, although they may be very clever at starting
with the near fore leading.
Horses are like men — some are naturally and by habit
right-handed, and others are left-handed. It seems probable
that some horses are naturally right-footed ; because, if we
did not take account of contracted habits, all horses would be
left-footed.
In fact, when we lead a horse by the bridle on foot, we
always keep on his left side, which is also the side on which
we feed, saddle, and bridle him. As the horse likes to take
notice of what goes on around him, the left is the side towards
which he constantly turns his head, and consequently he
ought to be more supple to the left than to the right ; but he
* The rule in riding is lo begin all movements to the right. On a straight
line in the open we generally canter with the off fore leading, which is the style
adopted by ladies. For all reasons it is best to begin the canter in this way.
158 ORDINARY RIDING.
is not so. I have met as many right-footed horses as left-
footed ones. We can find out which he is by working him ;
for there is nothing in his conformation that would enable us
to decide that question.*
As a right-footed horse will remain all his life much more
supple and easy to the right ; the left side will naturally be
the one to which we should work him in flexions, side steps,
voltes, canter, etc. ; and vice versa.
Before requiring the horse to do more, I wait till he can
canter as readily with one leg as with the other, while
keeping him straight all the time. I then try to get him
completely in hand, which I certainly will not be able to do
at the canter, if I have not first made his mouth supple and
light at all paces and during all the preceding exercises.
The best definition of the action of the " aids " in the
present case, is that the hands make the walk and the legs
the canter — namely, that whilst the legs press the horse with
energy, the hands lightly restrain him. He then finds
himself controlled by two opposing actions ; propulsion being
the dominating one. They oblige him to raise himself and
canter.
The riding master will find that he has attained his object
when the horse canters slowly without effort, and, above all
things, without trying to escape from the hand.f
* All Arab horses are left-footed, with respect to the fact that they always
turn to the left and never to the right, which peculiarity is simply the result of
education. If we place ourselves on the right of an Arab horseman, he cannot
touch us. He must turn to the left-about in order to reach us.
t Almost all authors advise that when a horse pulls at the canter, he should be
stopped and made to rein back, than which nothing is less rational. A horse
pulls because his hocks are far from the centre of the body. In making him rein
back we push the hocks still further to the rear, and we directly counteract the object
we desire to attain. On the contrary, without stopping the horse, we should press
him well up to the bridle with the legs, should keep him in hand while he is
moving forward, should make him do movements as a whole, and take and give
with the hands and legs in order to collect him, which is the only means for
THE CANTER. 159-
There are three ways of seeing that a horse canters with
the off fore leading :
First, it is sufficient to look at his shoulders or feet. If he
canters with the off fore leading, the off shoulder, and
especially the off fore foot, will respectively be in advance of
the near shoulder and near fore foot.
Second, the horse has always his croup a little turned to
the side of the leading fore leg.
Third, when the off fore leads, the right leg of the rider is
more shaken than the left leg,* and consequently it is more
difficult to keep that knee close to the flap of the saddle than
the other knee.
After a series of attentive observations, we ought to be
able to tell with what leg a horse leads, even with our eyes
shut.
Before going further in the teaching of breaking, it is
important to explain the movements of the canter.-}-
The canter of the school horse and hack ought to be in
well-marked three time. I
Three times (beats) are, therefore, necessary to form a stride
of the canter. Let us take, for example, the canter with the
off fore leading.
bringing his hocks under his body. Thus the forehand will be lightened in
proportion as the hind quarters drive the body forward.
At this time, half-turns on the haunches will be very useful, provided that
the rider has enough /ac^ to keep the haunches well engaged and the horse well
up to his bit.
* The right hock, placed under the body gives more impulse in the canter to
the right than the left hock, and it is the one which displaces the right knee of
the rider. The action of the left hock, which is much more to the rear, and is
consequently a less powerful propelling agent, has necessarily a much less
displacing effect on the left knee.
t This study is necessary for the changes of leg.
J The long-striding gallop, like that of the racecourse, is in four lime. The
very short canter of a rasse//id/J'd horse, of which pace I shall speak later on, is
also in four time.
i6o
ORDINARY RIDING.
First time. — Near hind in support (Fig. 43).
Second time. — Left diagonal support, the near hind and
■off fore having just quitted the ground (Fig. 44).
Third time. — Off fore in support (Fig. 45).
I will now indicate the action of the "aids" which the rider
should employ during this stride.
First time. — Strong support from the left leg. The horse
finds himself resting for a moment only on his near hind, but
the period is so short that it cannot be seen without great
practice.
Fig. 43. — First time of the canter ; near iiind in support.
Second time. — Left diagonal. The two legs of the rider
•ought to exert their pressure to try to get the horse in hand.
Third time. — The horse's off fore is in support. The
rider ought to receive the horse lightly on his hands ; at first
to support him, and immediately afterwards to complete the
task of getting him in hand, which work was initiated by the
legs during the second time.
I will now e.xplain the effects of the "aids" during the
three times which make a stride.
First time. — The rider's left leg ought to be strongly
pressed against the horse's side, because the horse is standing.
THE CANTER.
i6i
so to speak, on his near hind, while his body is inclined
forward and his other limbs are not much raised from the
ground. The entire weight of the horse and rider are,
therefore, carried on this leg, and if the rider does not support
the left side of the horse, it is certain that this leg will give
way under the excess of weight, and that the croup will
swerve to the left.
Second time. — The two legs of the rider exert their
pressure in order to press the horse up to the hand. This is
Fig. 44. — Second time of the canter ; left diagonal in support.
the only moment of the canter when the horse has two
supports, and we ought to profit by the impulse he has just
received, to get him into hand at the following time.
Third time. — The rider receives the horse on the hand.
This is the easiest moment at which to get the horse
completely in hand ; because, at the second period, the right
hock being under the body, gives the greater part of the
propulsion, which our hands should utilise to rassemhler the
horse.
The hands ought also to support the horse a little during
the third period ; because the animal's off fore is then his
II
l62
ORDINARY RIDING.
only support. At this moment horses usually make mistakes,
and are apt to fall if they are not supported.
Of course I point out only the chief "aids." We under-
stand that the hands and legs should always co-operate with
each other.
It might appear, after what I have just said, that the near
hind is the leg which becomes most fatigued at a canter to the
right. In fact, this is the usual opinion of many of those wjio
have written on this subject. Nothing could be more
Fig. 45. — Third time of the canter ; off fore in support.
erroneous ; because the off hock, being under the body and
having to raise all the weight, does the most work during each
stride, which is a fact beyond dispute. I am aware that the
near hock, being placed at the end of the arm of the lever, is
under a much less favourable condition for action. But
precisely because the position which the off hock occupies
under the body, is more favourable to the complete utilisation
of its force, it makes a greater effort than the near hock, and
consequently it becomes more fatigued. It we attentively
watch a horse which is cantering with his off fore leading, we
will quickly see that the off hock and fetlock become much
VOLTES AND DEMI-VOLTES. 163
more bent than the near ones, and consequently their upward
action is better marked and their spring more energetic*
If we canter to the right, a horse which has an unsound off
hock, caused, for instance, by a spavin or curb, he will
immediately become disunited, on account of the movement
causing him pain. But if we make him canter with the near
fore leading, he will not change his hind legs.
The off hock therefore exerts more force in the canter to
the right, and the near hock in the canter to the left. On
this account, the rider ought to keep his legs firmly closed,
especially during the second period of the canter. By doing
this, the hock which is under the body, is quickened in its
action, the horse is pressed forward, and is prevented, at the
second period of the canter, from remaining longer on the
ground than at the first or third period. If we do not act
thus, the second period will be slower and heavier than the
other two.
VOLTES AND DEMI-VOLTES AT THE CANTER.
When I have taught a horse to canter in a light and easy
way, I make him do great voltes. It is best to describe large
circles at first, because it is more difficult to keep a horse
straight in small ones.
Horses generally carry their haunches either to the outside
or to the inside ; the former fault being more easy to remedy
than the latter.
Let us suppose that the horse is cantering with the off fore
leading and is turning to the right. After having closed the
legs, I carry the hands forward and to the right, — forward to
prevent him stopping, and to the right to bring his shoulders
* Among ladies' horses which always canter with the oft" fore leading, the off"
hock always becomes prematurely worn out. Ladies do not like to canter to the
left, because it displaces their seat too much. As they are seated on the near side
of the horse, the propulsion given by the off" hock is not made exactly under their
seat, hence the displacement is less than in the canter to the left.
II*
i64 ORDINARY RIDING.
away from the wall. The off snaffle * rein should be pulled
to the right, while the near rein presses the neck and conse-
quently the shoulders to the right, and at the same time it
helps the left leg to support the haunches, and thus assists to
hold the horse straight. If the horse tries to throw his croup
to the left, my two legs ought to increase their action to push
him forward, the left leg acting a little more vigorously than
the right, to keep his right leg leading. The right leg pushes
the body forward and forces the haunches to follow the same
line as the shoulders.
It is very easy to understand why I prefer a horse which
carries his quarters to the outside, to one which carries them
to the inside. In the former case, the animal presses on my
left leg, and I then use the spur, which has two objects. First,
to prevent the croup deviating to the left ; and, second, to
force the animal to keep cantering with the off fore leading.
But if he carries his quarters to the inside of the circle,
I am obliged to use my right leg, and sometimes the spur,
with more or less force, and I thus run the risk of making the
animal change behind. Also, the horse which carries his
haunches towards the inside of the circle, is behind his bit.
These faults seldom appear, if we begin on large circles,
which we should only gradually make smaller, and in propor-
tion to the ease with which the horse does the work. I may
add that even in small circles we should keep the horse very
straight.
Immediately after, I begin demi-voltes, which present no
difficulty if executed without precision, but which are very
hard to do in an absolutely correct manner. I have rarely
seen them thus done.
* I have already said that I always work with the snaffle when beginning any
new exercise. It is the means for direction ; and the curb, for getting the horse
in hand. In proportion as the snaffle is brought into play, the curb aids more and
more in getting the animal into hand. This continual action of the curb is found
in all exercises to be associated with the action of the snaffle in trivinij direction.
VOLTES AND DEMI-VOLTES. 165
The horse behig placed straight and in hand, as in the voltes,
ought to leave the wall. When he has made three strides, he
ought to cover the rest of the ground on two tracks, while
coming up to the wall.
To go on two tracks, while the horse is cantering with the
■off fore leading, the off snaffle rein pulls the head and neck a
little to the right, whilst the near rein, being applied against
the neck, presses the shoulders to the right. The left leg
causes the haunches to move to the right, and the right leg
helps to press the horse forward and to keep him in hand,
which is important, because he has to advance while going to
the side.
On arriving at the wall, which is on the right of the rider,
Ave should straighten the horse,* stop him, get him into hand
at the walk, and start him into the canter with the near fore
leading. We can do the same work on the other foot.
When the horse can do demi-voltes well, I prolong them
for some strides at the canter, without changing the leg.
Thus, I begin the demi-volte at the wall, which is on my left.
\\'hile cantering the horse with the off fore leading, I turn to
the right, and continue to keep up the canter on the off fore,
even after the demi-volte, but only during two or three strides
at the first attempt. I increase the number of these strides
only little b)- little, according to the lightness and cleverness
of the horse. This is the most simple way to teach a horse
to canter with the right leg when turning to the left ; and
"I'ice versa. This exercise is indispensable if we wish to
readily obtain changes of leg wheii cantering round to the
right or left.
When the horse goes round the school correctl)' on the leg
which is next to the wall, we should start several times with
the off fore leading, and also with the near fore leading, both
* The shoulders should arrive fust at the wall, so that the movement may be
correct.
i66 ORDINARY RIDING.
to the right and to the left, while always keeping him along
the wall.
CHANGES OF LEG.
When a horse at the canter leads equally well with both
legs, it is necessary that the rider should make him strike off
with whichever leg he likes. He should also know how to
make the horse change his leg, namely, to pass from one
canter into the other canter without stopping. This is not
high school -work, but belongs to ordinary riding, whether
practised in the school or outside.
If, for example, we are at the canter with the horse's near
fore leading, and we wish to turn to the right, it is impossible
to make this change of direction without danger. In fact,
the near leg, which is in advance, will cross the off leg, and
the horse will probably fall, in which case the rider will be
almost certain to blame the horse ; but the fault is his own.*
If, when cantering with the near fore leading, w^e wish to
turn to the right, while maintaining the same pace, we should
first of all make the horse change his leg, in which case the
turning movement will be made easily and without danger.
In fact, the horse will have his head and body bent towards
the side to which he is turning. Further, it is the forward
leg which covers the ground of the side to which the change of
direction is being made.j"
* A horse which crosses his legs may escape falling, but only if he is lucky.
If a horse which is cantering with the near fore, falls on being turned to
the right, he does so because he is abruptly put into the position for the canter to
the right. In high school riding we succeed very well in turning to the right,
while our horse canters with the near fore. To do this we should make a large
circle when turning, should always keep the horse in the position of the canter
to the left, and should even exaggerate this position, by using the right leg to push
the croup a little more to the left. It is easier to change the leg.
t With respect to changes of direction, I give the following advice : always
enlarge the circle as much as possible ; slacken the speed a little when turning ;
and if not quite certain of the change of leg — which is difficult in propor-
tion to the speed — it is best before turning to make the horse change into the
trot and not to put him into the canter again until he has completed the turn.
CHANGES OF LEG. 167
W'e should exercise great care in teaching the horse to
change his leg.
It is very difificult to lay down in a book the exact time
when a horse is ready to learn changes of leg. I can only
say, in a general way, that the proper time is when he has
become free, supple, light, and well balanced in all his paces,
obedient, and above all things, attentive to the " aids ," by
means of the exercises we have described.
We have now arrived at the point when the horse will start
freely into the canter with the off fore leading when going to
the right, and with the near fore when going to the left, and
that he will do so with equal freedom on both legs.
To obtain a change of leg, I proceed in the following
manner :* I start the horse into the canter on the off fore
while going to the right When he has gone some strides on
this leg, I stop him and make him start off on the near fore
while circling to the right, and taking care to hold him as
straight as possible. I repeat this work several times, and
continue it until I feel that the horse is perfectly light in hand,
and that he will start off into the canter at the slightest
pressure of the legs, without hurrying himself and without
trying to carry his haunches out of the straight line.
To make sure that the horse does not carry himself sideways,
we should start him at about a yard away from the wall,
although it is difficult to do so.-f- The result of this is to
make the rider keep the horse very straight, without the help
of the wall, and, at the same time, to make him more precise
in his work.
We should not try to get the horse to change his leg away
from the wall, before making him do so, while going along it.
The horse should also very readily start into the canter on the
* I again repeat that I always begin a new work at the end of a lesson.
t The difficulty is not in starting, but in keeping the horse at a uniform dis-
tance from the wall while holding him straight.
i68 ORDINARY RIDING.
leg we wish, when we have placed him in the position to do
so, and have given him the proper indication with the legs.*
I then start him into the canter on the off fore, and keep him
at it until he becomes quiet. I then walk him for a minute
or two, and put him into the canter on the near fore, and
keep him at it, the same as before, until he is light and quiet,
after which I again walk him for some moments. Finally, I
start him into the canter on the off fore, and so on. I there-
fore make successive starts at the canter, each one being on a
different leg. Little by little I shorten the periods during
which I let the horse walk between the starts at the canter, in
such a way that he does not take, for instance, more than five,
four, three, two, and finally, one step between the respective
starts. At last he learns to start into the canter alternately
from the stationary foot to the other foot, the starts being
interrupted only by the halt.
Thus, the horse having been started into the canter on the
off fore, is stopped, and is immediately started again into the
canter on the near fore, this change of leg being helped by
the halt. As the true change of leg is done without halting,
it is called a change of leg in the air.
At this period of his training the horse is ready for the
change of leg, which I ought to be able to make him
do without upsetting him in the least. I start him into
the canter on the near fore, while going to the right.
He therefore canters on the outward leg,"|* and I
support him at that time with the near rein and right
leg, which gives a stronger pressure than the left
leg. When I come to a corner of the school I completely
change my " aids," and use the off rein and left leg. This
* Position by legs and hands and stimulation by the legs arc two most im-
portant principles in riding.
t In this case he is cantering "false," which is the term used by English
cavalrymen. •
CHANGES OF LEG. 169
chani^e of " aids " ought to be done with great decision and
perfect combination. In order for the movement to be well
done, it should be executed with extreme quickness, and with-
out the slightest jerk. . This quickness and smoothness are
possible onl)- if the rider has constantly taken the precaution
of lightly feeling the off rein, and of keeping the left leg very
close to the animal's side, so that he need only feel this rein a
little stronger and press the leg a little more. As the horse
has already lightly felt the off rein, and as the left leg has
been kept very close to his side, there will be neither jerk nor
irritation to the horse when this hand and this leg predomi-
nate in their turn.
Finally, as we have practised our horse to start on the off
leg, by the action of the off rein and left leg, and as we ask him
to do this first change of leg when turning to the right, which
will be easier for him to do than when turning to the left, he will
very rarely refuse to do so, even at the first time. If, however,
he does not obey, we must not persist in roughly forcing him,
because that would cause him to throw his haunches to the
right, and make him afraid of the change of leg, which he
would not understand. He should be stopped, brought into
hand at the walk, made to start on the near fore, and then
asked to change his leg. But before doing this we should
wait until he has got quiet.
The fact of the horse failing to do a change of leg several
times, is a proof that his preparation is insufficient; that being
surprised by the " aids " he tried to escape or throw himself to
one side ; or that he did not understand what we wanted. In
all these cases we should begin starting him afresh. Any
failure in this respect will be extremely rare if the horse has
been properly prepared.
Whenever we meet with a difficulty we should go back to
the start, with the near fore leading, or with the off fore lead-
ing. B)- these repeated starts with a halt, we shall succeed in
I/O ORDINARY RIDING.
making the change of leg so easy, that the horse will often do
it on his own account, when prompted merely by the pre-
parations to which he has been submitted. In fact, when we
stop him on one leg, the " aids " ought to slightly prepare him
to start off on the other leg.
Whenever I have had time to prepare a horse, I have never
failed to make him change his leg at the first attempt. What-
ever kind of horse he may be, he will always do one change
correctly, after having failed to do several. We should then
get off, pat him on the neck, and send him back to his stable.
At the following lesson we ought to repeat and prolong the
same lesson, until the animal changes easily from the near fore
to the off fore. Having then turned round, so as to go to the
left, we should, in the same way, make him change from the
off fore to the near fore.
We should always avoid making him change at the same
place, as that would always make him want to change
when he passes it. It would therefore become impossible to
make him change as we wish, because our will would be
subordinated to his.*
When I have got the horse to readily change from the out-
ward to the inward leg in the corners, I put him to do the
same work on a straight line.
The change of leg should be required only at a certain
period of the stride, when it is easiest for the horse to do. As
* I have said that in all things horses acquire habits with great facility.
Therefore, during breaking, we should most carefully avoid giving him bench-
marks (if I may use the term), whether by putting him to the same work at the-
same place, or by repeating different exercises in the same order. This advice is,
I think, all the more important, because the majority of riding masters persistently
give bench-marks to their horses, which makes the breaking apparently more
easy. Although the horse by routine does his work at a given moment, at certain
spots, and according to a j)rearranged programme, he is not properly trained,
because, so far from being submissive to the will of his rider, the rider has to
accommodate himself to the habits of the animal. Consequently the horse is
habituated, or, as we may say, " routined," but he is not l)rokcn iia.
CHANGES OF LEG. 171
I have already said, each stride is composed of three distinct
periods, which are marked by the feet of the horse coming
down on the ground. In reahty there is a fourth, namely, the
period of suspension, which is not marked.
The canter to the right may be divided as follows: ist
period, near hind ; 2nd period, off hind and near fore ; and
3rd period, off fore. The fourth period begins at the moment
the off fore leaves the ground, and ends when the near hind is
placed on the ground. At this moment the horse is in the air>
between the third period of one stride and the first period of
the next stride.
The best time to obtain the change of leg is at the fourth
period, because the horse is then in the air.*
* Baucher gives no explanation of this subject. The majority of riding
masters make this change of leg during support, and not when the horse is in the
air, as I have advised. Their plan gives rise to an inevitable halt, which
destroys the rhythm of the canter, and consequently alters the canter. My
method, on the contrary, maintains the canter with all its impulse, and allows,
the rider to lengthen or shorten the stride, as he may wish, in all the changes
of leg.
A correctly executed change of leg at each stride thus forms a true pace, at
which I obtain so much impulse that I am ready, without false modesty, to-
challenge anyone to have a race at it.
On this subject I sent the following letter to the editor of Gil Bias, who-
declined to publish it. I fortunately got it inserted in the Echo de Paris, but it
received no answer : —
" Paris, 27th August, 1 890.
"To THE Editor Gil Bias.
"Sir,—
" Baron de Vaux has severely criticised my book and my riding in a long
article which recently appeared in Gil Bias. It has in no way annoyed me, and
I, being a horseman, have not the rashness to find fault with the criticism of a
penman.
" There is, however, one point which I think is worthy of notice, because it
can be submitted to practical proof.
"The writer of the article tries to make out that I do not hold my horses
straight in the changes of leg. If this be true, I must necessarily lose ground in
forward progression. That being the case, I propose a race of changes of leg at
each stride, which I believe is an original idea that has never been tried. The
winner will, of course, be he whose horse is the straighter of the two.
1/2 ORDINARY RIDING.
To obtain the change of leg during the fourth period, we
should give the signal to the horse during the second period,
when the diagonal is in support. When cantering to the
right, the effect of the spur, at the moment when the left
-diagonal is in support, will be a vigorous straightening of the
off hock, which will forcibly send the near shoulder in advance
of the off shoulder when the horse is in the air.
The near hind leg will go in advance of the off hind leg all
the more easily, because it is off the ground when the off hock
gives its push. Under these conditions, after the spur has
touched the horse during the second period, the third period
(support by the off fore) loses the greater part of its impulse
in the stride, and will be accentuated only as much as the
equilibrium may require, because it is the off hock which has
given the increased propulsion necessary for a change of leg.
Everyone can now understand the meaning of change of
leg in the air.
The reversed indications are used for changing from the
near fore to the off fore.
In this chapter I have spoken of changes of leg onl}^ from
an ordinary point of view. Later on I \\'ill discuss this
subject with respect to high school work.
THE HACK.
I will not try to describe the proper type of hack, because
every riding man or woman has his or her own ideal, which
" As Baron de Vaux knows many riding masters whom lie favoural)ly
criticises, I would like to get one of them to accept my challenge.
" I am ready to accept my adversary's conditions as regards ground and
length of course. He can also fix the stake, which should go to a public
charity.
"This will be a gootl business for the poor, if not for riding. Ten
thousand francs, for instance, will give them a great deal of pleasure.
" I am, Sir,
" Your most obedient servant,
"James Fh.i.is."
THE HACK. 175
the riders choose according to their habits, temperament, and
style of riding. Horses have certain innate qualities which
cannot be given or replaced by breeding, rearing, or
breaking.
The first thing to require is surefootedness, which is a
sine qua non. It is absolutely necessary that the animal will
make no mistake at any of his paces. Hence we like our
horses to raise their feet freely and to place them in a well-
balanced manner on the ground. A horse which drags his
legs, or " daisy cuts," is apt to make a false step by striking
a stone or other inequality on the ground, and may conse-
quently fall down.
A horse which brings his toe first on the ground will be
very apt to stumble, which is a fault we find among animals
which " daisy cut." A horse which raises his feet properly,
cannot dig his toes into the ground, and must necessarily
place them flat.
A hack should have pluck. That is to say, he should not
be restless or nervous. No amount of training can cure a
horse of stumbling, or give pluck to an animal which is
always ready to shy or spin round.
As long as a good rider holds his horse between his hands
and knees, and is on the alert,* he will save him from break-
* We should not only watch a skittish horse, but should also engage his atten-
tion as soon as he shows any signs of nervousness. In such cases many riders
will not use their legs for fear of exciting the animal, and they continually hang on
to the reins, especially those of the snaffle. By allowing him to be a prey to his
fear, the rider does the very thing to increase it. By giving the animal a support
on the bit, he is placed in the most favourable condition to play up.
We should act in an entirely different manner, and, by the energetic use of the
legs, should drive the horse forward ; because, at the first show of uneasiness, his
tendency will necessarily be to get behind his bit, which is a preparation for
shying, spinning round, and rearing. We should at the same time profit by the
impulse given, in order to place the horse vigorously but lightly in hand, by
means of the alternate effects of the curb and snaffle. Having got him in
hand, we should give him a lateral flexion to the side opposite to which his
object of terror is on. Finally, while keeping him well in hand, we should
press him boldly forward, which is, in every case, the least dangerous thing ta
174 ORDINARY RIDING.
ing his knees or from meeting with any other accident. But,
if he relaxes his attention, he will run a good chance of
bringing back a blemished horse to his stable. Under these
conditions, hacking ceases to be a pleasure and becomes a
labour, a continual preoccupation, and an ennui which soon
makes one hate riding.
We see that the two first good qualities of a hack are
surefootedness and pluck.
In my opinion there is a third quality which excels the
first two, because it includes them and everything else which
we desire from a horse. This supreme quality in every
horse is impetuosity, namely, energy, fire, courage, and
constant readiness to go forward.
A horse which is not surefooted knows his defect, will
always be hesitating, and will not dare to rush forward. A
horse which is not plucky is always ready to get behind his
bit. A horse which is a free goer is confident in being able
to keep his feet, and, though glad to go forward, he does not
get disturbed by the things which he passes. No matter
what may be the breed or shape, a horse, like a man, takes
his value from his mental qualities. Energy and heart make
the horse. What use is the most beautiful railway engine, if
it has no steam to drive it along the rails ?
Above all theories, there is the fact that the only good horse
for every kind of work, whether for high school equitation or
outside, is the horse which will go forward : that is to say, an
impetuous horse. By this, I of course do not mean an
animal which has irregular paces, is restless, vicious, apt to
^' play up " on no provocation, and is ready to run away.
do. These manoeuvres will turn the attention of the startled animal from his
cause of fear, and will place him in the most favourable position to avoid
violence or disorder. It is evident that we should use these means in pro-
portion to the skittishness shown by the animal. As a general rule, when a
horse becomes impatient, we should send him up to his bit by the vigorous
application of the legs, and he will instantly become quiet.
THE HACK. 175
The impetuous horse is one which wishes only to go
forward, and in consequence of his being well balanced and
having plenty of natural energy, he goes freely up to his
bridle. True balance and natural energy are innate qualities
in him, because they are conditions of his being : this in-
cludes everything. Equitation cannot exist without energy.
In the horse I speak of, the energy is already made, and he
gives it to his rider. It is easier, as I have said, to profit by
impulse than to create it. The fault of being behind the bit
is the stumbling block in every kind of riding, and the
natural disposition of an impetuous horse is directly opposed
to this tendency.
In every case, no matter what happens, a forward move-
ment is the least displacing one for the rider. The fact of
Arab horses being hot, generally makes them easy and
agreeable to ride. These animals canter high, and always
bring the hocks well under the body.
For the above reasons I am right in saying that every horse
which is not hot is fit only to be put between the shafts.
As a rule, people are afraid of an impetuous horse, and
they are wrong ; because he is the only one which will be
faithful, and will not do them a bad turn. He is the only
animal which, by reason of his constant desire to go forward,
is plucky even in his defences.
The sluggish horse, which is generally preferred, can
neither be reliable nor plucky. In every case, so far from
giving himself up to his rider, he continually restrains him-
self, and is always ready to keep behind the bit, which, in my
eyes, is the worst of all faults. He thinks only of returning
to his stable,* and tries to take advantage of every chance to
* The tendency of every horse, no matter how impetuous he may be, is to
return to the stable quicker than he left it.
In order that the rider may not be obliged to come back quicker than he went
out, I advise him to begin his ride at a fast pace, so as to quieten the animal
down, which is most important later on for preventing him jibbing, shying,
176 ORDINARY RIDING.
gratify this caprice. If we wish to go fast, and quiet means
are not sufficient, we should use the spurs or whip. When
the sluggish horse defends himself, he does so with all the
more spite, because he has kept back all his energy to oppose
the will of the rider. There is a great difference between the
two, because the impetuous animal gives all his strength for
the advantage of the rider ; and the sluggish horse, for the
detriment of the man in the saddle.*
A cold horse does not take us into his confidence, because
when riding him we are obliged to vigorously use the " aids,"
which are a punishment to him.
A liot horse which gives himself up wholly to his rider, gets
only pats on the neck, and appreciates all the slight differ-
ences in the indications of the " aids." There is neither fear
nor distrust between the two.
Many riders find fault with hot horses, because they are
impatient, and start off at a quick pace immediately the
reins are touched. The fault is on their side. In fact, when-
ever we wish to go rather fast, we begin by shortening the
kicking, etc. If we take the trouble to make the horse return at a slow pace,
during a certain time, we shall succeed in being able to regulate his paces as we
wish for the entire period of the ride, and we shall thus prevent him pulling or
starting off at a canter the moment his head is turned home.
I also advise that the horse should not be turned sharply round to come back
to his stable by the road he came out. Such a habit would prompt him to pull
immediately he was turned.
*In 1857, at Chalon-sur-Saone, two horses were brought into the riding school
to be broken. One was so skittish and lively that I found it extremely difficult
to put my foot into the stirrup. After having made several unsuccessful attempts,
they took me by the seat of the trousers and threw me into the saddle. When I
got there, the horse did nothing wrong, and went forward well in hand as soon as
I stopped holding him back.
As the other horse held his head down, did not move, and looked like a sheep,
the master of the riding school thought he was quiet, and mounted him without
any trouble, but he did not remain in the saddle long, because this supposed cold-
tempered horse bucked him off at the first attempt, but the hot horse carried
me gaily round the school. The conclusion which I draw from this, is that we
should distrust a horse which looks too quiet, and that we should not be afraid of
an impetuous animal.
THE HACK. 177
reins, and the horse quickly establishes a connection between
these two acts. Ikit if, in place of starting off the moment
we adjust the reins, we keep the horse at the walk, he will
not contract this bad habit, or he will give it up if he has
acquired it. The signal for a fast pace should be given only
with the heels.
With respect to breed, we find in the first line in this
book, the cry of my heart : " I break only thorough-breds."*
I unhesitatingly put thorough-breds above all others, whether
for hacking or for high school riding. They are pre-eminently
the best for all kinds of work. Besides, a man who has got
into the habit of riding thorough-breds, will not care to ride
any other horses.
For me the ruling qualities of the thorough-bred are the
lightness, the elasticity of the fine steel spring which puts
them into action, and the suppleness which will be developed
by breaking. If we listen from afar off, for the sound of his
foot-falls, we shall hardly hear them on account of the light-
* I wrote this book at the time when I made my debut at the Hippodrome
with Germinal and Markir. Remarks were made on the apparent contradiction
between my statement that I broke only thorough-breds and the fact that I had
carried the breaking of the half-bred Markir as far as with any other horse, no
matter what his breed might be.
The truth is that I bought Alarkir, not only on account of his good points, but
also for his strength and activity, which I greatly admired. While breaking him,
I often asked myself if he would do all I expected, and I frequently feared that
his abilities would not come up to my requirements, which he amply fulfilled to
my great surprise, and to such an extent that I determined to find out if the
pedigree he had been given was correct. I therefore wrote to my friend Lenoble
du Theil at the Haras du Pin, and told him that Markir had been sold to me as
being out of the thorough-bred mare Theresine by the Norfolk half-bred
Weighton Merrylegs, and I begged him to see if this was right. Imagine my
surprise and joy on receiving the following answer: " The thorough-bred mare
Theresine was put to Merrylegs, but did not hold, and was covered two months
later by Cyrus, which is a thorough-bred Anglo-Arab, and the sire of
Markir."
Markir is therefore thorough-bred. The curious thing about this matter
is that it was proved by practical experiment before any investigations had
been made.
12
178 ORDINARY RIDING.
ness with which he puts his feet on the ground. He skims
the ground, which he treads with a dehcacy full of energy.
The feet of other horses, compared to his, clatter and hammer
the ground, and their paces are much heavier.
On the other hand, there are many excellent half-breds.
We sometimes meet with horses which show no signs of
breeding, but which develop marvellous qualities in the same
way that certain thorough-breds of illustrious pedigrees are
mere garrons.* This prompts me to again say that a horse
should above all things be Iwt. I may add that the
thorough-bred is incomparable in courage and energy.
As the thorough-bred has the reputation of being cold,
I shall no doubt be asked how I can reconcile my love for
him with the superiority which I claim for the Iwt horse ?
This contradiction is only apparent, and I find that I have
already explained it. There are cold horses and hot horses
among thorough-breds, as there are among other breeds. I
will even say that the innate energy of a thorough-bred
will more easily make him generous, if he is ridden as he
* Nothing is more deceptive, even for speed, than pedigrees. Paternal and
maternal atavism jumble up everything. Nevertheless, certain sires transmit
characteristic points to the majority of their progeny.
I have ridden four horses sired by Vermouth and broken two of them. All
four were sulky and required punishment to make them pass their stable. As
long as they were ridden vigorously they went on a little, but no one could make
them move freely except when they were playing up. I kept my eye on them
for a long time, and found that they all turned jibbers.
The progeny of Zutare nervous, ticklish and restive.
The stock of Parmesan and Gantelet are excellent horses, supple, energetic
and good-tempered.
The stock of Clocher are good, but not handsome ; they can stay and carry
weight. The same can be said of the sons and daughters of Braconnier, which are
not so good-tempered as those of Clocher.
Horses got by Castillon are slugs.
Flavio sires good, supple and very wiry, though hot-tempered horses. It is
clear that observations of this kind, which could be multiplied to infinity, are all
the less exact, because the influence of the dam has not been taken into considera-
tion. Nevertheless, they are partly true, and are consequently worthy of
mention.
THE HACK. 179
ought to be, and if he is asked to do what may be expected
from his conformation and propelHng power.
The fact is that the horses which are selected for the turf
are long-striding animals, which consequently " daisy cut."*
A horse which has high action is not admitted into a training
stable, which fact enables me to obtain in him all the
generosity and heat which I value above all things,
whether for hacking or for high school riding.
People say that the thorough-bred does not make a good
trotter ; but the reason for this statement would be
difficult to give. On the contrary, the make and shape of
the thorough-bred are admirably suited for all three paces. It
is merely a question of education. We can train thorough-
breds to the trot, as well as to the canter, and I have known
thorough-breds which were wonderfully good trotters.
Breaking will develop in a sound well-built horse all
his innate qualities, and by its course of rational gymnastics,
will partly replace absent qualities. It will make him clever,
light, and well-balanced.
A horse which can walk, trot, canter, turn easily, rein back
and move from one side to the other, is sufficiently broken for
work in the open ; but he should first be made quiet to mount,
at which he should not require to be held. He should have
a free long-striding walk. The trot and canter should be
lengthened and shortened, according to the wish of the rider ;
this is a question of breaking.
At the walk a horse should be allowed to have iiis head
free, so that he may get confidence and may be able to
lengthen his stride at his ease, and his neck should be
nearly horizontal. Above all things, he should not be
allowed to jog.
* My answer to the objection that many thorough-breds are " daisy cutters," is
that such animals will not make good hacks ; but this fault in a hack is a good
quality in a race-horse. Although a horse which gallops high will be turned out
of a training stable, he will be gkully bought by a man who wants a nice hack.
12*
i8o ORDINARY RIDING.
At an ordinary trot, a horse should be let as free as possible.
We should keep him well in hand, with his head and neck
high, so that he may be light by being well-balanced.
In the fast trot, the head and neck should be nearly hori-
zontal, so as to allow the animal to reach forward as far as
possible. The horse ought to go freely up to the bridle,
and the rider ought to keep only a light feeling on the
snaffle.
There are three kinds of canter,* namely, the well-collected
canter, the hand gallop, and the fnll-speed gallop.
In the zvell-collected canter (strong action of the legs
and slight action of the hands : taking and giving), while
gaining but little ground, he should carry his head and neck
high.
The hand gallop is a shortened gallop, which should be
well-collected, if the rider is worthy of that name ; but in it
the horse is almost always behind his bit and extended.
If we go to the Bois any morning, we shall see many of
these unfortunate thorough-breds, which are worthy of a
better fate, fully extended, with their hind legs dragging
behind, head and neck low, and going stiffly in a mechanical
style of gallop. Such horses caricature the movements of
a gallop, while having a man on their back ; but this
inelegant combination has nothing to do with equitation.
In the hand gallop we should give some liberty to the
horse, and as we press him up to the hand, we should pro-
portionately support him. Although the collection is not full,
our legs should bring his hocks well under the body.
In the full -speed or race-course gallop, the horse should
lean well on the hands, and should stretch out his head and
neck. Although he is not collected, the hocks are not less
energetically brought under his body ; for speed could not
be obtained without their action.
'"^ In French, the same word is used for " canter " and " gallop " — Translator.
THE HACK. i8i
The rider ought to be able to easil}- make his horse go
from one of these paces into another.
The horse ought to be able to lead equally well with
either fore leg. Ability to change the leg is of great use,
when riding in the open, so as to be able to readily turn
to either side. It is not, however, indispensable if the rider
takes care to stop at the moment of turning, and to start
off on the leg of the side to which the turn is made.
It is of the utmost necessity that the horse readily yields
to the legs, so that we can place his haunches as we like
at all joaces. When a rider passes or crosses another rider,
he should be able to direct the movements of the hind
quarters with his legs at the same time as he does those
of the fore hand with his hands, so that he may guide the
horse as a whole and not in parts. If, for instance, the
hands pull the forehand to the right, and the haunches are
allowed to swing round to the left, the horse will be put
crossways, which is just the thing he ought not to be made
to do. In this way the rider may get thrown off, or the
man who passss by him may get kicked.
If a horse obeys the legs properly, we can easily, at all
three paces, approach or leave one or more riders. When
we are all together, obedience to both legs will enable us to
leave the others, and, keeping the horse in hand, to let them
pass us, if such is our wish.
There is extreme pleasure in riding a well-broken Jiot
horse.*
Nothing is more agreeable than to work a horse in the
open. Flexions, diagonal effects, two tracks, the rassenibler,
starting into the canter with the off fore and near fore
leading, and other fine points of horsemanship, keep us on
the alert, and make the time pass quickl)' when hacking.
* A horse that stumbles, shies, pulls, or won't go on unless spurred, soon
disgusts us with riding.
i82 ORDINARY RIDING.
The weather is always good for riding, except when there
is snow and frost.*
In cold weather there is extreme pleasure in hearing the
quick foot-falls on the hard ground, of a horse which is
excited by keen air.
If it is raining or misty, the damp ground will be excellent
for the horse, who will bravely plunge his feet into puddles
and mud, and will joyously splash everything in his road.
When it blows hard, how pleasant it is to feel the wind
striking our face, while we dash along at full speed !
Behold the sun ! Let us go to the woods to enjoy the
freshness and deadened brilliancy of the soft light.
The walk is the pace for reverie. The land spreads out
its panorama, of which we are a living, moving part, because
we are carried away by the country in the cadence of a
continual movement to the long striding walk of a thorough-
bred. What pedestrian will believe that the walk of a horse
can inspire his rider with the feeling of speed ? Nevertheless,
that is the pleasure which is reserved for us.
The trot and hacking canter give us the pleasure of travel-
ling without fatigue, of enjoying a harmonious movement
produced by a reaction as free as it is elastic, with an energy
increased a hundredfold by the generous ardour of the noble
animal which is at our disposal, and which will give us all
that is in it. Where does man end ; where does the horse
begin ? We know not. The two make the most intimate,
supple, living and vigorous whole which forms all the joy
of life and action.
What intoxication of happiness to rush at full speed into
space towards the unknown ! If fences come in our way,
what excitement there is in flying over them ! What quiet
daring fills our heart !
* When the ground is slippery, we should take our feet out of the stirrups, so
that one of our legs may not get under the horse, in case of a fall.
THE HACK. 183
We cannot express the infinite joy there is in the full speed
of a thoroughbred. It is Hke the rocking of a wave, but it
is so soft, so refined, that the air which we cleave annuls the
feeling of weight. It is a mighty, intoxicating flight, with-
out effort and without fatigue ; a physical joy which puts
the mind to sleep, and leaves nothing living in us, except
the maddening pleasure of flying through space.
I consider that the thorough -bred horse makes man perfect.
1 84
CHAPTER III.
HORSES WITH VICES.
Nervous Horses — Horses which throw their heads about — Horses which
run away.
NERVOUS HORSES.
It is usually said that a horse which is nervous will jump
to one side or spin round, when the sight of some object or
some noise makes him stop.
Any horse can be more or less surprised, according to its
degree of impressionability. Happily all horses are not
timid.
The impressionability of a horse can be greatly diminished
and modified by breaking. Custom establishes mutual confi-
dence between horse and rider. If the animal has not been
beaten, or violently forced up to the object of his alarm, and
if the presence of his rider reassures him, instead of frighten-
ing him, he will soon become steady.
It is a sound principle never to flog a horse which is
frightened by some external object. We should, on the
contrary, try to anticipate or remove the impression by
" making much " of the animal.
I have already said that a horse has but little intelligence.
He cannot reason, and has only memory. If he is beaten
when an object suddenly comes before him and startles him,
he will connect in his mind the object and the punishment.
NERVOUS HORSES. 185
If he again sees the same object, he will expect the same
punishment, his fear will become increased, and he will
naturall}- try to escape all the more violently.
All horses are not equally timid. Some are more impres-
sionable on one side than on the other, whether accidentally
or naturally, which fact gives rise to the saying that some
horses are nervous on the near side, and others on the off.
We may note that wall-eyed horses are always nervous.
It is often wrongly said of a horse that he is nervous, when
he is only fresh or green. It would be more correct to say
that he is in the air, that he wants to use his muscles and
extend himself, or, in other words, that he is in the position
of a child who, having been for a long time quiet, begins to
play and frisk about. In such cases punishment and caresses
are equally useless. What we ought to do is to give him
what he wants, namely, plenty of exercise. Send him along
for two or three miles, and after that he will be per-
fectly quiet.
There are certain horses which are restless by nature, and
are constantly on the alert to notice anything they may see or
hear. They are afraid of all sorts of imaginary things, they
make sudden starts at every moment, and are consequently
very disagreeable to ride. Give them lots of work to cool
them down and pats on the neck to give them confidence.
The number of the different kinds of nervous horses is so
large, that it is impossible to enumerate them all. There
are, however, certain ones which I would like to particularise.
Some are afraid of everything which goes past their head,
or everything which overlooks them, such as a carriage,
omnibus, a low bridge, or carriage entrance. All things of
that kind frighten them. People sa}' that these horses are
afraid of their heads being hurt. They are, however, abso-
lutel}- indifferent to things which are low.
Other horses are afraid only of things on the ground, such
i86 HORSES WITH VICES.
as shadows, rays of the sun, puddles, streams, and heaps
of stones. They pay no heed to things which are above
them.
There are also horses which are afraid only of things which
come behind them, such as children, dogs, horses, and
carriages. They seem afraid only of things which they do
not see.
My only advice about the management of nervous horses
is to give them confidence by " making much of them." If
we see in front of us an object which we know our horse will
be afraid of, we should not force him to go up to it. Better
let him at first go away from it, and then gently induce him
to approach it, without bullying him too much. Work him in
this way for several days, as long as may be necessary.
Never bring him so close up to the object in question that he
will escape or spin round ; because in this case we will be
obliged to punish him ; not for his fear, but on account of his
spinning round, which we should not tolerate at any time.
In punishing him, we will confuse in his mind the fear of
punishment and the fear caused by the object. In a word,
with nervous horses we should use much gentleness, great
patience, and no violence.
It now remains only to speak of horses which are wrongly
classed as nervous, which have all the appearance of fear, but
which are only vicious.
All horses are very fond of their stable, and are more lively
and impetuous when they are returning to it than when
leaving it. Those of whom I speak seem to have only the
idea of returning to their stable, and of seeking every occa-
sion of making a move to the rear, in the form of a spin
round. We see them stop at the most trifling object which
they meet, and then they wheel round sharply if the rider
shows the slightest hesitation. These horses, I repeat, are
not afraid ; they are vicious, and nothing I have said about
NERVOUS HORSES. 187
nervous horses applies to them. They have to be promptly-
brought back, and severely punished.
The proof that they are actuated only by vice is that,
when returning to their stable, they will treat with absolute
indifference the objects which caused them to spin round,
when going out.
If under these or any other conditions the horse shies, we
ought to steady him and bring him back by lateral effects.
If he shies to the right, the right snaffle rein ought to be
strongly carried to the left, and the right leg should be
vigorously applied. In other words, to correct a shy to the
right, we should apply two effects from right to left. By using
the left rein — which people usually have the bad habit of doing
— the rider will help the horse to throw to the right his
haunches, which his right leg will not be able to keep straight.
Further, if there is danger to the right, the horse may throw
himself unwittingly into it, because, having his head turned
to the left, he will not be able to see where it is. But the
right rein, when applied strongly to the neck, presses him to
the left, and aids the effect produced by the right leg, which
prevents the haunches from being carried to the right.
If the horse shies to the right, the rider is shifted to the
left. In such cases he keeps his seat in the saddle by the
strong pressure of the right leg, from which he obtains
safety.
Horses which spin round, almost always do so to one
particular side. If we have a mount which uses this mode of
defence, we should begin by finding out the side he turns to,
and by holding on that side a stick about eighteen inches
long. I do not like a whip for this purpose, for it is too
flexible ; and if, for instance, we use it on the left, its end may
bend and strike the right side, or, what is worse, may injure
the animal's eyes.
Immediately the horse turns his head to spin round, but
■i88 HORSES WITH VICES.
before he can do so, strike him sharply with the stick on that
side of the nose. I have never met a horse which has not
been quickly made obedient by this method of correction
when it has been applied with severity and precision. After
a few times the mere sight of the stick will be enough.*
I like to work alone without any help, not even that of a
groom. Those who do not believe this can easily verify my
statement. I have kept my horses at livery in several schools
and I have always broken them in these places. I have never
asked the help of any one at the maneges of Latry, Vincent,
'Quartero, or I'Etoile.
HORSES WHICH THROW THEIR HEADS ABOUT.
There are very few horsemen who have not had the trouble
and even the danger of riding animals which threw their heads
about. Some forcibly lower the head, and thus, so to speak,
* The most disagreeable animal I ever met was a stallion which was very-
restive and a fiend to bite.
As it is impossible to break a horse without the help of the legs and spurs, it
was necessary to find a means to make this horse bear their touch. The first
six weeks passed off fairly well, because I did not ask him to do much, but as
soon as I tried to get him in hand by means of the spurs, he tried to bite my
legs, threw himself violently on his knees, and in this position made desperate
efforts to catch hold of my feet ; and he had the best of the struggle, because I
was not able to use the spurs, on account of having to draw back my feet out of
the way of his teeth.
I then put on the snaffle reins two iron rods, fifteen or sixteen inches long.
Having thus put the animal in such position that he could not turn his head
round, and as my legs were then safe from his teeth, I felt sure of victory. But
this demon of a horse, being rendered furious by his feeling of powerlessness,
continued to throw himself on his knees, and being unable to bite my feet, bit
his own breast, which I thought he would stop doing on account of the pain.
■So far from that, he tore away strips of flesh from his breast, and I have no
■doubt that if he had unseated me, he would have devoured me. I then put on
him a very thick leather apron, which was in shreds in three days.
I succeeded, however, in mastering him by placing under his chin a kind of
half funnel made out of white metal. Being unable to bite, he soon dropped
that detestable habit, and I completed his education at No. 78 Avenue Malakoff,
in a place kept by the son of Mr. Gost, who w^as a horse dealer, and who more
■than once was present at these equine battles, which I fought singly as a rule.
HORSES WHICH RUN AWAY. 189
take a spring to raise it with greater violence. Others content
themselves with throwing the head sharply back, without
lowering it in the first instance. In the former case we should
catch the horse with the snaffle reins (which are held in the
right hand) at the e.xact moment when he begins to lower it.
On account of the shock he will quickly raise his head, at
which instant we should drive him forward by a strong
pressure of the legs. The curb reins are loose, but are firmlj'^
held in the left hand in such a way that the moment when;
the horse, by raising his head, tightens the curb reins, he will
receive a severe blow on the bars of the mouth. Therefore he-
has been stopped by the snaffle when he wished to lower his
head in order to get his impulse, and has been punished hy
the curb when, in throwing up his head, he brought it too-
far back. When he thus throws back his head without ob-
taining an impulse, we should drive him forward with a pres-
sure of the legs the moment he raises his head, and should
receive him on the curb, under the same conditions as those
first mentioned.
To sum up, we make in the first case three movements of
the snaffle, legs and curb. In the second, we use only the
legs and the curb. Although these movements are successive,
they follow each other so closely that they almost unite into
a single one. In both cases, if the action of the legs does not
precede by ever so little that of the curb, we shall run the
risk of making the horse rear, or at least by crushing the hind
quarters we make him get behind his bit.
HORSES WHICH RUN AWAY.
I have always been fairly lucky, both as regards my pupils
and myself, in avoiding accidents from run-aways. My good
luck was not altogether a matter of chance.
When a horse is running away, he will not listen to reason,
and I do not think any one rider would be able to stop him
I90 HORSES WITH VICES.
much better than another ; but we can do a good deal to stop
him from running away. Here the real knack consists in
prevention, and therefore the watchful horseman will never
let his animal get out of hand. Immediately he feels that
the horse is ready to break away, he will steady him and
calm him down by the voice and pats on the neck.
A horse often runs away because the bars of his mouth
have become insensible on account of the rider pulling at him,
which in this case is like pulling at a wall, and consequently
the horse can bolt when he likes.
To keep the mouth fresh, the rider ought to use the snaffle
and curb alternately ; that is to say, he should not let the
animal take a bearing on either reins.
Some horses run away with their heads high, others bring
the chin into the breast. We should always try to lower the
heads of the former with the curb, and to raise those of the
latter with the snaffle.
If the horse succeeds in bringing the head so low down
and in rounding the neck so much that the cheeks of the
curb are in contact with the breast, the more the rider
pulls at the curb reins, the less will the bit act on the mouth,*
and the more will he maintain the wrong position of his
head and neck. The only thing he has to do in this case
is to saw the snaffle.
With horses which get the chin into the chest it is well to
use a gag snaffle, which acts upwards instead of backwards.
It is also useful with a horse that has a heavy head and
neck, which such an animal always tries to make his rider
carry. Of course I offer this advice only to those who do not
know how to balance their horses.
A horse is often said to run away when in reality he is only
carrying away his rider.
* By pulling on the cheeks of the curb, we fix them against the breast and cause
the mouthpiece to shift upwards in the mouth, which action relieves the bars.
HORSES WHICH RUN AWAY. 191
A horse that runs away is a maddened horse which does
not answer to the aids, and which cannot be guided.
A horse that carries away his rider is an old rascal who
gets excited by a gallop, and who bolts whenever he gets out
of hand. Although we cannot stop him, we can guide him.
He takes care to avoid obstacles that are in his path ; but the
run-away gallops with his head dow^i, his eyes are injected
with blood, and he will dash himself to pieces against anything
he meets.
A horse can carry his man away at all paces. I have seen
an animal do it even at a walk. Such horses pull without
ceasing, they make a half rear when the rider tries to stop
them, and when they have completely tired him out, they
carry him off. We should therefore take care never to allow
them to get out of hand. If they succeed in catching the
rider unawares and carrying him off, he should simply guide
them into some open space.
The first thing which the rider should do, is to separate his
reins. By sawing the snaffle, by the alternative effects of the
snaffle and curb, and by loosening the jaw, he can succeed
little by little in changing the pace, putting the horse on his
hind quarters, and consequently mastering him.
Above all things we should take care to manipulate the
reins in a uniform manner. Giving and taking is the invari-
able principle, and the legs ought always to remain close to the
sides of the animal. On these occasions the majority of riders
think that they gain strength by making a " triangle " with
their legs stuck out in front, in which case the horse will
always be stronger than the man.
Many horses which have been raced, try to go off * with
their rider, cither at the trot or canter. To accomplish this
* Many old race horses try to carry off their rider when he turns them round,
because on race courses, horses start on being turned round. We should be on the
look out with such animals.
192 HORSES WITH VICES.
they stretch out the neck and forcibly lower the head. If the
rider pulls sharply at the reins, the horse will probably drag-
him out of the saddle on to his neck by throwing his head
down. We should " give " to the horse by bringing the hands
forward without letting the reins slip through the fingers, then
rather vigorously raise the neck, take up the snaffle and curb,
and use the legs as soon as the neck has been straightened.
When a horse is really running away, the reins should be
used in the same manner as when he is carrying off his rider,
but the difficulty is much greater, because it is almost im-
possible to guide him. If we have a plain in front of us we
may succeed, even in this case, in turning the horse to
the right or to the left. To do this, supposing the reins are
separated, as they ought to be, we should let go one of the
reins, take hold of the other with both hands, pull with all the
weight of the body, so as to produce a more or less decided
lateral flexion, which will certainly turn the horse out of his
course.
If the rider of a run-away horse finds himself alongside a
stream, he ought to force the animal into it. There is danger
in everything on land, whether we meet a fence or get a fall on
level ground ; but in water there is no danger, and a bath
makes us quits. The only thing to avoid is a perpendicular
bank. The majority of horses will stop as soon as the water
comes up to their breast, and they will become perfectly quiet.
Others strike the water with their fore feet, give themselves up
to disordered movements, but always finish by becoming quiet
in a short time.
In order to correct run-aways, I have often let them gallop
as fast as they could along the low banks of a river, and when
they were in full swing I sent them into the water, which I was
able to do very easily.
Any horse which has been properly rassembL'^d can neither
run away nor carry his rider away, because the use of the
HORSES WHICH RUN AWAY. 195
spurs, by bringing the hocks under the body, raises and
lightens the forehand, and consequently the animal can be
easily stopped.
While riding with my pupils I have often asked them what
would they do if a run-away horse came up to them either
from the front or the rear ? I have also often asked persons
who have ridden horses all their lives the same question, but I
have rarely received a satisfactory answer, although this con-
tingency ought always to be provided against. We should bear
in mind that a man on a run-away horse generally runs less
danger than the riders who are in his road. We often see a
run-away animal dash into a group of horses with his head
down. To avoid him we must get behind the first obstacle.
If we are in a forest we should get into some bushes, and
will then escape with a few scratches. If we are on a road we
should get behind a tree ; if in a street, behind a lamp post.
In fact, anything will serve to shield us from the terrible
shock. Above all things we should move as quickly as
we can.
If in place of getting out of the way, we wish to help a man
on a run-away horse, which is a praiseworthy but very difficult
attempt, we should gallop at full speed in the direction he is
going, while keeping a few yards in front of him. We ought
to speak in a loud tone of voice and try to give the rider con-
fidence. We should then slightly slacken speed, and as the
run-away passes alongside of us, we should try to catch hold
of his curb reins as near as possible to the mouth, and en-
deavour to stop him little by little.
If we do not gallop in front of the run-away nearly as fast
as he is going, the jerk we will receive at the moment we catch
the reins may throw us out of the saddle. As we ought to
have one hand free, we should hold our reins in the other
hand, so as to be able to control and guide our mount.
I may add that it is almost impossible to stop a run-away
13
194 HORSES WITH VICES.
while going on a straight line. I have never succeeded in this.
If the amount of open space and the nature of the ground
allows us to do so, we should at first take a very large circle,
and should decrease it little by little. We should of
course place ourselves on the inside of the circle, so as to be
able to pull the run-away in the direction we are taking.
If we are on the outside we will not be able to make him
turn. It is evident that we cannot employ this means of
stopping a run-away unless we are sure of our horse and
ourselves.
I was lucky to stop two mad run-aways in the manner I
have just described. The first one was at Havre, and his rider
had let go the reins and had caught hold of the pommel of the
saddle with both hands. The second was in the Bois at Paris,
and was ridden by a young girl. In both cases, it took me
from fifteen to twenty minutes to stop the horses. As I was
on thoroughbreds, I had strength and speed at my disposal.
With respect to the lady, I took the precaution to place
myself on her off side, for her legs would have been in the
way on the other side.
195
CHAPTER IV.
JUMPLVG.
It is generally said that to make a horse jump, the hands
should be raised the moment he comes to the fence ; but in
acting thus his natural powers are hampered and he is
prevented from jumping freely.
In order to jump, he should have his head and neck
perfectly free, because if they are raised by the hands their
freedom and spring will be spoiled, and the weight will be
thrown on the hind quarters. Consequently, if he has a light
mouth he will pull up in front of the fence, and if he has a
hard mouth he will get the better of his rider, in which case
he can only make a half-rear, and consequently his fore legs
will clear the obstacle and his hind legs will catch in it.
Hence, while driving him forward with the legs, we pull him
back with the reins. The forehand can get the better of the
curb, but only by an effort which will considerably tire the
horse.
There is a general theory for making horses jump, but we
can quickly see that, in practice, each horse has his own
particular way of leaping. In my opinion, the best way to
teach a horse to jump is at first to place a log of wood on the
ground, and lead him over it at the walk. When he .obeys,
he should be patted on the neck and have some carrots, so as
to gain his confidence. This will be an affair of only two or
13*
196 JUMPING.
three lessons of about ten minutes' duration. When he has
full confidence, we may lunge him over the log, while
gradually getting further and further away from him. As
soon as he will walk over the bar, while the breaker stands in
the middle of the school, the bar can be raised from 12 to 16
inches, and the horse left to jump it in his own way. The
chief thing is that he clears it. This plan of accustoming a
horse to a fence, has been practised in circuses from time
immemorial.
A horse which likes jumping will generally rush, and
should be calmed down, so that he may take the leap quietly.
If, on the contrary, he stops or hesitates, he should be
encouraged by the voice and should be shown the driving
whip, but should not be struck with it, or frightened at
starting. We should, however, make him go over the bar,
and should carefully note how he jumps. The best fencers
jump straight, freely, and without pausing. Some leap
" stickily," and others jump sideways. Horses which jump
freely and of their own accord need only be taught to
clear the fence, successively, at the walk, trot and canter.
Horses which make a half halt when coming up to the
obstacle, should be stimulated by the driving whip until they
have lost the habit of stopping. Consequently, we should not
let them jump at the walk and trot, until they will freely do
so, at the canter.
Things are not much more complicated with horses that
jump sideways, and we have only to oppose their shoulders to
their haunches. If, for instance, we are on the left hand, and
the horse throws his hind quarters to the left, and con-
sequently to the inside, we should pull the lunging rein, in
order to bring his shoulders to the left, and at the same time
we should touch the left haunch with the lash of the whip, to
send the hind quarters to the right. If, on the contrary, the
horse brings his haunches to the right, that is to say, to the
JUMPING. 197
outside, we should let out the lunging rein, and at the moment
the animal is taking off, we should make him carry his
shoulders to the right, by threatening him with the whip under
the muzzle.
The bar should be kept very low for this work, and should
be raised only little by little, according to the strength and
cleverness of the horse.
We should take great care never to raise the bar so high
as to require the animal to make a great effort to clear it,
especially if he is young. Although this would not be so bad
with old horses, we should do all we can not to discourage
them.
As soon as the horse jumps freely with the lunge, he can be
mounted, and made to follow the same programme, while
beginning with the bar on the ground.
At first, we should not trouble about the animal's style of
jumping, but should let him fence in his own way, and should
study it.
In leaping, as in every other exercise which demands great
energy on the part of the horse, the rider should take account
of the natural capabilities of his mount, and should adapt
himself to them. If they require to be set right, he should
gradually do it later on.
I have said that the hands should make no effort to raise
the horse when taking off. I repeat that the head and neck
should be perfectly free, but I do not say that the reins should
be let go ; because the horse, when he is jumping, ought to
maintain on the hands a light bearing,* which he does not take
at the moment of raising himself, because he has had it when
coming up to the fence ; in fact, he merely preserves it. The
elasticity of the hands and even of the arms of the rider
allows him to keep up this bearing on the bit, without
* It is an absolute rule in riding that the hands ought always to remain in com-
munication with the mouth.
198 JUMPING.
increasing it. It is better for him to diminish it a little, when
the horse extends his head and neck to jump. In other words,,
the horse, not the rider, takes this bearing.
Some horses jump best if they have a good hold of the bit,
when coming up to the fence, especially if they are going fast.
Others require to be ridden with a slack rein, so that they may
take the necessary spring. Nevertheless, in order to be certain
that a horse will jump, we should firmly close our legs and feel
his mouth, for otherwise he can very easily refuse. It is of
course understood that the reins should be slackened a little,
the moment he is taldng off If the reins are slackened too
much, he will often jump stickily or refuse, and if we slacken
the reins too late, we will prevent him jumping, or will hamper
his movements.
The hands, therefore, ought to do three things: — i. Support
the horse up to the moment he takes off. 2. Give him his
head during the time he is clearing the obstacle. 3. Feel the
snaffle,* so that we may lightly get him into hand the
moment he lands.
The legs of the rider ought to support the horse during the
whole time — namely : i. Before leaping, so as to press him
up and make him jump. 2. During the leap, in order to-
make him get his hind legs under him, so that he may not
hit the fence. 3. x'\fter the leap, in order to support the hind
legs when they come down and relieve the fore legs. Finally,
when the legs are thus supported they will keep the rider in a
good position.
The pluck and confidence of the rider plays a large part
in jumping. If he comes up to the fence without having
decided to clear it, the chances are that he will remain on
this side of it.
It is said that the horse understands the feelings of the
* I use only the snaffle when jumping, and I employ this curb only tO'
regulate the speed between the fences.
JUMPING.
199
rider. This is not quite true, because it is evident that the
animal cannot know what is in the mind of the man on his
back ; but he can feel that the " aids," like the will of the
rider, are hesitating.
To make the horse resolute we should, in the first instance,
be resolute ourselves. If our pluck gives way, our " aids " will
be vacillating ; but if we harden our heart, we will transmit
Fig. 46. — Clearing a fence.
confidence to the horse by means of the " aids," which, in
this case, should act with vigour and precision.
The rider who goes up to a fence for the first time, usually
imagines that he will receive a terrible shock. As a rule, he
instinctively stiffens himself so as not to be displaced, and
when he falls off, the accident is generally due to this
stiffness.
As I have already said, we should give with the hands at
200
JUMPING.
the exact moment when the horse raises himself, and should
preserve his suppleness by a stronger pressure of the legs.
In this way the shock and displacement of the seat are only
trifling.
I have said that all horses do not jump in the same way.
With those which raise themselves well with all four feet, and
Fig. 47. — Horse raising his forehand a good deal when jumping.
clear the fence while keeping the body nearly horizontal, the
rider has only to keep his body in a perpendicular position
(Fig. 46).
If the horse, when jumping, raises his forehand a great
deal, as in a half-rear (Fig. 47), the rider ought to pro-
portionately lean forward at the moment when the horse
raises himself; but as the horse comes down, he should bring
his body back, for three reasons : First, not to be thrown
JUMPING.
201
forward by the propulsion given by the horse ; second, to
hghten the forehand, which, on coming to the ground, will
have to bear all the weight of both horse and rider ; and,
third, to keep his seat and support his horse in case the
animal's forelegs give way.
When a horse brushes a fence with his forelegs, and raises
Fig. 48. — Horse raising his croup when clearing a fence.
his croup as if he were kicking,* we should carry the body
back the moment'the forehand is raised as high as the fence,
so as to avoid putting weight on the forehand. When the
fence has been cleared, the body will be put back in its place
by the force of propulsion.
I cannot too strongly impress on my readers that in all the
* See Fig. 48 : — If the reins were drawn tighter, this illustration would serve
equally well to show the position of a rider who is about to receive his horse
after a jump.
202 JUMPING.
backward movements of the body during the leap, the arms,
should preserve the greatest possible elasticity, so that the
tension of the reins may be in no way increased, and that the
horse may jump freely. If the reins are too short, we should
let them slip through the fingers, and should take them up
again as soon as the animal lands.
I am naturally led to say a word about steeplechases and
hurdle races. The ignorance on the part of jockeys about
the paces of horses is inconceivable. Very few of them can
tell with which leg a horse is leading in the gallop. Baron
Finot, who is a master, astonished me one day by saying :
" Jockeys ride by instinct, and do not take the trouble to
think."
In hurdle racing a horse clears the hurdles, thanks to his
enormous momentum, and the harder he pulls the better
pleased is his jockey. In France, steeplechases are ridden at
the same speed as hurdle races, which at first sight appears
dangerous. I have spoken to many jockeys on this subject,
and they have all told me that the faster the speed the less
danger there is for them. This seems a paradox, but it is
really true. Their reason is that if a horse which is going at
a moderate speed strikes a fence and comes down, the horse
will nearly always fall on the jockey, in which case the result
will be very serious, if not actually fatal. But if a similar fall
occurs when the horse is at full speed, the jockey is thrown a
few yards to the front, and generally escapes being hurt. In
such a case the jockey rolls like a ball, huddles himself up,
takes care not to stretch out an arm or leg, and thus nearly
always gets off with only a few bruises.
In England, a steeplechase jockey slackens his pace when he
gets near a fence, and thus husbands the horse's strength, and
allows him to more accurately measure his distance. Horse
and man thus act in harmony.
The French system is more break-neck, and requires less.
JUMPING. 203
knowledge, but it can help to win a race. The English system
is a matter of good horsemanship, but we must admit that the
French system has more chances of success if the horse does
not fall.
In my opinion, the jockeys Hatchet and H. Andrews are
brilliant exceptions respecting the way steeplechases are
generally ridden. Hatchet has a very remarkable method
of riding over fences, and I always follow him with great
pleasure, because his style bears out the theory which I am
never tired of maintaining — namely, that there is only one
way of riding. There is only one kind which is always good
on the racecourse as well as for hacking, and without it success
is either pure luck or mere knack.
To see Hatchet ride a steeplechase is a great treat for a
connoisseur. He remains glued to the saddle, and daylight is
never seen between him and it. On coming up to a fence he
does not lean back, for he knows that the impetus of the hind
quarters would throw him forward. He gets well down into
the saddle and rounds his back so as to keep his seat and
suppleness. He holds his hands low, his arms half-extended,
and the reins just sufficiently felt to keep him in constant
communication with the mouth of the horse. He evidently
yields his fingers at the same time as he does his arms,
because he is never pulled forward at the moment when the
horse stretches out his head and neck to jump. He keeps a
nice feeling on the reins — more by the play of the fingers than
by that of the arms — even during the wild speed of a race,
which is a fact that few sportsmen will admit. Also, he keeps
his position before, during, and after a jump. With him there
is not the slightest shock ; everything is smooth and perfect.
I often hear people say on racecourses that if a horse is
going to fall, nothing will prevent him, but we can deceive
ourselves. It is evident that if an animal makes a mistake
and fails, he will fall ; but what I want to say is that a mistake
•204 JUMPING.
which will not happen with one jockey will occur with another
jockey. A horse's fall is very often due to the man who rides
him. I mention the following instance of this because it is
conclusive : —
In one season at Auteuil, Hatchet won nine races out of
eleven on Baudres, and the horse fell in the two races he lost.
For personal motives, another jockey of very high reputation
was put on Baudres, who, in seven races, fell four times and
lost each of these four events. After that Hatchet won ten
consecutive races on Baudres without a fall. Thus, Baudres
fell four times out of seven with a good jockey, and fell only
twice out of twenty-one races with a jockey whom I con-
sider to be exceptionally good. A remarkable fact which
perhaps will help the reader to remember what I have said,
is that all these falls occurred at the brook in front of the
stands.*
Hatchet has a particular way of his own in taking the last
turn on the Auteuil racecourse, which is on the left of the
stands, and is very sharp. He takes it very short, and
slackens his speed to a marked extent. The others keep up
the speed, and are consequently obliged to take a wide turn.
Although the difference between the two methods may appear
to be of no matter, it is of great importance. As Hatchet
turns very short, he loses no ground, although he slackens
speed, because he has less space to cover ; and as he thus
allows his horse to recover his wind, he is able, in the straight
run home, to get out of his animal a last and supreme effort,
which the others cannot obtain, because they kept up full
speed the whole time.
We should not forget that in such cases, horses win races
* In that fence there was nothing to catch a horse's legs. To clear it, like all
other wide jumps, the only thing that was required was plenty of impulse.
Seeing Baudres change his leg a few yards from this fence on account of the
jockey trying to raise his head, I said to his owner : " Your horse is going to
fall." In fact, the impulse was stopped and the fall came off.
JUMPING. 205
not with their legs but with their lungs, namely, by being able
to stay.
I have lately mentioned the name of H. Andrews, which
was a pleasure I could not resist, when finishing the des-
cription of the particular qualities which make him unrivalled.
Any one who has not seen Andrews finishing, can have no
idea of the enormous energy he possesses. I have seen him,
on losing his whip, take his cap to flog his horse ; and then
losing his cap, he used his right arm and hand with the utmost
vigour and perseverance. It is no exaggeration to say that when
coming up to the winning-post, he communicates energy to
his horse, and shoves him in front in a particular way of his.
own, without the slightest slackening off.
206
CHAPTER V.
FLAT RACING.
I HAD occasion to say, that in all exercises, the ordinary
horseman, riding master or jockey should know what he ought
to require from his horse. It is generally but wrongly
thought that this rule does not hold good with respect to flat
racing, at which the most successful jockeys are those who
best conform to it.
In a flat race, when all the horses are on about the same
level, as regards speed and staying power, the jockey who
can set the pace in his own way will have the best chance,
and consequently his success will depend on his knowledge of
his animal's capabilities. He will give him the exact support
which is necessary, and will put him at the speed to which he
has been accustomed towards the end of his training ; will
maintain it during the race, and will reserve his supreme
effort for the finish.
As the horse has not been over-ridden during the race,
he can easily, at the finish, make the last rush, upon which
success almost always depends. I can easily prove this
fact by the case of Archiduc, whom everyone remembers.
On three consecutive occasions, Archiduc took the lead
at a pace which suited him, and no horse was able to get
near him. In the Chantilly Derby, however, Fra Diavolo
tried to take the lead. These two struggled for supremacy.
FLAT RACING. 207
and were at the top of their speed before a quarter of
the distance had been covered. The jockey of Little
Duck, who was behind, did not trouble about the others,
but judged his own pace for three-quarters of the course,
and thus saved his animal's powers for the last moment,
at which time he suddenly sat down and rode, passed the
others, who had not an effort left in them, and won easily.
The jockey of Little Duck simply put into practice the
rule which I have specified. In a word, he knew how to
keep something for a rainy day, which in this case was
a reserve of energy to be used at the finish.
The greatest difficulty for a jockey who is leading, is to
judge the pace, and to know how fast his horse ought to go.*
If he goes beyond this speed, he will take the wind out of his
horse, and will be unable to make a last rush. If he keeps
back, he will necessarily do so by taking too strong a hold of
the reins, and will consequently tire the horse's loins and
hocks. But it is the loins and hocks which win a race at the
finish.
The best jockeys win at the last moment, and as near the
winning-post as possible. Their perfect knowledge of pace
enables them to judge if their opponents can keep up the
speed at which they are going, and to feel if they can increase
their own speed. At Chantilly, I saw Watts on Louis d'Or
apply this principle in a very clever and lucky manner. It
was a welter race, and all of them carried I2st. 81b. Atalante
was the favourite, and was certainly the best made to carry
weight.
In this two-mile race, Watts let Louis d'Or go his own pace,
and did not try to catch up the others. Although he was two
hundred yards behind at the beginning, he did not increase his
speed. The others having gone too fast, were obliged to
* Such judgment is extremely difficult with a speed of about eleven hundred
yards in a minute.
2o8 FLAT RACING.
slacken speed, but he maintained the same pace and beat the
favourite by a few yards. We can say with confidence that
he won this race by his knowledge of pace.
Fred, Archer gave a grand performance by winning the
Grand Prix of Paris on Paradox. He did not fail for an
instant in fine horsemanship, coolness and cleverness. At
first he remained behind his field, but towards the end he
drew up alongside Reluisant, who had won the Chantilly
Derby, and was his only formidable opponent. He stuck
close to him, and although he saw that Reluisant could go
no faster, he kept with him until close to the winning-
post, and then won by a neck. This victory shows us only
a part of Archer's talent. The thing which was best about
him and which made him a great master, was his seat.
He sat well into the saddle, and rode with long stirrups.
When he raised himself on his stirrups, his seat grazed the
saddle.
His seat had no resemblance to the strange, if not ridiculous
position which many jockeys adopt, and which some of them
exaggerate to such a degree that we could place a hat between
them and the saddle.* Archer always sat like a horseman,
with his horse enclosed between his hands and legs.
In short distance races, he was unjustly said to be tricky at
getting off first. At the moment when the starter lowers his
flag, the majority of jockeys are content to slacken the reins
and let the horses go off as they like or as they can. Archer
left nothing to chance, and he ruled his horse like the true
horseman that he was. Having always his legs close to the
horse's sides, he surprised the animal at the moment of
starting by a vigorous pressure of the legs, and instantly put
* Jockeys, of whom the majority sit badly, do not now ride in a " triangle,"
as people formerly said, with the reins, saddle and stirrups as their three points
of support. If this style has left the turf, it is still unfortunately employed in
hacking.
FLAT RACING. 209
him on his feet before the others could get on theirs. He
was therefore going fast before his opponents were out of a
canter.
We see by these examples that all kinds of riding resemble
each other. The science of equitation is as necessary to a
jockey as to any one else, and consists of judgment, hands
and leg's.
M
210
CHAPTER VI.
THE HUNTER.
Although a hunter need not be of any particular breed, he
should be chosen from the best horses. My advice to a man
who wants to hunt is to select a horse which has been born,
reared and trained in the country where the hunting is to take
place. Horses, like men, have natural capabilities which
correspond to the climate and nature of their native land. If
they are sent elsewhere they will lose these qualities, without
being able to acquire those of the animals which were born in
the place.
Let us take for instance the small horse of the Pyrennees,
which has marvellous qualities. In his own country he is
clever, active, very sure-footed and temperate, and in the
country about Pau he makes a first-rate hunter ; but if he is
taken to Rome or Vendee he will lose some of his good
qualities. It is the same with all other breeds of horses.
Therefore, for hunting, take a horse of the country. The
English hunter is the only animal which is good in all
countries, and which preserves his good qualities, no matter
what is the nature of the sport. He combines almost all the
desirable points. He is nearly thorough-bred, although his
shape and make are not what we would look for in a race
horse, vi^hich has plenty of daylight under him. The hunter
THE HUNTER. 211
is closer to the ground, and should be particularly good about
the loins and hocks.*
His breaking begins later than that of the thorough-bred.
He is taken up at about three-and-a-half years old, and
requires a year or eighteen months to learn his work."!"
In judging him, we should specially consider his style of
jumping different fences, and the pace at which he takes them.
If the obstacle is a hedge, he should take it quietly, on account
of the small effort required to clear it. If it is high and stiff
he should collect himself for a big effort, and should go very
straight and steadily at it. If it is a fairly wide stream, the
pace should be quite different, and the head and neck, which
should not be hampered by the hands, should be extended.
The horse should stretch himself out, should take a light but
very free bearing on the hands, and jump at full speed with
freedom and pleasure.
The only fault an English hunter has, is that he costs a
great deal of money. Usually one pa}'s about three hundred
pounds for a good animal of this sort ; but in exceptional
cases, the price may be five or six hundred. I repeat that this
kind of horse is the only animal which is fit to hunt anywhere.
In every country, except in England, it is generally thought
that as accidents are very common in hunting, only cheap
horses should be used for this work. All my readers know
from experience that in buying a horse, they cannot be sure
of getting value for their money. Therefore I think it very
foolish to practise economy when buying a hunter. The
English, who are very practical, and who know the value of
* The hunter is the only horse they have not tried to produce in France. This
is to be regretted, because breeders would have succeeded with him, as with other
horses. Frenchmen make the mistake of wanting cheap hunters.
I' His work is simply jumping, and he never fetches a high price, unless he is
a free goer, very sure-footed and a big jumper. The long training which he
requires is the cause of his high market value. Ordinary jumpers are ready at
from three-and-a-half to four years old.
14*
212 THE HUNTER.
money, are economical in the purchase of harness horses ; but
price does not stop them when buying a hunter, to whom they
will have to trust their life.
We often hear it said that Mr. X is fortunate with all his
horses, and that Mr. Y, being out of luck, cannot place his
hand on a good animal. We may be certain that chance has
not much to say in this matter. The fact that Mr. X has
often good horses is perhaps due to his understanding their
powers and working them with good judgment. If Mr. Y
has only bad horses, notwithstanding the long prices he gives,
it is perhaps because he is an indifferent rider who does not
understand horses, and is ignorant of what he ought to require
from a horse and of the manner he ought to require it,
I do not hesitate to recommend those who will take my
humble advice, to get the best and strongest horse they can
for hunting.
The English say that hacking is an art,* and hunting is.
pluck. In my opinion this proverb is absolutely correct.
Without doubt pluck is required more with hounds than when
hacking, because the speed is greater, and the fences are un-
known. Nevertheless, pluck cannot replace the science of
riding, which is even more necessary when crossing a country
than when hacking, because the risks are greater and more
frequent.
To hunt, as well as to hack or ride races, it is necessary to
know how to ride.
* I must say that I have always seen more hacking than art in Rotten Row.
213
I
CHAPTER VII.
THE ARMY HORSE.*
My intention was to discuss in this book all kinds of riding,
but up to the present I have spoken only of hacking, riding for
sport, and breaking.
The saddle horse is not only destined for sport, and riding is
not merely a luxury. At the present time the horse is an
essential element of the military power of a country. He is a
warlike arm which it is necessary to choose, prepare, and
manage.
Late wars have proved that cavalry are required to play a
decisive part in military operations. In every country, this
branch of the service has been increased in number and
strength. Recently pamphlets, leading articles of newspapers,
and reviews have shown the great attention with which the
public has studied the subject.
I trust I may be permitted, or at least pardoned for saying
a few words about the war horse.f
* I hope that my readers will excuse the liberty and freedom of my criticisms,
on account of my absolute conviction that they are only too well founded. Be-
sides, I believe that many persons who have special knowledge about
these things, would willingly agree with the majority of my observations, if they
had liVjerty of speech.
t In my opinion, the half bred is the best animal for war. In this I am not
contradicting myself, although I said at the beginning of this book, that I pre-
ferred the thorough-bred to all others. He has energy and cleverness which is
rarely found to the same extent in other horses ; but these qualities are not the
only desirable ones in an army horse. The thorough-bred will perhaps stand
214 THE ARMY HORSE.
The troop horse, which is the constitutive element of the
cavalry, ought to have certain qualities, of which the principal
are soundness and hardiness. With him it is not a question of
fine handling or scientific movements. He has to carry his
man safely and for a long distance, and by the strength of his
constitution he has to bear fatigue and all the miseries of a
campaign.
Also, he must not cost too much, because money is the chief
sinew of war, despite progress and innovations.
A horse does not cost merely the sum paid to his owner, to
which has to be added all the money spent on him from, the
day of his purchase to the time he is really fit for work. A
horse bought for forty pounds, which has to be looked after
and fed for a year at a remount depot, before being sent to his
regiment, will really cost eighty pounds up to the day he takes
his place in the ranks.
I have not the presumption to discuss financial and military
questions, which are entirely beyond my province. I reason
only as a horseman. I say with respect to remounts, that we
should consider their necessary qualifications and net cost at
the same time. If I occupied myself with their qualifications
without touching on the subject of price, my theory might
appear useless, but I have the one firm ambition to give only
practical advice.
We all know how horses are bought for the army. Remount
fatigue better than any other. In a charge he has marvellous and incomparable
dash ; but how will he bear all the privations and miseries of a campaign ?
In the Crimea, the English lost the majority of their thorough-breds, but the
Normans, Percherons, Bretons and Auvergnans held out admirably. The war
horse ought to remain serviceable under conditions of hunger, cold, rain, snow
and nights without shelter or covering. I do not think that the thorough-bred is
capable of this form of endurance.
A breed which has not been hardened may yield capital horses for ordinary work,
but they will not be hardy and enduring enough for warfare.
To make use of a thoroughbred, one must know more than ordinary cavalry-
men do about riding.
THE ARMY HORSE. 215
officers go to the different breeding centres, examine the horses
from three to four years' old, and make purchases. These
visits are necessarily foreseen. Dealers of all nationalities, and
especially foreigners, take the precaution to come prior to the
arrival of the remount officers, and buy the best they can
find, which is easy for them, because they give a better price.
The remount people choose the best of what is left. These
horses, which are considered too young for any work, are sent
to the remount depots, where they are kept until they are five
years old. Sometimes they are put out to grass with farmers
at a moderate cost.
I set aside all details to arrive at the principal point, namely,
the age at which remounts should be bought ; taking for
granted that they are not fit for work until five years old.*
Only at that age they are begun to be exercised and are put
to more or less appropriate regular work, in other words, they
are broken in. This system is a tradition and a principle ;
but at the risk of running against all accepted ideas, I say
that the tradition is an error, the principle false and the
system bad.
It is a loss of precious time to keep a horse until he is five
years old before exercising, breaking and training him for
military purposes. Besides, this delay doubles his first cost
and deteriorates his physical organs, which suffer atrophy, on
account of insufficient feeding and work.
At three years and a half, a well-shaped horsef which has
* Technically, the horses are five years old, because they take their age from
the first of January ; but really they are only four years and nine months,
because they are born in the spring. They go to their regiments in the first
half of the October of their fourth year, and are then four years and six months old.
They are put in the squadron of the depot to have the rough edge taken off
them, and are accustomed to the stable, saddle, weight of a man, and external
objects. In the first half of January, that is to say, when they are four years
and nine months old, they are sent to their respective regiments, and their
breaking commences.
1 1 mean a French horse, from whatever part he may come.
2i6 THE ARMY HORSE.
been properly fed and exercised, is sufficiently developed and
strong to bear the gradual work which precedes and
facilitates breaking. By the age of four years he could be
properly broken and rendered fit for military service, after a
few months of which work, his training is complete, and he
has the strength and endurance that are pre-eminently neces-
sary in an arm)^ horse.
If we wish to discard routine, and to adopt a system of
liberal feeding and rational breaking, we will obtain a troop
horse which, at four and a half years, will be worth as much
or more than the six-\'ear old horse, after he has been
broken.
Whence comes the deeply-rooted idea that a horse cannot
be used in the army before he is five years old ? How is it
that many eminent remount officers have perpetuated this
principle ? I suppose that, having ascertained that the five-
year old horses the}' procured were weak and undeveloped,
they concluded that it would have been impossible to work
them earlier. They were content with the fact, but did not
try to find out the cause.
Nevertheless it has been long and repeatedly proved that a
three-year old horse, which has been well fed and well
exercised, can do ver}- hard work, and maintain a high rate
of speed.*
''*■ If the objection is made that some (not many) of the animals may suffer, I
answer that I propose that only horses three years and six months and even
three years and nine months old should be broken, in which case they will have a
preparation of three months. Also, I would not require from them such
severe work as similarly bred animals which race, have to do, and which are
trained at two-and-a-half years old at the latest.
Another objection it made about the great difference between the weights
carried by a race horse and troop horse ; but the latter is a year older than the
former, and his stronger build enables him to carry weight better. He is hardier,
he carries his full weight only on exceptional occasions, and his work is much
slower. If we go on gradually, as is done with race horses, we shall succeed
without any difficulty in developing his weight-carrying power.
To the pure theorists who wish to wait for the complete ossification of the
THE ARMY HORSE. 217
Let us take as an example the numerous half-bred horses of
Normandy. They are supposed to be the least precocious of
all the horses produced in France, and it is generally admitted
that they cannot be got ready much earlier than six years old.
Norman breeders naturally class their colts, at first, accord-
ing to their origin, and afterwards by their make and shape.
The young animals are put into the three following
■classes : —
1. Match trotters.
2. Horses for fashionable purposes* and for trade work.
3. Remounts.
Trotters begin to be gradually exercised and trained at two
years old, or at two and a half at latest. They are generally
full grown at three, are in good form and compete in races.
The best trotting prizes are reserved for three-year olds.
They can actually trot a distance of two miles and a half in
.about six minutes and a half. The distance is often over
three miles, to successfully cover which the trotter requires
speed and staying power. During his training, and during
the time he is racing, he has to undergo the severest exertion
of which a horse is capable, "f*
A horse for fashionable purposes, which is intended for a
■dealer who can pa)^ a good price for him, is almost a foal at
cartilages before putting a horse into work, I reply by advising them to buy five-
-and-a-half year old horses, so as to have them ready at six. They will tell me
that such animals cannot be found. Why ? Because trade gives them to the
buyer at a much earlier age. Therefore the universal practice is to work them at
,an earlier age. Q. E. D. The four year old should, of course, be treated with
care. Here the important thing is to prove that at that age he is fit for work.
* This class comprises horses which had been intended to act as stallions in
studs, but as they did not fulfil the expectations of their owners, they were
■cut and used for commercial purposes.
t It is interesting to note that half-bred trotters stand racing better than
thorough-breds.
Thorough-breds "click" ("forge ") when running or when being trained, far
more frequently than half-breds.
2i8 THE ARMY HORSE.
three years old. His growth is incomplete, his body slender,
he is soft, and he ought not to be worked. He approaches
his full height, puts on muscle, and becomes capable of
moderate work only when he is rising four, or is four off ; and
we then find him in the hands of the dealer, fat, glossy, and
ready for the purchaser who is in no hurry and who does not
want much from him. The same remarks may be made about
the commercial horse, who differs from the fashionable one
only as regards price.
The three-year-old remount is of no value. He is generally
fat, at from three to four years old, when he is shown to the
purchasing officer. A few feeds of oats at the last moment,
the whip, and ginger, give him an appearance of strength \
but in reality his muscles are weak, and he has neither good
paces nor staying power. Left to himself he gives v/ay, goes
on his shoulders, and is not fit for any kind of work.
Such are the horses which are nearly of the same breed.
Some are fully furnished at three years of age, and can stand
training and racing, which are the hardest kind of work.
Others at four-and-a-half years old are hardly ready for even
very moderate work. It is therefore necessary to take great
care of them, to let them acquire strength, and to give them
the muscular development of which they are deficient.
Whence comes this difference ? Does Nature make some
more precocious than others, all being of the same origin ? Is
a horse's muscular development in inverse proportion to his
good looks and speed ? In no way ! This great difference
results solely from the method employed in feeding and
educating different classes of horses. If a uniform system
were used, all would have similar precocity, development, and
power. Horses differ in shape, action, and usefulness, but if
they were all treated properly up to the age of three years,
they would all be sufficiently hardy for any kind of work.
The half-bred trotter which is trained and run at three vears
THE ARMY HORSE. 2ig.
old is a proof of this. His work is extremely hard, and is out
of all proportion as compared to that required from a fashion-
able horse, or from a troop horse, and he can stand it as well
or better than any other kind of animal without becoming
unsound. He is, however, well fed from the first, and is.
methodically exercised from an early age. In fact, he is
brought up like a thorough-bred.
All race horses are not thorough-breds, but all have been
brought up with a view to racing. From their birth they
receive the care and feeding which is appropriate to the work
they will have to do. They begin to eat a little oats during
the first days of their life, and when six or eight months old
they get five quarts of oats a day. At eighteen months they
are stabled, highly fed, and trained. At two years old they
take part in special races.
A similar, though somewhat slower method, is employed
with trotters, which do not run until they are three years old.
In both cases nature is helped by feeding, and by gradual and
constant exercise.
The breeder of other horses hinders nature by insufficient
feeding. A horse grows fast, and his skeleton and muscular
system are large. In order that he may grow quickly, and
acquire the necessary strength, his food should be abundant,
and his exercise should be favourable for the development of
his strength and speed. The only young horses which are
well fed and exercised, are those which are intended for racing
or for stud purposes. Other animals are kept at grass,
because that is the most economical method of bringing them
up. Under the influence of this watery and innutritious food
and want of exercise, the horse's development is retarded in
every way, his bones ossify slowly, and his muscles do not
stand out. The older he grows, the more debilitated does
he become. x-\t three years he is only backward, but between
four and five }'ears of age he suffers greatly from anaemia,.
220 THE ARMY HORSE.
which is a poverty-stricken disease that needs repair. I feel
certain that success in its treatment can only be incomplete,
and that a horse recovering from it can never bs as good as he
would have been, had he been brought up differently. The
longer we wait to restore the young horse, the longer and
more unsuccessful will be the treatment. If the animal is only
a three-year-old, a few months may be sufficient, but if he is
four years, and still more if he is five, he will require a year
or longer. This undeniable fact is easily explained, because
the longer the animal suffers from anaemia, the more severe
does the disease become, and the greater is the general
wasting.
The numerous cases of mortality among young horses are
to be attributed to this state of impoverishment (anaemia).
The debility which results from insufficient food during
the period of growth, makes them unable to resist the
slightest illness or the most trifling accident. It is also the
cause of many diseases, strangles, for instance, and obscure
lamenesses which are generally put down to youth. A
young horse is vigorous and healthy, if he is brought up
under good conditions ; but is weak and sickly if he has
a lymphatic temperament, or is anaemic from want of food
or exercise.
Norman horses are generally lymphatic, soft and backward,
because Normandy produces less oats than other breeding
districts, and it is the custom in that country to give it only
to trotters. The breed feels the bad effects of this, and soon
degenerates, unless the stallions are chosen from trotters
which, having been always kept in good condition, are able
partly to correct the lymphatic temperament of the dam
which has suffered from anaemia in her }-outh.
It is not correct to say that trotters acquire their magnifi-
cent development and strength on account of their being
exceptional animals. Besides the brilliant instances which
THE ARMY HORSE. 221
have been mentioned, there are many trotters which compete
in local events, and after leaving the racecourse do excellent
work. Often they have nothing remarkable about them,
except their pace. They are not naturally precocious, and
have advanced by care, good feeding, and education, while
others have remained behind.
At five years old the French horse could have nearly all
his height and strength and be ready for breaking. If he
is otherwise, the state of his development will be propor-
tionate to the amount and nature of the food and exercise he
has received.
Formerly it was the rule among riding masters not to break-
in a horse for high-school work until he was at least seven
years old. For many years I thought and acted like the
others, and to make my school horses. I took animals of from
seven to eight years old ; but little by little, I became im-
pressed by what I saw on racecourses. At Epsom, Chantilly,
Auteuil, and Longchamp, the longest and severest races were
reserved for three-year olds.* I observed that when breaking-
in a school horse I did not require from him a tenth of the
exertion which he would have to do, if he was trained or
raced. Starting on the principle that if a horse can do much,
he can do little, I came to the conclusion that a three-year-
old which could stand training and racing, would much more
easily stand school breaking. Although this reasoning ap-
pears to me to-day to be very simple, I was not able to act
on it without extreme timidity, so great is the influence of
preconceived ideas. Whenever I spoke about it to horsemen
and authorities of that time, they shrugged their shoulders,
and regarded it as nonsensical. Since then I have learned
* Without doubt the objection will be made that a great number break down
in training. To this I reply that they begin their training at the age of eighteen
months, which is a very dangerous proceeding. I finally propose to begin
breaking at three -and-a-half years ; the amount of exertion which I require being
far less than that incurred during training.
222 THE ARMY HORSE.
that every attempted innovation runs a great chance of being
received in this manner.
Nevertheless I decided, not without great apprehension, to
make an experiment, and I took in hand a four-year-old
which had been well looked after. I found that he had quite
as much strength, and much more suppleness, than my other
pupils which were seven years old. Encouraged by this
result, I tried a three-year-old with the same success. Since
then I have broken-in for high-school riding a score of
thoroughbreds of this age, and have always obtained better
results than with older horses.
Finally, I pushed the experiment further, in order to find
out the greatest amount of exertion which could be demanded
from a very young horse without distressing him. I broke
Viscope, a thoroughbred mare by Vermouth out of Vinai-
grette,* when she was two years old. At three years her
education was complete as a hack, jumper, and school horse,
and she received a medal at the horse show. She is now
seven years old, perfectly sound, unblemished, and had not
even a windgall when I disposed of her.
I could cite many other examples. I only wished to
explain how experience led me to the conclusion that to take
a horse at three-and-a-half years old in order to break and
train him for any particular work, is to begin at an age when
all horses which have been properly brought up and fed, can
stand work. Further, it is to take him at an age when
progressive muscular exercise is indispensable to him. This
exercise, so far from wearing him out and making him un-
sound, strengthens his limbs and body, and quickly puts him
in full possession of all his powers.
* The precocity of the thoroughbred will of course be put forward as an objec-
tion to what I say ; but we are not concerned with two-year-olds. Besides this,
the precocity of feeding and exercise has always appeared to me to have a more
decisive effect than the precocity of breed.
THE ARMY HORSE. 223
A three-and-a-half year old horse is more supple and can
be more easily educated than a five-year-old. He has not
been able to acquire the faults of temper which we find
in him later on, and which are almost always the result of
injudicious or cruel treatment by people about him. He
has not the bad habit — which all horses left to themselves
contract — of going on his shoulders, on which account the
hind quarters become less developed than the forehand. We
can then easily make him rely on himself, and put equal
weight on all four limbs, which is of great importance ; be-
cause true equilibrium of the body is the one thing of all
others which we should try to obtain in breaking and riding.
The horse ought to be neither on his shoulders nor on his
haunches; but should have his own weight and that of his
rider equally distributed on both ends. Only on this con-
dition can he be light, active, and sure-footed, and capable of
doing long and severe work without injuring himself, When
a horse has been addicted for a long time to the habit of
standing and moving in a state of bad equilibrium, his con-
formation becomes distorted and can rarely recover from its
effects. If, as is the most frequent instance, the horse is on
his shoulders, his hind quarters are soft and drag themselves
along the ground, on account of want of exercise and develop-
ment ; but the forehand works too much and becomes
fatigued. Being overloaded and heavy, it has difficulty in
changing its place, and the slightest mistake or weakness will
involve the entire body. The limbs which are overworked
become soon worn out. This is the only cause of the pre-
mature reductions which each year decimate the effective
strength of cavalry squadrons, and put many horses out of
work at an age when they ought to be in their prime.
The most essential part of breaking a horse is to teach him
to balance himself properly. No one will deny that a horse
can be more easily educated at three-and-a-half than at five
224 THE ARMY HORSE.
years, consequently it is most important to begin with a horse
at the former age.
The entire question is whether a three-and-a-half years
old horse is or is not sufficiently developed and strong to be
broken and worked. In this respect theory and argument
are useless ; for facts are only of value, and in this case are
undeniable and invariable. Half-breds can be broken and
trained for racing at two-and-a-half, and they become so fit
and well, that they can run at three. Their work during the
six months of training and during their races is twenty times,
a hundred times more severe than that which a troop horse
undergoes during his very moderate and restricted course
of breaking. We are therefore right in concluding that
remounts ought to be bought at three years old ; and by
taking this as the average age, we give a chance to backward
breeds, and also to the ordinary methods of breeding, which,
being as economical as possible, have a retarding influence
in spite of everything.
Remounts at four-and-a-half and five years of age are not
really what they appear to be, because they have not been
properly fed and exercised. I am not afraid of adding that
they are worth more at three years, because they have suffered
for a shorter time, and because the watery and debilitating
food which their breeders give them, though insufficient for
their requirements during the first three years, becomes most
detrimental to them during their fourth and fifth year.
Instead of improving from three to five years by means of the
food of his breeder, the young horse deteriorates.
Whatever one does, whatever price or premium one gives to
the breeder, he will not feed his stock properly between the
age of three and five, because it is not his interest to do so.
But we can easily get him to have his animal in good
condition at three years of age. Precisely because breeding
is a trade, the breeder's chief object is to get rid of his stock,
THE ARMY HORSE. 225
as early as possible. Knowing that every three-year-old
which is in good condition and is well developed will be
taken, he does his best to promote the development of the
animal. With a horse which he sells at three years of age, at
a price even lower than what he would obtain for him between
four and five, he can defray the cost of feeding, which he could
not continue much longer. He is forced to make this
expenditure, under pain of not being able to sell his stock,
because with a three-year-old there is but little trickery.
Above all things the horse must have height, which he will
not have unless he has been well fed and well looked after.
Finally, the State by buying young horses would no longer
have to compete against dealers of all countries, because it
can do what they cannot do. In fact, a dealer buys only to
sell again, with the shortest possible delay ; but the three-
year old, when he leaves his breeder's hands, is not fit, even
for fashionable work. He requires to be fed on corn and
broken during a fairly long time, say, for about a year.
When the remount authorities buy a horse between three
and four years of age, they put him out to a farmer, whose
interest is to have him poorly fed, or he is sent to a remount
depot. Either in the former or latter case, the horse is under
better conditions than he was when with his breeder, although
the conditions are not perfect. He does not improve as much
as he ought to do, and he takes eighteen months before he is
ready.
I consider that these young horses should be taken in hand
at once, and put on food which will complete their develop-
ment, will give them the desirable strength and docility, and
will make them ready for work at the end of six months. In
a word, they ought to be fed on corn and broken in, from the
first day, but gradually and methodically.
A remount depot, instead of being an equine sheep-fold, as
it was recently defined by a general officer, ought to be a true
15
226 THE ARMY HORSE.
breaking school, strictly supervised and managed by a
competent man, who should ha\'e well-instructed horsemen
under him.
Young horses are not got into condition by stuffing them
with oats, nor broken in by giving them lots of exercise and
quickening their paces.
When the horse is between three and four,* he leaves his
breeder and is put into a stable. I beg my readers to note
the progressive conditions of the following programme, which
I propose, for feeding and work during the first three
months.
FIRST iSIONTII.
First fortnight. Six litres {$]^ quarts) of oats a day.f 2 in
the morning, 2 at noon, and 2 in the evening. Leading by the
hand for an hour in the school, or better still, in the open, if
the weather is fine.
Second fortniglit. Seven litres (6 quarts) of oats ; 2 in the
morning, 2 at noon, and 3 in the evening. The same leading
by hand.
Lunge the horses for five minutes dail}', half at the walk, and
half at a slow trot.
SECOND MONTH.
First fortniglit. Eight litres (7 quarts) of oats ; 2 in the
morning, 3 at noon, and 3 in the evening.
* Colts ought to be cut at least six months before any work ; at two-and-a-half
years at latest. Horses which are ridden too soon after the operation always
become weak in the loins, and exhibit a characteristic rocking of the croup.
t I take for granted that the animal has never eaten oats. If he has been fed
on oats, he can get at first, 8 litres (7 quarts) ; 2 in the morning, 3 at noon, and
3 in the evening.
When I speak of oats, I mean French oats, and not that horrible stufi" which
is given even now in the army, under the name of white Russian oats.
THE ARMY HORSE. 227
The time for leading by hand can be increased by half an
hour.
The lunging should be very gradually increased, up to
making the horse trot on each hand for five minutes without
stopping. A few minutes' interval should come between the
changes of hand.
Second fortnight. Nine litres (8 quarts) of oats; 3 in the
morning, 3 at noon, and 3 in the evening. The same leading
and lunging.
Usually, a horse is given three feeds during the twelve
hours between six in the morning and six in the evening, and
he is therefore left without food for twelve hours, which I
think is a bad method of distribution. The first feed ought to
be given at five in the morning, and the last at eight in the
evening.
THIRD MONTH.
First fortnight. Ten litres (8^ quarts) of oats ; 3 in the
morning, 3 at noon, and 4 in the evening. Twelve litres
10^ quarts) of oats should be given to heavy cavalry horses.
This ration and the same leading by hand should be
continued. The speed of the trot should be increased during
five minutes towards the end of the lunging on each side, and
the horses ridden at the walk in clothing in a plain snaffle for
five minutes, the men having neither whip nor spurs. The
horses should be quietly saddled in the stable, and loosely
girthed up. At first the saddles should be left on for only a
few minutes, and the time gradually increased.
Second fortnight. The same work, saddling and bridling the
horses in the stable and putting them on the pillar reins.
Bridling after lunging, and direct flexions of the jaw.
Lunging at the trot when saddled and bridled, with the
stirrups hanging down. x'\s lunging at a canter puts a horse
too much on his shoulders, it should not be practised until the
15*
228 THE ARMY HORSE.
animal is broken and well balanced. No caveson should be
used in lunging, only a snaffle bridle, and any light rope, a
forage cord, for instance.
When the horses are ridden, some men should be kept in
reserve to catch hold of the bridles of any of them which do
not want to follow the track. This is not a matter of
•mouthing, but is merely to strengthen the animal's loins and
to accustom him to carry a man.
After the three months' feeding which I have advised, the
horses will have had enough corn put into them to bear more
work. As they have developed their muscles at the trot,
learned to carry a man, have been bridled and saddled, and
have had their jaws loosened by flexions ; they are, I think,
ready for mouthing, which is well under way. In fact, only
the A, B, C of breaking is required from the troop horse, with-
out any elaboration. It will be well if he needs rather strong
indications, for we should take precautions against heavy
hands and rough legs. The horse's breaking is finished when
he freely goes forward under the action of the legs, while
taking hold of the snaffle ; and when he readily jumps, turns,
and reins back. Here we require only horizontal equilibrium.
Without doubt, an attempt should also be made to get the
animal in hand, although this condition should not be insisted
upon. It will be sufficient if the rider knows when to place
his horse's head in the necessary position for obtaining
equilibrium.
The horse should be accustomed to objects and noises, so
that he may not be afraid of them. An army horse should be
bold and ready to pass anything. To teach him to do so, all
sorts of objects should be placed under his feet in the school.
He can be taught best in the stable, at the time of feeding, to
stand the noise of tambours, clarions, clashing of arms
firing, etc.
I consider that three months will suffice to properly
THE ARMY HORSE. 229
finish this elementary and special breaking with any kind
of horse.
After these three months of preparatory work, the properly
called breaking has to be undertaken. :
FIRST MONTH.
First fortnight. Begin by lunging the saddled and bridled
horse at a trot. Gradually increase the speed, by means of
the driving whip, so as to make him get his hind legs under
him. Press him up to his full speed for a few minutes, while
taking great care not to let him over exert himself; because,
in that case, he would put too much weight on his shoulders,
or break into a canter. This work should continue for five
minutes to each side.
Ride the horse quietly at a walk for a quarter of an hour,
so as to accustom his back to the saddle, without hurting it.
Lead the horse for ten minutes ; practise the direct flexion ;
make him turn on his forehand ; and rein him back.
Lead him for an hour in the school or, preferably, in the
open if the weather is fine.*
Second fortnight. Similar lunging. Begin the changes of
direction by voltes, and diagonal changes of hand, and going
down the centre.
Teach the horse to yield to the heel. At the beginning, be
content with two or three steps.
Finish with work by the hand.
SECOND MONTH.
Lunge at the trot for two minutes on each side. Ride.
Repeat the preceding exercises. Divide the horses into twos
and fours. /\ccustom them to cross each other in every
direction. Frequently pull them up, so as to teach them
* This remark applies to the entire period of tjreaking.
230 THE ARMY HORSE.
to stand quietly. Do at a slow trot the same movements
which had just been taught at a walk.
Increase the number of side steps in rotation. Rein back
mounted. Work with the hand.
Second fortnight. Lunge in a similar manner. Confirm the
preceding work. Do the ordinary changes of direction at the
trot, with all the horses in twos and fours, and make them
cross in every direction. Do the demi-volte and finish it up
by a few side steps. Continue the work with the hand, while
requiring the direct flexion* with the head high. Begin the
lateral flexions, side steps and shoulder in.f
THIRD MONTH.
First fortnight. Similar lunging. Increase the speed of the
trdt in all the changes of direction, and in all the movements
in which all the horses are working together. Lengthen the
trot as much as possible in a straight line. " Two tracks,"
Begin starting into the canter on the right leg, and as soon as
the horse will do this readily, make him lead ofif with the left leg.
When the horse has become proficient at the canter, make
him do at this pace all the movements he has learned at
the walk and trot. Increase and improve the suppling
exercises by the hand.
At the end of the lesson teach the horses to jump
(p. 195 et seg.).
Second fortnight. Similar exercises. Confirm and improve
the preceding ones. Accustom the horses to flags, sabres, lances,
firearms, explosions, passing through fire, swimming,:|: etc.
* Up to this, it should only be asked for.
t The shoulder to the wall, which is much more easy, should be done only
when mounted.
X What should a rider do, when he is in water, trying to cross a river ?
We must not think that a horse which is not accustomed to the water will
swim with ease the moment he loses his feet. The only idea which such an
animal has, is to keep his head out of the water and to raise his neck as high as
THE ARMY HORSE.
231
By this kind of breaking, which ought to be continued for
three months, the horse will have learned enough for all
cavalry movements, and will only require to be accustomed to
outside work in the manoeuvres, and to become hardened, so
as to be able to stand long marches and bad weather.
Pig. 4g. — Horse and rider being drowned.
To recapitulate : The horse attains three years of age in the
spring. If the remount authorities buy between April and
September, he will be on an average three-and-a-half when he
arrives at the depot, where he will get three months prepa-
possible. Therefore, the croup will be pushed down, .and the position of
the horse will be a half -rear ; that is to say, he will be three-quarters upright
(Fig 49). This position will prevent him from advancing, and if his rider is
inexperienced, the chances are ten to on<; that both will be drowned. If the
rider pulls evei so little on the snaffle, or simply leans back, when he is m the
232
THE ARMY HORSE.
ratory work and three months' breaking. At four years he
will be broken and perfectly ready for work.
Although it mav be said that this four-year-old work would
prematurely wear him out, I assert, and experience proves
Fig. 50. — Rider mal'^ing his horse swim according to INIr. James Fillis's method.
that, under the conditions I have laid down, it will develop
and strens:then him.
position just described, the horse's croup will become depressed more and more,
the animal will become upright, will turn over backwards, while beating the
water with his fore feet, and will end by sinking.
The moment the horse is carried off his feet, the rider should take hold of a
good handful of the mane, and bend forward on the neck; but he should on no
account touch the head of the horse. He should firmly close his knees, for if he
does not do so, the water will instantly separate him from the horse. This is the
only position which enables the man to remain in the saddle and the horse to
swim. The rider ought to hold one of the snaffle reins in each hand, and when
he wishes to change the direction to the right or left, he should, for the moment,
bring his hand away from the shoulder, so as to act on the animal's mouth. But,
as I have just explained, he should, above all things, avoid pulling the reins in a
backward direction (Fig. 50).
I presume that similar instructions are given to the cavalry of all nations.
THE ARMY HORSE. 233
In reality, an army horse is taken up when he is five
years old, and a }-ear is spent at his breaking, which is
regarded as imperfect by competent men ; the reason being
that he is put into movement before he is given equilibrium,
which is the mainspring of correct and useful propulsion.
This was the fault that Baucher found with old-time equita-
tion, which knocked up horses by movement, whatever it was.
Its teachers tried to obtain equilibrium, whatever it might be
worth, by putting the horses into movement, so that they
mio-ht eet it for themselves. The actual change made by
Baucher was to secure equilibrium at first, in order to obtain
from it correct and useful movements. The only fault of the
great riding master was wishing to perfect and refine this
equilibrium, by rendering it unstable, before requiring forward
movement. Although I disagree with him, in that I work my
horses during propulsion, I do not the less begin, like he doeS;
by getting my horse into equilibrium before putting him into
movement, as previously explained. The difference between
us is that, in place of demanding eff'orts from the horse while
he is in a confined equilibrium, which is akin to immobility
and getting behind the bit, I try from the first to make him
obedient to the aids while he is in an equilibrium which is
maintained during propulsion.*
Persons who trot and canter horses before teaching them
to start with their weight equally distributed on all four legs,
follow antiquated methods which spoil the breaking.
We cannot advantageously modify a horse's equilibrium by
keeping up or increasing his speed at fast paces. Such a
proceeding would accentuate his defects and would knock him
up, without teaching him anything.
The great majority of horses are heavy in {mx\\., particularly
* The horse which is on his shoulders can move forward, but will drag his
hind legs ; and he has no power of propulsion, which results from the hind
legs being well under the body, in which case the necessary equilibrium is
obtained.
234 THE ARMY HORSE.
ivJien one begins to ride thevi. By making them go fast^
without having previously balanced them, one succeeds only
in putting their weight more and more forward, and in pre-
maturely spoiling them. Such animals carry the head low
and the neck on a level with the withers, they are ugly, every
effort in turning or stopping is painful to them, and they
readily fall. Being able to place the head and neck as they
like, they can effectively resist the aids. In fact the neck
must be high and the head almost perpendicular, in order that
the curb may act with all its power.
The curb loses the greater part of its action on the bars,,
when the head is low, in which case it is not much more severe
than a snaffle, and the horse gets out of hand. It is acknow-
ledged that a very large percentage of troop horses refuse to
leave the ranks, which is a fact that proves that they are
badly broken.
A horse which will not obey is not broken. What a
poor result is obtained by a year or more of irrational
work !
The military regulations ought to insist that the breaking
should be conducted in such a manner that the remounts
would be fit to go into the ranks on the 1st April, in case of
mobilisation, which would entail a breaking of only three
months' duration. But in time of peace this period of break-
ing is intentionally prolonged for an entire year, and the
remounts are not sent into the ranks until the following year.
To justify this practice, it is alleged that those regiments
which put remounts into the ranks after three months'
breaking, are those which use up most horses. This may be
possible ; but I have my doubts.
The truth is that remounts which are badly prepared by
insufficient food and exercise, are prematurely broken down
by the mere breaking. Rational breaking is, on the contrary,
much quicker, and so far from fatiguing them develops them.
THE ARMY HORSE. 235.
and gets them into hard condition, which is a truth that I
have demonstrated by incontestable facts.
I imagine that men would adapt themselves much more
readily to the kind of breaking I have described than to the
violent exercises which they have to go through, and which
discourages them, because they do not know the reason.
Instead of interesting them in riding and inspiring them with
love for horses, which should be the master feeling of a rider,,
they are often made to suffer through the horses, and the
horses through them. People may say that my breaking is
too elaborate. How is it, then, that it is not found to be too
elaborate by Germans, whose dominant quality is certainly
not elaboration ? Why do they work troop horses indi-
vidually much more than they do in France ? Why do they
begin by balancing them ? Why do they adopt rational
breaking, instead of knocking up their horses ? Why do their
horses last for a long time ? Alas ! the reason for this is that
they have profited by the teaching which has come to them
from France ; but in this classic country of riding we are kept
back by routine.
236
CHAPTER VIII.
HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
The Spanish walk — Reversed pirouette on three legs — Reversed and ordinary
pirouettes with the feet crossed — Reining back without reins — Rocking the
forehand — Rocking the haunches — Spanish trot— Shoulder-in at the canter —
Pirouettes at the canter — Changes of leg at each stride — Changes of leg
without gaining ground — Piaffers and passages — ^Differences between the
passage and Spanish trot — Serpentine at the Trot — Canter on three legs —
Passage to the rear — ^See-saw piaffer — Canter without gaining ground
and canter to the rear — New school movements — School horse for ladies.
The exercises which we are going to consider are the sequel
and perfected product of those which have been described.
These high-school exercises, as, for instance, the Spanish trot,
are more difficult, less used, and are artificial ; but the others,
like the canter, are natural.
I have often heard it said that high-school work ruins horses
and prematurely makes them unsound.
It is constantly said : " How is it possible for an animal to
do such severe work without knocking himself to pieces ? "
The answer is very simple : Professional gymnasts also go
through extremely severe exertion. Are they in bad condi-
tion ? Are their arms, legs and shoulders spoiled ? On the
contrary, they are in a state of grand condition which distin-
guishes them from everyone else. Their muscles stand out
and are as hard as steel, and their general health is perfect.
No doubt, if they began their work abruptly — I speak of
THE SPANISH WALK. 237
horses as well as of men — they would not be able to stand it,
and would break down. But if the effort required for the
gradual exercises is proportionate to the increase of muscular
power, the work — no matter how severe it may be — will be
comparatively easy, and even healthy,*
It is true that many horses have been ruined by high-school
work ; but only because the work was badly carried out, or
because the preliminary training was insufficient. Riding,
like other sciences, has its charlatans and its empirics. When
a horse has been methodically broken, the practice of all the
exercises through which he has gone, so far from ruining him,
will only strengthen him.
With respect to horsemen who turn up their noses at high-
school riding, and speak of it with contempt, I content myself
with reminding them of the fable of the fox and the grapes.
THE SPANISH WALK.
A horse is said to do the Spanish walk,*|- when he raises his
fore legs one after another, by carrying them forward and ex-
tending them.
The principal thing to observe is the way in which a horse
puts his foot on the ground ; for although it is easy to make
him raise his legs, it is very difficult to make him put them
down properly.
The breaker ought to begin this work on foot, while standing
at the left shoulder of the horse and on the left track, in which
* My horses never get even the slightest blemish from my breaking, although
I begin to break them much earlier than any of my predecessors have done.
t It has never been known why this movement is called the Spanish walk.
There is nothing Spanish in it, except the name, and it by no means resembles
the walk of the Andalusian animal. When the Spanish horse walks, he bends
his knees and brings the lower part of the legs inwards, which peculiarity is
called el pasode campafia (the walk of the bell) on the other side of the Pyrennees.
It would be more appropriately termed the "recruits' balance step," because
there is a great similarity between the two.
238 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
-case the wall will prevent him escaping to the right. He
should hold the head of the animal rather high, while pushing
him to the right, in order to throw the greater part of the
weight of the forehand on the right foreleg, and thus to allow
the left leg to be easily raised.
He should then very lightly touch the left fore leg of the
.horse with the end of the cutting whip ; but it is somewhat
difficult to determine the exact spot where the leg should be
touched. The sensitive spot, which varies in each horse, lies
somewhere between the elbow and the pastern.
The horse's first impression is one of surprise, because he
does not understand what is required of him, and he generally
tries to escape. Nevertheless, he cannot go to the right, on
account of the wall, and if he swerves to the left, he ought at
once be straightened by the whip. If he runs back, the
breaker ought to immediately bring him forward by touching
him with the whip behind the girths. After a moment, he
almost always shows his impatience, by pawing the ground with
the leg which has been touched. As soon as he raises this leg,
he ought to be patted on the neck, in order to make him under-
stand that he has done what was required. After repeating
this exercise for several days, the horse, in order to avoid being
touched, raises his leg the moment he sees the whip approaching
it. When he well understands, and does this work with the
left leg, the right leg should be submitted to the same practice,
by placing him to the right hand, and taking care to raise his
head and carry it to the left.
As the repeated touching of the whip irritates a horse, we
should at first be satisfied with the slightest sign of obedience,
and will thus take the best means of not disgusting the animal.
He will usually raise his legs during the first lesson ; but the
way in which he raises them will be far from satisfactory,
because he does not extend them, and contents himself by
making impatient movements, pawing the ground, etc. Never-
THE SPANISH WALK. 239
theless, as I have just said, we ought to be satisfied, at the
beginning, by the semblance which he makes of raising his
legs. It would be wrong to insist, or even to strike the animal,
when we can do nothing with him, beyond astonishing him.
Nevertheless we should gradually obtain the extension of
the legs, which will not be satisfactory, unless the legs are
completely and horizontally extended at the height of the
shoulders. In my opinion, it cannot be said that a horse does
the Spanish walk, unless this height and extension are
obtained.
x'\s soon as the horse understands what he is required to do,
and performs it correctly, that is to say, when he fully extends
his legs horizontally, he ought to be taught to place them on
the ground without the slightest bending of the knees, which
is the most important condition in this movement. To succeed
in this, we should, as soon as the legs are fully extended, draw
the horse forward by the snaffle, so that he will place the foot
well in front, the leg remaining straight until the foot touches
the ground. If he bends the knee, he can take only a short
step ; and, besides, as the knees will be bent unequally, the
steps will not be of the same length. Finally, if the horse is
allowed to bend his knees, it will be impossible to prevent him
pawing the ground, which would necessarily make the steps
unequal. We should therefore take the greatest care to have
the leg perfectly straight, until the foot touches the ground.
When the legs are thus extended, the steps cannot fail to be
equal in length.
As soon as we get the horse to take one correct step with
each leg, we should not continue this work on foot, although
the progress would certainly be more rapid.
The Spanish walk is much more graceful, brilliant and
regular, if the breaker teaches it when he is in the saddle. In
fact, when he is on foot, he has to draw the horse forward,
and he cannot then get the animal in hand, because the for-
240 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
ward pull causes the neck to be straightened. The head is
consequently placed in a wrong and ungraceful position.
Instead of pulling the horse forward, it is far better to press
him up with the legs. Therefore we can teach the Spanish
walk only when mounted.
Having obtained the first two steps on foot, we should mount,
and try to do the work I have just explained.
My plan is as follows : I hold the curb reins and the left rein
of the snaffle in my left hand, and the right rein of the snaffle
and the whip in my right hand.
Having stopped the horse, I take a sufficient hold of the
snaffle to keep the head and neck high, and being on the left
hand, I try to get the first step with the right leg. Having
the wall on my right, I am certain that the horse cannot place
himself sideways when I try with my left leg, to make him
raise his right leg ; but if I were to try to make him raise his
left leg, my right leg would force his croup round to the left.
I carry my hands to the left, and I strongly close my left
leg, which is helped later on by the spur.
The right rein of the snaffle is drawn tighter than the left
rein, and both legs are kept close to the girths, so as to prevent
the horse reining back ; the left leg having a much stronger
pressure than the right. The effect of the reins is to put
almost all the weight of the forehand on the left shoulder.
The left leg of the rider should now make the horse raise his
right leg, for which object, having the whip pointed downwards,
I lightly touch him several times on the right shoulder,
while continuing to keep up his head with the right snaffle
rein.
Being ignorant of what I want him to do, the horse will
always become impatient ; therefore, we should make our
demands on him in a very gentle manner. Nevertheless, we
should keep on at him until he raises his leg. As soon as he
makes the slightest movement with his right leg, we should
THE SPANISH WALK. 241
stop and pat him on the neck, and walk him round the school
before recommencing.
In a week, the horse will extend both legs. It goes without
saying that I do similar work with his left leg, but in a
reversed way.
From this period, I combine the respective actions of my legs
and whip, and in proportion as I obtain the desired effect, I
diminish the action of the whip, and increase that of the legs,
until I obtain obedience solely by the legs.
After the horse answers to the indications of the legs, and, if
need be, to those of the spurs, by complete extension, I drop
the whip, and it is then easy for me to press him up to the
bridle, which it would be impossible for me to do on foot.
I shall now describe in detail the action of the "aids" during
the entire movement : the action of the left leg and right rein
makes the horse raise his right leg. At the moment he is
about to place it on the ground, I press him forward with both
legs, the action of which performs the double office of keeping
him straight and of obliging him to put down his right leg,
completely extended, and in front of his left leg. I keep an
equal feeling on both reins during the forward step, up to the
time he places his foot on the ground. Then my right leg
and left rein, in their turn, make him raise the left leg. The
connection between one step and the next one should be made
in this manner, and it should be done with great care, so as to
obtain perfect regularity of movement. We have then had
recourse, as we should always do, to a diagonal effect.
The Spanish walk can also be practised when reining back,
in which case the reins draw the animal back, the moment the
extension of the leg is obtained. The difficulty in this back-
ward movement is to prevent the hind quarters from turning
to the right or left, each time we bring the leg which is in the
air, back in rear of the one which is on the ground.
It often happens that the horse, by going back too quickly,
16
242 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
gets out of hand, and only about half extends his fore legs.
In this case we should always recommence the work by
sending him forward and requiring a complete extension.
We must not think that we are always certain to succeed
even by exactly following the directions I have given. It
depends on the intelligence of the rider to use all the means
in his power to make the horse understand what is required of
him. This is a question of tact. Besides, when a riding
master breaks his first horse he is not sure of himself, and he
is, therefore, obliged to feel his way. Only after breaking
three or four horses, he will be able to tell if he has done well
or if he has failed.
A horse ought not to be asked to do the Spanish walk
unless he is very supple, and, above all things, unless he is
perfectly obedient to the aids. In fact, we should be always
certain of making him go forward. But in this work we
require him to stand the spur without hardly going forward.
As we are obliged to have the hands high in order to raise
the neck, we thus throw a great portion of the weight on the
hind quarters, and consequently risk making the animal get
behind his bit. It may thus happen that instead of raising
one fore leg, he will, by raising two, make a half-rear, which is
not a formidable defence, because it is a forward movement,
Or he may rear, which is more dangerous, especially if the
reins are pulled. It frequently happens in breaking, that in
order to make the horse go forward, we are obliged, for a time,
to give up the attempt of obtaining a movement which we
are teaching. If we sometimes tolerate, even a little, a
tendency on the part of the horse to get behind his bit, we
will soon be powerless to make him go forward. He will
quickly understand that he can get out of hand by getting
behind his bit, to which expedient he will continually have
recourse.
All stationary work, the object of which is to teach the
THE SPANISH WALK. 243
horse to bear the touch of the spurs without hardly advancing,
is always dangerous. It often makes a horse restive, in which
case the method is almost always blamed, although it would
be safer to blame the manner of its application. Besides, it
is also difficult for a riding master who is breaking his first
horse or his first horses, to avoid making them get behind
their bit. Very often a horse has this tendency without the
breaker perceiving it. As a general rule, if a horse does not
go up to his bridle, he has this fault. Hence my motto is
" forward, always forward, and again forward ! "
I admit that we can never obtain a concession from a horse
without a more or less lively struggle, but we must not forget
that a man's authority over a horse is dependent on this
struggle.* If we require a difficult thing from a horse
without having prepared him sufficiently, not only will there
be a struggle, but — which is a much more serious thing — the
horse will win. We should, therefore, know the precise
instant when each demand can be made. This is a question
of tact.
If we put a horse to some work for w^iich he has been
badly prepared, we may be certain that we shall not be
successful. Without a proper preparation the horse will
certainly resist.
The same work can be demanded later on without any
trouble. It is better to try to break a horse in a year than in
six months. The more difficult a horse is, the more time
should be devoted to his education. If it is necessary, we
may take six months to balance him well in his three natural
paces, and to make him to rein back correctly before teaching
him high-school work and artificial movements.
I would attach no importance to the Spanish walk, if I were
* It is well to note that after each stormy lesson, if the man is the victor, the
horse's docility will be well marked in the following lessons. There is no
exception to this rule.
16*
244 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
not obliged to teach it to the horse, in order, later on, to
complete his high school education by pirouettes on three
legs, the Spanish trot, and the canter on three legs. For
this, it is of the utmost necessit}- that the breaker can
obtain, at ^\'ill, extension of the legs, and especially by
the spurs, which is the onl)- means of keeping a horse in
equilibrium, of teaching him to go up to his bit, and of
making him hold his legs as high and as extended as he
ought to do.
There is, alas ! another way for teaching a horse the
Spanish walk, and I hasten to sa)' that I never use this
method of which I am obliged to speak, because it is greatly
in vogue among the new school. By this term I designate
the riding masters who have sprung up since the death of
Baucher, and who have substituted for the school movements
he executed most brilliantl}', a series of strange contortions
obtained by a host of accessories, the employment of which
necessitates the assistance of a large number of men.
To teach the Spanish walk according to the method of the
new school, it is necessary to employ an entire squad of
breakers — four privates and a corporal : never less, and often
more.
They begin by placing on each fore leg a hobble, to which is
attached a cord, each cord being held by a man. A third
person holds the bridle and a cutting whip. The corporal
mounts the animal, and a fifth tormenter has the noble mission
of flourishing a driving whip. We will now see the collective
operations wdiich the squad performs on the unfortunate
animal.
No. 3, who has the cutting whip, taps the left leg of the
horse with it. No. i, who holds the cord of that leg, pulls the
leg straight, and the corporal, who is on the back of the
animal, presses his right leg against the horse's side so as to
accustom him to extend his leg on being touched by the spur.
REVERSED PIROUETTE ON THREE LEGS. 245
At the same moment No. 5, who wields the driving whip,
touches the horse on the croup to make him go forward.
Thus, a step with the left leg is obtained. No. 2, who holds
the cord of the hobble, which is on the pastern of the right
leg, comes on the scene only when the squad proceeds to
manipulate the right leg in the way I have just described for
the left leg. This double manoeuvre continues until the horse
has learned the Spanish walk.
This is a case which demands the intervention of the
S.P.C.A. I am at a loss for a word to express this kind of
proceeding. It is certainly not breaking, and has nothing in
common with horsemanship.
REVERSED PIROUETTE ON THREE LEGS.
The reversed pirouette on three legs, the fourth being held
in the air, during the rotation of the croup round the shoulders,
is the easiest movement to teach the horse, of course supposing
that he is well balanced ; because it is an affair of uniting, in a
single movement, the rotation of the croup and the extension
of the legs.
Having ridden the horse into the middle of the school, we
make him take a few steps in the rotation of his croup, while
stopping him at every three or four steps to make him extend
his leg.
As we use the same leg for both movements it ought to be
kept close to the girths, the other leg being the one which
stops the rotation. For example, in the rotation of the croup
round the shoulders from left to right, my left leg prompts the
rotation of the croup, and also the extension of the horse's
right leg. When the horse has described about a quarter of
the circle of rotation, I stop him by the pressure of my right
leg, and I touch him with the left spur, which I keep close to
the girths, while at the same time I lightly feel the right rein of
the snaffle, so as to oblige the animal to extend his right leg.
246 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
By frequent repetition we can soon make a horse take a
step or two in the rotation of his croup, without putting his
right fore on the ground, and Httle by httle we can make
him do the complete pirouette in this manner. We ought,
during the entire time, to maintain a fairly strong pressure of
the opposite leg, so as to keep the horse up to his bridle and
prevent him getting behind his bit. To be in a good position,
the horse should have his head and neck high, and his neck
slightly bent to the right. The action of the right snaffle rein
is necessary to make this bend, and to help in keeping the
right leg in the air.
We use the reversed means to obtain the pirouette from
right to left, with extension of the left leg.
The difficulty is to keep the right leg extended ; the equi-
librium on the three legs being sufficiently secure to allow the
horse to maintain this position, and to move his hind quarters
round the left fore foot, which forms a pivot and does not
shift out of its place.
In the pirouette from left to right, we should carr}- the
hands to the left, while lightl}' feeling the right reins, so as to
put the weight of the forehand on the left shoulder. In the
pirouette from right to left, the right foot is the pivot, and
consequently we should carry the hands to the right, and feel
the left reins, so that the right leg, in its turn, will bear the
weight of the forehand, and thus allow the left leg to be
raised.
REVERSED AND ORDINARY PIROUETTES WITH
THE FEET CROSSED.
The reversed pirouette with the fore feet crossed is done
in the same manner as the reversed pirouette on three legs,
except that the fore legs, instead of being successively ex-
tended in the air, rest on the ground, and become crossed
while the horse turns.
REINING BACK WITHOUT REINS. 247
In the ordinary pirouette with the feet crossed, the forehand
turns, and the hind feet become crossed. The former is very
simple, and the latter very difficult.
REINING BACK WITHOUT REINS.
This movement is not very difficult to teach ; but it is not
without annoyance to the horse and danger to the rider,
because the legs and spurs are the only agents employed to
make the animal go back, with the consequent risk of putting
him behind his bit or making him rear.
I would not advise young and inexperienced breakers to try
this exercise before they have broken several horses. Until
they have done so, they will not be able to exercise the
necessary judgment.
We may safely try it on impetuous horses, which are always
ready to go forward ; but it would be a mistake to teach a
soft or sluggish animal, because the vigorous use of the legs
is the only way to make him go up to his bridle. In any
case, we ought not to teach it to a horse without being certain
that he will not take advantage of the instruction, by reining
back in opposition to the wishes of his rider ; in other words,
by becoming restive. Therefore, I do not begin this exercise
until the horse is perfectly obedient, and, especially, until I
am sure of being able to make him go forward under all
circumstances.
In teaching it, I begin in the same way as I have described
for the rein back (p. 119^/ seq^, namely, I employ both legs and
hands. By degrees I diminish the action of the reins, while
indicating to the horse by means of the legs, which is the
great difficulty, that the hind quarters should begin the move-
ment. It is necessary in some sort of a way that the horse
should be pulled back by our thighs and seat, and that he
receives a backward propulsion from his forehand.
At first, I encounter some hesitation on the part of the
248 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
horse, which is all the greater because up to this time I have
always trained him to go forward at the slightest pressure of
the legs. We should keep him as quiet as possible and
not insist too strongly, because the less a horse understands
what is required of him, the more irritable does he become.
We ought to be content with two or three steps to the
rear, and immediately he has taken them, we should make
him take the same number of steps forward, by relaxing the
pressure of the thighs, and by touching him with the heel or
spur. We should, above all things, avoid letting him rein,
back quicker than we wish him to do.
I sum up by saying that at first I close the legs and feel the
reins sufficiently to bring about the rein back. Having
obtained the retrograde movement, I hasten to pat the horse
on the neck, and I repeat the work, while each time increasing
the pressure of the legs, and diminishing the tension of the
reins. Finally, when the horse has learned, little by little, what
is required of him, I leave go the reins.
ROCKING THE FOREHAND.
In rocking the forehand, the horse raises his fore legs-
successively, without extending them, and rocks his forehand
from one leg to the other, while separating them as widely as.
possible from each other, at the moment when they touch
the ground.
Having taught the horse to extend his legs as already
described, it is easy by this means to make him balance the
forehand. With this object, his head and neck should not be
raised too high, and his legs should only be half straightened,.
which I get him to do in the following way. The horse being
halted, I make him raise the right fore, as if to extend it, but
as soon as he raises it, and before he has completely extended
it, I carry my hands to the right, and, consequently, all the
weight of the forehand which was on the left leg is suddenly
ROCKING THE HAUNCHES. 249
transferred to the right leg, and the horse naturally comes down
on that side, while separating the right leg from the left.
Having obtained this first step, I demand a second one from
the left leg, by employing similar means. I have then one
time for one leg, and another time for the other leg, and to
connect them I have got only to* bring them together and to
put them into harmony. The separation of the legs will
naturally be in proportion to the action of the hands.
The action of the legs of the rider is the same as that for
the extension of the animal's legs, but it ought to be simul-
taneous on both sides, so as to prevent the rocking of the
croup.
In a short time we will obtain the alternate rocking of the
forehand to the right and to the left.
We ought not to require a great separation of the fore legs
until the rocking is very regular. The wider the separation,
the slower, softer and more graceful is the movement. We
can easily succeed in getting a separation of forty inches, and
sometimes of five feet.
The rocking of the forehand is made on one spot, and it can
also be made while advancing, in which case it is more grace-
ful, and has the advantage of not prompting a horse to get
behind his bit ; but it is much more difficult, because we must
add forward propulsion to the other actions I have just
described.
ROCKING THE HAUNCHES.
This movement requires more tact, as regards the seat, than
the preceding one. To obtain it we should feel the reins very
lightly, and should make the horse take a light bearing on
the snaffle while pressing him down, so as to carry his weight
on his shoulders. As the haunches become lightened, their
mobility will be increased.
We should take care to keep the horse stationary and very
250 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
quiet ; for we are going to require from him two times, one
after the other ; because one time will not be a school move-
ment, and will not give him any indication.
I exert a very light pressure of the right leg, which causes
the horse to raise his right hind leg, as if to make a side step to
the left, but at the moment this leg comes close to the left hind,
and before it is placed on the ground, a pressure of my left leg
pushes it back into its place, and at the same time makes the
horse raise his left hind, which he places by the side of the
right hind, as if he were taking a side step to the right.
If the rider does not catch with precision the moment when
the horse is going to put down his right leg, this leg will touch
the ground without the rider having pushed it back to the
right by the action of his left leg. Under these conditions, the
right leg of the horse will be placed quite close to his left leg,
•and they will not be sufficiently separated for him to make a
small rocking movement.
The rider should be content with these two first steps until
the horse does them very steadily, and then he should demand
them the reverse way, namely, from left to right. He should
wait until later on to do four, and should increase the number
gradually. I recommend the breaker not to try to obtain a
-great separation of the feet before the horse rocks in a very
regular manner.
The spur has to be used, in order to obtain as great a sepa-
ration as possible, so to give more vigour to the movement.
When rocking the haunches, the horse has a natural tendency
to carry his head low, which at first I allow him to do to a
-certain extent, because he will thus lighten the hind quarters.
As soon as he knows the work, I make him hold his head
in the position which a school horse should always do.*
* With the head low a horse is never graceful and light. All horses which
are broken by means of the cutting whip adopt the faulty position of having the
croup high, the reason being that by striking the croup with the cutting whip, we
SPANISH TROT. 251
By increasing the pressure of the legs, and accentuating it a
httle by a touch of the spurs, we can easily obtain a small
piaffcr (p. 275) of the forehand, which accompanies the rocking
of the haunches.
If we press the horse forward, while making him take very
short steps, we will obtain rocking of the haunches with
passage (p. 275) of the forehand.
The movement is less graceful when done without gaining
ground, than when going forward, because there is a want of
propulsion, and it is less easy to keep the neck high. Finally,
as it is necessary to obtain a certain elevation of all the legs,
we should avoid putting more weight in front than behind.
On the contrary, we should carefully try to keep him in
■equilibrium.*
SPANISH TROT.
Of all artificial movements, the Spanish trot is the easiest
and most brilliant. With a horse which knows the Spanish
walk perfectly, nothing is easier than to make him do it at
the trot.
It is enough to increase the action of the " aids " to give a
horse more energy. At first we ride the horse at the Spanish
w^alk, and when we have gone a few steps, we should seize the
moment when the animal's leg is raised, to touch him more
sharply with the spur.
I have never had horses which took a long time to do this
•cause this portion of the body to become raised, as a result of stimulating the
part. On this account I condemn the use of the cutting whip in high-school
■work.
Horses which have been "routined," I cannot say "broken,"' by the cutting
•whip, are always ugly and badly balanced. Having the neck on a level with the
withers and the croup high, the forehand is depressed, and is consequently in a
position the direct opposite of that of a true school horse (Fig. 62), which has
always his neck high and his hocks well bent under the body.
*I believe I was the first to make a horse do the rocking of the haunches with
passage of the forehand in 1880, at Paris, with the thorough-bred Amour.
252 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
movement. But, as I have often said, I content myself with a
little at the beginning of a new work.
Let us suppose, for example, that at the moment when the
right leg is extended, I touch the horse sharply with the left
spur, he will make a small leap forward : that is the first
period. I content myself w^ith this, and pat him on the neck.
Then I begin again.
When I am sure of my first period, I do not demand a
second, but I begin, quite simply, with the left leg, in the same
manner as I did wdth the right.
When I have obtained from my horse a single time of the
trot on each leg, I demand two, but only when such particular
time is correct in length and height, and is done with ease.
If one leg is lazier than the other leg, which is almost
always the case, I work only that leg, which is the best means
of impressing the memory of the horse, and of making him
understand, by means of my indications, that he uses that leg
too slackly.
Having established harmony, I connect the two first
periods and afterwards demand four ; but no more for
a long time, not even when the horse tries to do more of his
own accord.
It is better to be contented with four times well done, than
to try to quickly obtain a greater number which would
be doubtful.
In the Spanish trot, the horse displays great energy,* of
* See Fig. 51. The thorough-bred Markir (by the thorough-bred Anglo-
Arab Cyrus, out of the thorough-bred Theresine), at the Spanish trot : right
diagonal in the air ; perfectly in hand ; head a little beyond the vertical ; and
jaw bent. Fig. 52, Germinal at the Spanish trot : left diagonal in the air ;
and in hand. The cutting whip would never give extensions of the legs like
those shown in these two illustrations, which were entirely an affair of the spurs.
We can see in these two cases, how the hock which is in the air is brought well
under the body, which is the whole secret of the elevation of the forehand. The
expenditure of energy in Fig. 51 is so great that the fetlocks almost touch the
ground.
Oh $:
SPANISH TROT. 257
which we should not take undue advantage ; because if
we wish to obtain twenty or thirty steps of this movement
in a short time, it is certain that the last will not be as
brilliant as the first, and the horse will acquire the bad habit
of not extending his legs with energy.
If, on the contrary, we know how to be contented with
little, the more modest our demand, the greater will be the
energy which we can obtain in its execution.
Before requiring the horse to keep up the Spanish trot for
a long time, we should wait until he can do it without
effort. When he is very familiar with this movement, it
will not fatigue him, and we can then make him do it three
or four times round the school, but we should not go
beyond that.
I have already said that during breaking, we should not
allow the horse to take the initiative in any movement, for if
we do so, he will take advantge of our leniency, and will
not obey our orders. He will frequently do what he finds
easy, and what pleases him ; but not what will please
us. Thus, while we are teaching him the changes of the
leg at the canter, he will often do more than we
demand. If we allow him to do this, we will not be
able to make him do the changes regularly, because he
will do them of his own accord, without our being able to
regulate him.
When a horse takes the initiative in a movement which we
have taught him, we should correct him, but not harshly. If
we leave him to go his own way, he will quickly take advan-
tage of our slackness, and our authority will be lost.
If I say that in this case the punishment should never
be very severe, I assume that in taking the initiative in a
movement which he has been taught, he gives a proof of
good will. Nevertheless, I repeat, it should not be tolerated.
Each time he tries to do a movement for himself, we should
17
258 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
replace him in the position he previously occupied, and keep
him in it until he remains in it without trying to get
out of it.
I have often seen horses which had been taught the
Spanish walk use it subsequently as a defence. To every
demand they replied by extending their legs without moving
on. This was caused by their being taught artificial airs
too soon. Before coming to them, the horse should be very
supple and should be absolutely obedient in all natural
movements.
Young breakers generally wish to go too fast, and it
amuses them to see their horse extend his legs. When
he does it, even of his own initiative, they pat him on the
neck, and are astonished later on at not being able to get
him to do something else which they ask him.
It is easy to understand that a horse will use the Spanish
walk as a defence, when the order of the breaking is faulty.
In fact, when we teach him this movement we force him to
bear the spur, while remaining stationary. This is the great
danger in all breaking, because, if a horse has not been
at first accustomed to go freely forward on being touched
with the spur, he extends the leg, or leans on the spur.
Before teaching a horse to bear the spur without moving
forward, we ought always be sure of being able to make him
go forward by means of the spur when we wish.
It very often happens that a horse, through softness, uses as
a defence an air to which he is accustomed, but will never
use an air which requires great energy. As I have just said,
we should of course put him back into his old position, and
should prevent him from getting out of it.*
■* When a horse who knows how to do a thing very well, becomes obstinate
on some particular occasion, he should be taken in hand very resolutely and
reduced to obedience by every possible means. I advise the rider never to yield ;
for if he does so, the animal will quickly understand that if he wants to be
SPANISH TROT. 259
Besides, the horse ought to be so intently occupied with his
rider, during the entire course of a lesson, that he should
think of nothing else ; and the rider should mentally act in a
similar manner towards the horse.
The man, so to speak, ought to take entire possession of
the animal, and should make him so attentive to his orders
that the horse should not think of anything except what he is
asked to do. As regards myself, I take such possession of
the horse I ride, that the only idea I leave in his head is :
" What is he going to ask me to do ? "
Certain authors say : " It requires so much time to do this,
so much to do that, at the end of so many lessons we will be
able to obtain this thing or that thing," etc. This is entirely
wrong. One never knows how much time will be required to
succeed in making a horse do any particular work.
Some horses learn very quickly what others acquire with
great difficulty. On the other hand, the former are often very
unruly when an attempt is made to teach them a move-
ment which the latter will learn at once. In breaking, we
should therefore pay great attention to the peculiarities of
each horse, and should not be discouraged if we do not obtain
a result in the time laid down in a book.
Thus, I have had horses which learned the Spanish walk
in a week, and others which required three months with the
same method of instruction.
master, he has only to " show fight. " The rider ought, nevertheless, to keep
cool, and never lose his temper, or at least, not to give way to anger, beyond
allowing it to stimulate his energy, and to make him forget the dangers of the
struggle. :
By such faults, the breaking of a horse, instead of being finished, becomes per-
verted. The slightest fault which is tolerated on one day, becomes aggravated on
the morrow, and is converted into a vice which cannot be cured later on, except
by the most severe battles. A broken horse is not a machine which requires
only to be woundup, but is a living creature who continually tries to escape from
the "aids" of his rider, and who requires to be constantly kept in the
discipline of work,
17*
26o HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
With certain light and well-shaped horses, I have obtained
changes of the leg at the canter almost immediately ; although
the majority of horses generally require six months to
learn to do it properly. The same can be said of everything
in riding.
SHOULDER-IN AT THE CANTER.
I have put demi-voltes at the canter into ordinary riding,
because one might require, when hacking, to take a few steps
at the canter on two tracks, in a more or less correct manner,
in order to get out of somebody's way. I will now take
up the study of the canter in high-school riding.
When the horse doss demi-voltes correctly at the canter, I
try by shoulder-in work at the canter, to bring his shoulders away
from the wall. For this, the horse has been admirably prepared
by work on two tracks at the school walk, and further by
demi-voltes at the canter.
I start my horse at a canter on the near fore, and being on
the right track, I keep him on it for a few strides. I then
carry my hands to the right, in order to bring his shoulders
away from the wall, but only about a yard. I work my right
leg strongly, in order to carry the haunches from the right to
the left ; whilst my left leg receives, so to speak, the haunches,
which my right leg has just sent it, and throws the impulse on
the hand. In fact, the left leg presses the horse forward, and
thus prevents him from getting behind his bridle. It also
regulates the pace by preventing the animal from sidling off to
the left. If there is nothing to check the speed of the pace to
the side, whether at the walk, trot, or canter, the horse will
fatally regulate his pace, and will rush to the side in order to
get out of hand, that is to say, he will no longer keep on two
tracks. It is therefore necessary, in order for the movement
to be regular, that the rider can regulate the cadence at all
paces, and that he always keeps his legs close to the sides of
SHOULDER-IN AT THE CANTER. 261
the horse, in order to keep him in hand, and to be able to make
him go forward at any moment.*
I have said that I carry the hands to the right in order to
bring the shoulders away from the wall. The pressure of the
left rein on the neck should be the only means employed to
bring the shoulders to the right, and it should cease the moment
the shoulders leave the wall, under pain of stopping the
shoulders. We should instantly carry the hands to the left ;
the left rein acting directly to its own side, and the right rein
pressing, in its turn, on the neck to push the shoulders to the
left. This is an effect of the left diagonal, The left rein, by
lightly drawing the forehand to the left,*!* prevents the hind
quarters from going in advance of the fore hand. In " two
tracks," the haunches are always inclined to go in front of
* Fig. 53. ^Germinal at the canter: shoulder-in ; going from right to left.
This is the second period of the canter, and the right diagonal is in support.
The right hock is about to be extended, and the near fore has not yet come
down.
Fig. 54. — Germinal at the canter : shoulder-in ; going from left to right.
Left diagonal in support.
f ig- 55. ^Germinal shoulder-in at the canter ; going from left to right in
complete rassenibler. We will note that the horse gains less ground, and
especially, that the canter of the rassembler is in four time, namely, near hind,
off hind, near fore, off fore. In Fig. 55, the oft' hind has just been put down
after the near hind, and the near fore — which, in the ordinary canter, would be
put down at the same time as the off hind, so as to make the third time, namely
the left diagonal in support — has not yet been put down. This canter is there-
fore in four time. It should be noted that there is a moment when the off hind
and near fore, which form the left diagonal, are in support at the same time ;
but what makes the four time is the fact that the off hind precedes a little the
support of the near fore.
t For a long time, like all riding masters since the time of Baucher, I bent
the horse's neck to the side he was going ; but I found out that this was a mistake
because nothing is more liable to stop propulsion. I now restrict myself to
lightly inclining the head of the animal to the side he is going by only very
slightly bending the neck. The rein of the side opposite to which he is moving
can then have its full effect to push the fore hand, to keep the horse straight,
and to secure the maximum amount of propulsion, by its combination with the
other rein and with the .egs.
262 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
the shoulders, especially in demi-voltes, which is a fault we
should carefully check ; because the moment the haunches
go before the shoulders in an oblique line, the horse is behind
the bit.
Immediately after I do similar work for the shoulder-in at
the canter, from left to right.*
PIROUETTES AT THE CANTER.
In the pirouette at the canter, the horse's hind legs ought, so
to speak, to " mark time " at that pace, while pivoting round,
in order that the haunches may remain on the same line as the
shoulders, which describe a circle round them. A horse
should on no account rest continuously on one of his hind
legs, as some authors maintain, for if he does so, he will stop
cantering.
Before pirouettes are required at the canter, they should be
taught at the walk, with the horse very well rassembh^'d. With
this object, I place my horse in the centre of the school. If I
wish to make a pirouette, with the shoulders turning round the
croup from left to right, I carry my hands to the right, the
right rein drawing the head to the right, and the left rein
pressing both the neck and the shoulders to the right. Both
legs are firmly closed, the left leg being carried a little back,
to fix the croup and to prevent it turning, whilst the right leg
presses the horse up to his bridle, so as to prevent him getting
behind his bit. This work requires great delicacy and light-
ness of hand. If the hands are too strongly used from left to
right, their action will cause derangement of the shoulders, but
not a pirouette. If the hands feel the reins too strongly from
front to rear, the horse will get behind his bit.
When the horse fully understands this work and does it
* I do not allude to the shoulder-to-the-wall ; because I regard it as a bad
exercise in which the horse is really held by the wall, so that he is no longer
under the guidance of the rider.
tfi
PIROUETTES AT THE CANTER. 269
easily at the walk, I canter him on a rather larger circle, and
gradually shorten his stride ; not from front to rear, but by
the shoulders, while gaining ground to the side; and I increase
the action of my legs, in order to keep up the speed. The
hind legs ought to " mark time " at the canter ; but, as I have
just said, the horse ought never to turn by continuously resting
on one hind leg. The pirouette ought to be done as slowly as
possible, The great difficulty consists in obtaining a very slow
canter, without losing that pace. I employ reversed means for
the pirouette from right to left.
We can also do at the canter reversed pirouettes, which
consist in making the croup turn round the shoulders. This
is an excellent exercise at the walk, but I never teach it to
my horses at the canter, because the great difficulty in all work
is to make the shoulders move. In reversed pirouettes, on
the contrary, we teach the animal to keep his shoulders
stationary, which is an absurdity in riding. Besides, this
movement is ungraceful, because the fore legs, not being able
to gain ground, remain stiff while stamping on one spot.
On the other hand, ordinary and reversed voltes are
graceful and useful. We obtain them by means of the same
" aids " by which we get pirouettes, only we make the
horse describe a large circle instead of turning him on
one spot.
When we begin a volte, it is difficult to previously determine
the exact diameter of the circle which we are going to make ;
but, nevertheless, this will be the only means for the rider to
know if his horse is right. To find this out, it is sufficient to
trace a circle at the centre of the school. If a horse follows
it exactly, he does so, because his position is good, and he is
well-balanced in propulsion.
When a horse does correctly at the canter all the different
exercises just described, we can ask him to do any movement
at the canter. Having been made supple and obedient by all
270 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
the preceding exercises, he will never refuse to obey the orders
of his rider, provided that the man is patient and tries his best
to make the animal understand.
CHANGES OF LEG AT EACH STRIDE.
I have discussed, in the hacking canter, the changes from
the outward to the inward leg upon a straight line. I shall
now speak of the changes of leg in the school canter. I teach
the horse the changes of leg from within to outside, only when
he does them from outside to within very easily, and of
course I use similar means. In the beginning, we should
carefully avoid getting the horse to do them in the corners
of the school, the outward side of the horse having, by reason
of the turning movement, more ground to cover, which fact
requires a stronger support of the rider's opposite leg * to
prevent the horse going sideways, and to press him forward
on to the hand. We should not require changes of the leg
from within outwards in the corners of the school until he
does them easily in a straight line.f
I never require the shoulder-to-the-wall I at the canter
before obtaining the changes of leg in the air — that is to say,
at the canter without stopping, because when we require the
horse to change from the outward leg to the inward one, he
almost always tries to bring his haunches to the inside, as he
does in the shoulder-to-the-wall, since the same " aids " are
* " Opposite leg " means the leg opposite to that with which the horse changes.
If I am going to the right, and the horse is cantering with the off fore, I use my
right leg to make him change and the left leg to keep him straight. If I do not
receive the horse on my left leg, the croup will inevitably swerve towards the
wall.
1" It is always very difficult to make the horse change correctly when turning.
:J: I have previously explained that I never do, properly speaking, the shoulder-
to-the-wall in the sense that I will not allow my horse to be guided by the wall.
I use this expression because it is the popular one, but as I do this work always
away from the wall in voltes, it would be more correct to call it " shoulder-out."
CHANGES OF LEG AT EACH STRIDE. 271
used. If the rider's inward leg does not instantly receive the
change of leg which his outward leg sends it, the horse will
naturally put his croup sideways. Under these conditions,
the changes of leg are never regular or well done. And, as it
always takes two or three strides to straighten a horse, it
will be impossible to do these changes with short intervals
between them.
On the outside the evil is less, because the wall prevents the
haunches from being brought too much round.
When the changes are correctly done with both legs to
the right and to the left, and especially in the corners of the
school, I only then begin to regulate them, which it is
impossible to do before being certain that the horse will
change each time, and at the moment I want him.
At first I content myself with getting him to change in
every eight or ten strides of the canter, and I demand only a
single change on each leg. If he becomes excited, he should
be stopped and practised again at starting.
To be on good terms with the horse, it is necessary to count
the strides of the canter. For example, when going to the
right, with the horse cantering with the off fore, I count i, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, each number marking a stride. At the sixth I make
him change, and then I make him do the same work with the
near fore leading. If the horse does correctly the two changes
I have asked, I stop him and pat him on the neck. I then
begin again by requiring him to do only a single change on
each leg.
At the end of a few days, when I feel that the horse does
this work freely, I demand four and then six changes, always
at the sixth stride. As long as the horse does this work in a
tranquil frame of mind, I gradually increase the number of
changes at the sixth stride, or, as it is said, at the sixth
" time," but without over-doing it.
If the horse gets excited I stop him, but. I do not pat him.
272 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
for, if I did so, he might think that I was encouraging him to
get excited. I walk him, well in hand, and then I begin again
the lesson, which I do not finish until he has done the changes
steadily.
The pitfall in the changes of leg exist entirely in the pre-
parations which the breaker generally makes to obtain them.
Of course, I do not allude to the preparation of the horse,
which is indispensable, but only to the movements of the
breaker before the exact moment when he wants the horse to
change. It is extremely important that he remains quiet while
the horse is taking his strides, during which the animal should
not change. Thus, during the first five strides he should not
make the slightest movement. He ought not to change his
" aids " until the sixth time, and should then change them
together and with great precision. If at the fourth or fifth
time he prepares to make the horse change, he will be taking
a wrong course, because the horse, being very sensitive to the
" aids " and attentive to the demands of his rider, will become
disunited. If he touches the reins, the forehand will change,
and if he alters the position of his legs, the hind quarters will
change. But as there will be no harmony between the " aids,"
the horse will not change his legs.
It is wrong to blame the horse for becoming disunited,
because in such cases the rider almost always provokes him
to do so, by not remaining perfectly quiet until the decisive
moment.
It also happens that the horse, thinking that he is going on
all right, does not attend to his rider's demand, and anticipates
the order, or what he thinks is the order. Therefore I cannot
too strongly advise the rider to keep absolutely quiet during
the first five strides of the canter.
It happens with all horses, that when they have learned to
do the changes easily, they will do them of their own accord,
and without an indication from the rider. In this case the
CHANGES OF LEG AT EACH STRIDE. 273
horse should be punished, because if we let him take the
initiative, we can get no regularity in the changes.
When I say that he ought to be punished, I mean that the
fault ought to be checked. Thus, if when the horse is canter-
ing on the off fore, he changes before we ask him to do so,
he should simply be touched more sharply than usual with
the left spur, in order to oblige him to rest on the right leg.
Of course we should use the right spur in a similar way,
if the horse has started with the left leg leading. Having
checked the fault in the manner I have indicated, we should
avoid again requiring a change of leg in the air during the
same lesson, as it might confuse the horse. It is better to
go back to the starts, while keeping him for a long time on
the same leg.
If we have checked the same fault several times and have
taken care to pat the animal when he changes only when
we ask him, he will soon understand that he ought not to
do anything without being asked. But, I repeat, we should
do the changes only when we have not been obliged to
punish the animal. It is better to devote several lessons to
checking the fault, in which case the horse will understand
much better, will be quieter, and his breaking will be more
rapid.
I make the horse change at shorter intervals only when he
fully understands what I want him to do. Instead of be-
ginning at the sixth time, I demand the change at the fourth
time, by using always the same means. For the first few
times I content myself with a single change with each leg,
and during the following days I gradually require a greater
number of changes.
We can see that the shorter the interval between the
changes, the greater will be the effort required from the
horse, who is consequently apt to become irritable and con-
fused, in which case he should be halted, walked for some
18
274 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
time, but not patted on the neck. After that, we should
begin again starting at the canter on each leg with the horse
well in hand, without asking him to change, and should not
finish the lesson until he has become perfectly quiet.
Each time that I find any difficulty in the changes of
leg, I go back to starting at the canter, which I find very
profitable. The starts are for the horse, what scales are for
pianists, and steps for dancers.
From four times I do three, then two, and finally one, in
which each stride of the canter ought to be done on a
different leg. I leave a sufficiently long time to elapse be-
tween each of my demands — from four to three, from three to
two, and from two to one.
If we go too fast we will not succeed, for the horse cannot
help making mistakes, because he has not had the chance
of understanding the difference between the changes of leg
demanded at different times.
By going quietly in riding, we shall be certain of suc-
ceeding quickly. Besides, the horse is the one who indicates
to us the number of changes and the interval between them
without spoiling his equilibrium, strength, or lightness.
Only when he is quiet, light in hand, and when he does
the changes with ease, do I obtain the changes in two time,
and then in each stride, during two or three turns round the
school on both hands ; and I make him do the same work
in two times, in voltes and changes of hand. When I am
satisfied with the results obtained, I make him do the
changes at each stride in these movements.
The rider who succeeds in doing the voltes and changes
of hand, while making the horse change very steadily at
each stride, can be satisfied with himself and with his horse,
because he has overcome the great difficulty in riding.
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES." 275
CHANGES OF LEG WITHOUT GAINING GROUND.
To do the changes of leg at the canter without gaining
ground, we should proceed in the same manner as in the
changes at each stride, with only the difference that the horse
should be better in hand.
It might appear that in this movement we should greatly
increase the feeling on the reins, and diminish the pressure
of the legs, in order to make the horse go slower. This
would be a mistake ; for in that case the hands would bring
the hocks away from the centre of the body. We should, on
the contrary, act vigorously with both legs, to keep up pro-
pulsion, without which the canter will be lost. The hand
ought to take possession of this propulsion in a very light
manner, and ought to drive it back to the horse's centre
of gravity, which is close to the rider's legs, when the animal
is well balanced.
Changes which are made without gaining any ground are
hardly perceptible to the eye, on account of the very short
extension of the fore and hind legs. Hence we have to be
very close to the horse to see these changes.
We owe the invention of this difficult and complicated
exercise to Baucher, who did it brilliantly on Turban ; but
not on Partisan, as many assert.
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES."
The natural passage is a very well collected, short and high
trot, which is regularly cadenced from one diagonal to the
other. But to fully merit the title of passage, the fore legs,
being raised high, but gently, should pause for a moment
in the air, with the knees and feet bent. The hind legs are
raised and the hocks and pasterns are bent and carried
18*
276 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
under the centre. To sum up : all four legs should be raised
high and in cadence, so that the horse is suspended in the
air from one diagonal to the other. This natural passage,
which is graceful and brilliant, ought also to be slow, and as
high as possible.*
We should bear in mind that no horse will do the passage
of his own accord ; for it can be obtained only by teaching.
Some horses can be very easily taught the passage, especially
those which have slow paces and bend their knees ; that is
to say, those which have high action before and behind, and
bend their knees and hocks — in a word, slow and high
action.
A horse which goes stiffly, without bending the knees or
hocks, is not fit for this movement. I will not go so far as to
say that he cannot be taught it, but supposing that he is made
to do it, he moves ungracefully, because he looks stiff, on
account of dragging his feet.
It is extremely difficult to explain how the natural passage
is obtained. The first thing is to rassembler the horse,
without doing which the passage is not possible ; but collecting
him \i not enough, for he has also to be taught to passage.
Having perfectly collected him, we ought to use the spur,
in order to obtain the raising of the legs, which gives the
passage.
While riding the horse at a well-balanced walk, I make him
trot, by strongly closing my legs, while keeping him well in
* Fig. 56. — Germinal at the passage : right diagonal in the air.
Fig. 57. — Markir at the passage : left diagonal in the air. In these two
illustrations, we will note the elevation of the legs, the fore one being raised
much higher than the hind. The spur is the only means for obtaining this
result. The contrary takes place with horses broken by the cutting whip, which,
by being applied to the croup, fatally produces a predominant elevation of the
hind quarters.
In Fig. 57, the fetlock being extended almost to the point of touching the
ground, is preparing the energetic spring which will give height; but in Fig. 56,
the forward movement is the more accentuated one of the two.
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES." 281
hand, to prevent him extending himself. Not being able to
extend his legs, he raises them, and thus gains in height what
he loses in length. At the same time, with the spur helping,
he makes, so to speak, little jumps from one diagonal to the
other, which are the beginning of the passage. But the
cadence is not yet correct, because he always becomes irri-
tated at first, as he does not know what we want him to do.
During the first few days we should take care not to keep
at him too long, if we wish to avoid making him play-up.
The horse, being irritated by the spurs, and not under-
standing why they are used on him in this work, which is
strange to him, sometimes gets into a state of desperation,
through fear of the spurs, which are always close to his
sides.*
If, at this time, we try to make the horse do what we want,
we shall be wrong, and shall probably lose the battle ; because,
when the quietest horse becomes maddened, he will fight like a
demon.
We should keep calm, and at the slightest sign of cadence,
that is to say, at the first, or later on, at the second time, we
should stop using the " aids," pat the horse's neck, give him
time to become quiet, and begin again.
A horseman who has great delicacy and tact, will stop the
animal at the first time and pat him. But the less tact he has,
the less capable is he of judging if the time is in cadence.
Such a man will continue in his attempts to catch the cadence,
and will succeed only in upsetting the nerves of his horse.
These remarks explain the fact that a clever and tactful horse-
man will obtain all he wants from his mount, without making
him either vicious or unsound. Being able to recognise the
* It generally happens during the breaking, that one day, or during several
days, the irritated horse makes up his mind, plays his last card, and acts in the
most furious manner. When the breaker, by means of tact and energy, has over-
come his final resistance, the animal is submissive, but is not broken.
282 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
slightest sign of obedience, he immediately stops the work, in
order to make the horse understand, by pats on the neck, that
he has done well. The quickness with which he perceives the
slightest signs, saves him from overtaxing and disgusting the
horse, and provoking him to battle, w^hich will wear them
both out.
The unskilful rider, who is slow in catching the cadence, will
continue to use the spur, in order to obtain several cadenced
times, and to be sure he is right, and wall thus punish the
horse, w^ho, not knowing why he is punished, will defend
himself, while the rider is spurring him. The result will be,,
that when he wants the horse to again do the passage^ the
animal will think he is going to be punished, and will become
mad at the approach of the spurs.
Hence, the important point is to recognise the slightest signs
of good will, and to be content with little. If the horse does
not fear the approach of the legs, and if we are not too
exacting, a time will always arrive when he will take up the
cadence oi She. passage with ease and pleasure. We may then
ask more ; because, as the horse understands us, there will be
no fear of over-exciting his nervous system.
All the work on " two tracks " can be made at the passage,
but it is difficult to do it correctly.*
The artificial passage is another form, which is only an
adjunct of the Spanish walk. It is an wvlCo\\&c\&^ passage,
and consequently it is opposed to all the principles of
equitation. I practised it in my youth, when I had not
* Fig. 58. — Markir at the passage on "two tracks" from left to right, with
the left diagonal in the air. The position is that of " two tracks," but the
action is that of 'Cn^ passage.
Fig- 59- — Markir at iht passage on "two tracks " from left to right, with the
right diagonal in the air. Here the movement on " two tracks " is well marked.
The near hind, which gains but little ground, is well raised. The off fore, after
having been raised, like the off fore in Fig. 58, is carried away from the near fore,
in order to gain ground to the right.
fa
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES." 287
enough tact to obtain the natural passage. I never teach it
nowadays.*
The piaffer is only a natural passage without gaining
ground. There are two kinds of piaffers : one, which is slow,
high and difficult, and which some horses will not stand ; the
other, which is hurried and close to the ground, and which
almost all horses can learn.
The high and slow piaffer differs from the natural passage,
only by its being done entirely without gaining ground. We
can obtain it by shortening the passage step by step, until it is
done on one spot. The piaffer therefore requires more
rassembler, and therefore more use of the legs and more
delicacy of the hand, than the passage.-f
When a horse has not been taught the passage, the piaffer
will be a consequence of the walk. A vigorous and impatient
horse can easily be taught the hurried piaffer, which will not
be regular unless he has been instructed in accordance with
the rules of equitation.
It is not enough for the horse to be lively and vigorous, in
order to make him do the piaffer by exciting him with the
cutting whip, legs, or clicks of the tongue. By these means
we will no doubt succeed in making him impatient, but not in
teaching him the manner in which he should put his feet on
the ground ; and we may be certain that if he puts them
* I could make similar observations respecting certain artificial airs which
I have long given up with horses which I break for myself ; not because they are
opposed to the principles of equitation, but because I do not find them
sufficiently scientific ; as for instance, the Spanish walk, reversed pirouettes on
three legs, ordinary and reversed pirouettes with the legs crossed, reining back
without reins, and rocking the fore and hind quarters.
t Fig. 60. — Markir at the piaffer : right diagonal in the air.
Fig. 61. — Markir at the piaffer : left diagonal in the air.
In these two illustrations, we will note the energy which is displayed and which
is marked by the fact that the fetlocks come down to the ground, and by the great
elevation of the fore legs, which are raised higher than the hind ones ; contrary
to what takes place in the piaffer taught by the cutting whip.
288 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
down regularly, he will do so by mere chance. Almost
always, the hind legs will be raised and put down at the same
time, and consequently the movement will not be a pace.
We should teach the horse the piaffer by calming him
down, because he will not understand what is wanted of him,
unless he is in a quiet state of mind.
To obtain the piaffer, we ought to collect the horse, by
closing the legs, until we touch him with the spurs. It is
difficult to explain in a book the exact moment when the
spur should reinforce the action of the leg ; in fact, this is
evidently a question of tact. It is easier to show this on the
ground, because one can then see if the rider uses the spurs too
much or too little. As I have already said, the office of the
spur is to make the horse yield to the pressure of the leg,
when that pressure is not sufficient by itself. Besides, it is
necessary for the horse to feel the spurs in order to remain
rassemble'd* Also, to make a horse piaffer, we must pre-
vent him going forward, and if we do not use the spurs, he will
infallibly throw himself to the right or left by forcing the
respective leg. Therefore, we should use the legs sufficiently
to steady the horse. Nevertheless, to hold him in check, the
spurs should brush his coat.
To get the piaffer •!■ we should use light pricks of the
spurs ; X and, as in all other cases, we should at the begin-
ning be contented with two times.
* The question has often been discussed, whether the spurs are an "aid " or a
punishment. As I have already (said, they are sometimes one, sometimes the
other, according to need. During breaking, they ought always to be an "aid," and
ought not to become a punishment, unless the animal openly rebels, in which case
we should try to find out if the disobedience is due to pure caprice on the part of
the horse or to our fault. If caprice is the cause, the spurs ought to punish
him. We should remember in all cases that the English very rightly call
the spurs "persuaders."
t The hurried piaffer and the slow piaffer are obtained by the same means.
I practise only the slow piafifer.
X This is what La Gueriniere admirably calls " the '.delicate pinch of the
spurs. ' '
fe
19
h
19^
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES." 293
I touch my horse on the right and on the left, but almost
simultaneously.* My right spur brings the off hind under the
animal's body, which causes the near fore to be raised ; and
my left spur, acting in its turn at the exact moment when the
left diagonal is in the air, produces a similar effect on the
right diagonal. I thus obtain the two first times of the
piaffer ; but at the beginning these two times ought to follow
each other so closely as to form, so to speak, a single time,-f-
exactly like in fencing, when the swordsman makes " one, two "
very close together. ;{:
It often happens that the horse will plunge on feeling the
first hurried touches of the spurs. If he bounds forward, not
much harm will result, and we will learn that we have used
the spurs too strongly. We should therefore employ them
more lightly when we begin again.
If at this period of the breaking we often repeat these two
first times of the piaffer, the horse will quickly understand
* In fact, if I exclusively attack one side without immediately receiving the
horse on the opposite leg, I will succeed only in sending his haunches to the side.
t If I allow an interval between them, there will be an alternate separation
of the legs to the right and to the left, as in a kind of rocking.
I It follows, from what I have said, that these two first times are necessarily
those of a hurried piaffer. When we begin the piaffer, we cannot foretell what
will happen. As a rule, the horse will try to hurry it, on account of the spurs
making him impatient. Besides, the hurried piaffer being lower than the higher
piaffer, will require less exertion. Having obtained the piaffer of any kind, it
needs regulating, which will test the skill of the breaker. The difficulty is to
prevent the hurried piaffer occurring, or, rather, to change it into the slow piaffer,
by giving it height brought on by the rasseuibler. The more the rassembler, the
greater the height. The slow and high piaffer is obtained by energetic action of
the legs, lightness of hand, and, above all things, delicate tact in combining the
"aids." In the hurried piaffer, the legs are kept stiff, on account of their being
raised but little off the ground. In the high piaffer, the biped, which is in the
air, is greatly bent, while gaining height, and the fetlocks of the biped which is
on the ground almost touch it (Fig. 6i), so as to be able, in their turn, to raise
the body by their spring.
When we go from the passage to the piaffer by shortening the passage, we can
regulate the times of the piaffer more easily on account of the cadence already
obtained ; but the tact of the rider is not the less necessary.
294 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
what wa want him to do. As soon as he correctly marks the
first two times, without showing any wish to escape from the
spurs, we may try to get him to do four, six or more, and we
can continue to increase the number, as long as we hold him
easily in this position ; but we should not overdo it.
We should, of course, stop the piaffer and send the horse
forward, well in hand, the moment we feel he can escape from
us, whether by bringing his haunches sidesways, doing a
half-rear or reining back, which is still worse.
In the first case, we should straighten the haunches by a
sharp touch of the spur, given on the side to which he throws
himself, and by way of punishment.
If he makes a half-rear, we are forced to slacken the reins,
to avoid an accident ; but the spurs should be kept close to
the sides (Fig. 65) ; because if that were not done, he would
constantly rear. The action of the spurs ought to be increased
by small touches until the horse has become quiet in hand, in
which case he has " given in."
Running back is the most difficult and dangerous fault to
overcome. If, on being lightly touched, he violently runs
back, the reins should he left quite loose, and the spurs should
be used more vigorously. Repeated touches of the spurs
close to the girths are a means which the horse cannot resist,
if they are energetically continued. Besides, I have already
said that we should never spur a horse which is stationary^
until we have taught him to go freely forward on being
touched by the spurs. Therefore, I do not incur the liability
of combatting the defence which I have described. If, how-
ever, I had to do so, I would easily settle the matter by
repeated attacks of the spurs, which act like the roll of a
drum. But if, on account of insufficient breaking, we have to
deal with this defence, and if we cannot continue the repeated
attacks of the spurs behind the girths, we should take a
cutting whip or cane, or get an assistant armed with a driving
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES." 295
whip. In any case, we must make the animal go forward at
all cost. Here we are in a pitched battle, and we have got to
know whether the man or the horse is to be master. We
should on no account yield. Any means will do, because we
must win the battle, otherwise the horse will be restive. Of
course, I do not advise violent spurring or other severe
measures, unless the horse obstinately runs back, in which
case the only alternative left to the breaker is not to be
beaten.
If the horse finds out that he can escape work by running
back, he will become the master of his rider ; and every
time the rider uses the spurs, no matter for what movement,
the horse will run back. If the man does not inflict exemp-
lary punishment, ivJiile the animal is running back, he had
best give up the breaking, and — which is still wiser — the horse.
We ought to remain cool, however energetically we may
act. If we give way to anger, we will become more quickly
exhausted than the horse. With this proviso, punish the
horse coolly and severely until he learns that the more he goes
back, the more pain he will suffer, and consequently he will go
forward, in which case we should immediately pat him on the
neck, get off, and stop the lesson.
It does not matter whether the struggle takes place at the
beginning or middle of the lesson, but as soon as the horse
yields we should stop it, because, if we recommence the work,
we cannot be sure of obtaining a second concession in the same
lesson, especially if the horse has been obstinate for a long
time. Besides, we are both tired, and the animal can offer
only passive resistance, which is the most terrible of all. We
may kill him by blows, but he will not stir. We have gone
beyond his strength, and by persisting we will succeed only in
disgusting him for ever.
We should therefore profit by the smallest concession, and
should, above all things, avoid prolonging the punishment when
296 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
the horse goes forward. Otherwise, he will not know when he
does wrong or when he does right, because he gets beaten
whether he goes forward or back. I therefore particularly
advise the breaker never to lose his temper, although retaining
the utmost energy.
I once had a black thorough-bred, called Negro, which I
rode in public for four or five years. He never failed me in
work, although he was peevish and screamed when touched
with the spur. When I began to break him, he ran back
immediately I closed my legs.
For two months he did not stop running back under me
during a lesson of twenty minutes each day. I was in despair.
All the breakers of my acquaintance said that I would never
succeed in making him go forward, yet he gave in at last. He
even became an excellent lady's horse, and never relapsed into
the troublesome vice, of which I had great trouble to cure him.
To succeed in this, I used the spurs only by touches. They
should never be kept stuck in the animal's sides.* The spurs
which I used were very sharp, and I applied them, as I always
do, as close as possible to the girths.i* I, of course, took care
to pat the animal on the neck the moment he went forward.
I must, however, admit that after a struggle during twenty
minutes without ceasing, I was completely exhausted, and so
was my horse. To break such an animal, one must be young,
have a very strong seat and good loins, because they are the
first to get tired.
The reason for ceasing to keep the horse in the same place,
* In fact, it is the pain which is renewed at each moment that makes the
horse fly from the spur. If it is kept against his side he will rest on it, and will
inevitably jib.
t There, and only there, will the touch- of the spur give impulsion. Its touch
further back will cause forward movement, but without impulsion, and further, it
will tickle the horse, on account of the far greater sensibility of that part. Only
a touch, as near as possible to the girths, brings the hock under the centre of the
body ; hence the impulsion. I am always tearing my girths to ribbons.
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES." 297
during the three defences I have mentioned, is to remain master
of him. If he resists the attacks of the spurs, when he is
stationary, I make him go forward at all hazards. I then close
my legs, and begin again, until he yields. The point upon
which I insist is, that we are always master of a horse when we
can make him go forward.
These observations, of course, do not apply only to the
piaffer and passage. My reason for having dwelt on this
subject so long, is that the means I have mentioned are always
the same which I use for combatting defences — always the
same which the horse adopts when he is touched by the spur,
while he is kept in one place.*
Men of the new school, of whom I had occasion to speak in
the preceding chapter, employ, in order to teach the piaffer,
means not less strange, though more brutal, than that which
they use for teaching the Spanish walk. They open the door
of the school, and place the horse, with his head turned to the
side of the stable, close to the opening of this door, to make
him impatient. One man is on his back, another holds the
caveson, and a third stands behind the animal, with a driving
whip in his hand.f They then put on each pastern a leather
hobble, to which is attached a piece of wood in the shape of
an &g'g.
When the horse moves a foot, or rather when he puts it down,
* Many breakers, when alluding to horses which have got the better of them,
say, in order to excuse themselves, that nothing can be done with animals which
kick, rear, or run back each time they feel the spur. The truth is that their
method is faulty! Sometimes they boast that they punished their horse so
severely that he could not get up for several days, a statement which only
proves their brutality. In the worst battle with a horse, I have never ill-treated
him to such an extent as to bring him down. I have never even fatigued him
so much as to make him unable to resume his work on the following day.
t These gentlemen only work all together— always several tormentors for one
victim. Besides, they are so convinced that they cannot do otherwise, that
they scoff at those who say that a breaker ought to ride his horse and break
him without the help of anyone, a fact which appears to them to be simply
impossible.
298 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
the egg strikes the coronet, and makes him raise the foot.
The man in the saddle uses the spurs, the one who is in
rear uses the driving whip, and the operator who holds the
caveson, and is in front of the animal's head, prevents him
advancing by giving him blows on the nose with the caveson.
The horse, thus imprisoned, shows great impatience, and as the
egg strikes his coronet, and makes him raise his foot each
time he puts it down, he performs a kind of hurried piaffer,
which is neither graceful nor regular. Besides, by this
method they teach a horse to piaffer in front of the stable
door, which no doubt is very ingenious, and does not require
much skill. It has, however, the drawback that the moment
the horse's head is turned away from the stable, his impatience
vanishes, and he stops the piaffer. This is a machine-made
horse. I shall not go further in this description, for my
intention is only to give a sketch of the system of breaking
used by the new school, who use the same means for every
kind of work. I do not undertake to describe these means.
The horse which has been taught the piaffer, only by the
combination of reins and legs, will do the piaffer anywhere, at
the wish of his rider, no matter when or where.
It is no less true that the system of the new school is
practised almost everywhere. Horses are broken now without
being ridden, and by means analogous to those by which one
would break in monkeys and nanny goats. In Vienna this
system is sarcastically called " Pudeldressiriing " (poodle
breaking).*
It is easy to understand how the piaffer, which is learned
under these conditions, is always bad. At first, progress is
* In the same category we should place the recommendation made by certain
authors, to hum a tune in two time to a horse which is being taught the piaffer
or passage.
I have never broken a horse with any music. My only orchestra is the
spurs. When my horses hear music for the first time it puts them out, but
they soon take to it.
PIAFFERS AND "PASSAGES."
299
impossible. Afterwards, as the action of the cutting whip or
driving whip causes the croup to be raised, the hind legs are
raised higher than the fore ones, and the neck is necessarily
depressed. But in the piaffer, as in the passage, the fore legs
ought always have the loftier action, which is the case when
these movements are taught only by the help of the hands
Fig. 62. — Teaching the piafifer by means of a cutting whip.
and legs ; because the hocks are then brought well under the
body, and the neck and forehand are consequently raised.*
We can understand that the horses of the new school are
never broken in the true sense of the word. At best they
are machines and automatons which the first comer can make
* Compare Figs. 60 and 61 with Fig. 62, which is copied from a photograph in
a recent work that describes the method of teaching the piafifer by means of
a cutting whip. In Fig. 62 the position of the head and neck is faulty, and the
forehand is so over-loaded that the animal cannot raise the fore leg, which ought
to be in the air, as in Figs. 60 and 61. In Fig. 62, on the contrary, the horse
simply bends the knee, and the toe touches the ground. He does the piaffer
only with his hind quarters, which are higher than the forehand. Contrary to
the intention of the author, all the vices of the piaffer, a la cutting whip, are
displayed in a striking manner by this illustration.
300 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
do this or that work, if he is only told how, and at what
moment or place he should touch certain parts of the animal's
body.
The riding masters of the new school take good care not to
break thorough-breds, because they know by experience that
wiry, energetic and strong horses will not let themselves be
tortured. In order to excuse themselves, they maintain that
thorough-breds are wanting in suppleness ; the fact being that
thorough-breds are the most supple of all horses, but the least
patient under pain.
Besides, we owe to this new school all those ladies who, not
being able or not wishing to ride, find it much more easy to
buy a machine-made horse and work him by touching him
with a cutting whip on the legs, head, croup, and a little
everywhere else, in a most ungraceful manner.
True lovers of horsemanship would not engage in this kind
of equitation, which is made up of contortions, and which con-
sists almost always of making the horse drag himself on his
knees, stretch out his head on the ground like a calf which is
waiting to have its throat cut, walk on balustrades, etc.
The public, knowing little of equitation, applauds in any
case, but it is sad that the art of equitation should have
fallen so low.
In order to know if the rider really possesses horse know-
ledge, it is enough to look at the horse. If the animal is
light, well placed, full of impulsion, and does all his move-
ments with so much spirit that he appears to work with
pleasure, we may be certain that he is not a pupil of the
new school, and is still less a machine-made horse, to which
I have already alluded.
I may add that a man should ride without a whip, and
that a lady should use it only to supply the want of the
right leg ; that is to say, to strike on the right side and
only a little behind the girths.
THE "PASSAGE" AND SPANISH TROT. 301
There is no doubt that the method adopted by the new
school is the one which those who hate work would like to
follow, because it is within the reach of anyone who would
like to practise it after a few days' study. On the contrary,
we may see a true horseman work for years without learning
much. A horseman uses only his hands and legs, with such
delicacy and with such slight movements that the spectator
can hardly see them.
To sum up, the new school breaks a horse by means of
tricks, on which account the first comer who knows these
tricks can obtain certain results.
The old school is to the new school what the piano is to
the barrel organ. Long study and great perseverance are
required to be able to play well on the former instrument,
and even then success is not always obtained ; but all that
is wanted to grind the barrel organ is an arm sufficiently
strong to turn the handle. In the former case, one can
become an artist by work and patience ; but, in the latter,
one has only to make a noise.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE " PASSAGE " AND
SPANISH TROT.
Even among those who ride well, there are many who
confuse the passage with the Spanish trot.
In the passage, the knees and fetlocks are bent ; in the
Spanish trot, they are extended.
In the passage, the less ground is covered, the better is the
movement, because the time of suspension is better marked,
and the horse appears to raise himself perpendicularly.
In the Spanish trot, on the contrary, we should try to cover
as much ground as possible in each stride. To be brilliant,
the pace should be high and long, but not hurried ; because,
if it is too fast, the fore legs will not be able to mark the
time of suspension.
302 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
There is another trot which is called the " swimmer," in
which the horse ought to trot as fast as he can, while
indicating with his fore legs a time of suspension in the
air. But, as the speed is great, the period of suspension is
much less marked than in the Spanish trot. I do not think
that this is a school movement. A horse which trots well
with his shoulders and knees will do it naturally. I content
myself with merely mentioning it.
SERPENTINE AT THE TROT.
This movement consists in making a horse take four side
steps to the left and four to the right at a well-collected trot.
During the whole time the horse ought to go on two tracks,
the forehand gaining a little more ground at the side to which
the animal is proceeding, so as to prevent the haunches from
going in front of the shoulders.
This movement appears simple, but it is very difficult to do
correctly. We can quickly see that there is only a very short
interval to put the horse back from one diagonal to the other
gently and smoothly. All the merit and all the difficulty of
this exercise consist in taking exactly four steps to each side.
If the animal sometimes takes three, and sometimes five, there
is no difficulty, merit, or interest.
CANTER ON THREE LEGS.
We can make a horse canter on three legs, in which case
the three first times of the canter are done in a rassemble'd
canter (in four times), and the fourth time is done in the air.
If, for example, we are cantering to the right, the off fore
should be held up, without touching the ground.
Few horses can do in a brilliant manner the canter on three
legs. Many can succeed in doing it ; but only a very energetic
animal can hold his leg well extended in the air, without its
touching the ground, during the whole period of the movement,
CANTER ON THREE LEGS. 303
only under which condition is this exercise interesting and
briUiant.
If the reader has attentively followed my explanations, he
will know that accustoming the horse to the pressure of the
legs prepares him for this school movement, which is very
difficult for the animal to understand and do. In fact, up to
this, he has learned only to raise, extend, and place his legs on
the ground, one after the other ; but now he is required to
extend only one leg, and to keep it in that position.
The canter with the off fore in the air has only three beats
on the ground — the first made by the near hind, the second by
the off hind, and the third by the near fore. The fourth time
is marked in the air by the off fore, which is fully extended
and kept as high as possible.
Before putting a horse to this work, we should wait until he
is perfectly broken, and until he will offer no resistance. At
this time, I have at my disposal two movements which have
been separately learned, namely, the ordinary canter to the
right, and the extension of the off fore. From the combina-
tion of these two exercises, in which my left leg is my chief
helper, I obtain the canter to the right on three legs.
It seems, in theory, that I ought to easily obtain the canter
to the right on three legs, by vigorously using the left spur.
But, in practice, this is not so simple ; because, having put my
horse into the canter, the use of the left spur will do no good ;
for it will make him bring his haunches to the right, or get
away, but it will not make him extend his off fore.
We should therefore canter the horse to the right, and,
having halted him, make him extend his off fore. When he
has done this, we should pat him on the neck, and then begin
again several times.
When the horse extends the leg without difficulty during
the halt, we should make him go through the same
performance, during a shorter halt.
304 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
As the momentum is not entirely checked during this half-
halt, the horse who expects to raise his leg during the halt,
anticipates the halt, and almost always does a time of the
canter with his leg in the air, in which case we should halt
him, pat him on the neck, and stop the lesson.
We can see that these two movements, which at first were
separate, are beginning to be formed into one ; but that is not
sufficient.
When the horse does this work easily, and without stiffness,
we ought to demand the extension of the leg without a half-
halt, by simply taking care to decrease the speed, and to
raise the forehand. We should hasten slowly, and for a
long time should be content with two or three strides during
which the leg is completely extended, and above all things
sustained.
If we wish to stimulate the horse to such an extent that he
will hold his leg in the air, we should, ourselves, display great
energy ; because, not only is the office of our left leg to make
the horse keep his off fore in the air, but it also, in combination
with the right leg, ought to keep him at the canter, by bringing
his hind legs under him. In other words, we maintain the
canter by a strong pressure of both legs, and at the same time
we make the animal hold his off fore in the air, by small and
repeated touches of the left spur.
We ought to use the right leg as vigorously as the left, in
order to prevent the horse carrying his hind quarters to the
right. If he goes sideways, we should stop him and put him
straight, before recommencing the movement ; because, when
he places himself obliquely, he will be deficient in propulsion,
and in this position we shall be able to obtain only the exten-
sion of the leg or the canter ; but not both together. It is
therefore indispensable to keep the animal very straight, and
to give him a point of support on the right snaffle rein, in
order to facilitate the upholding of the right leg.
"PASSAGE" TO THE REAR. 305
The canter on three legs may be done either to the right
or to the left*
I do not know if others taught this exercise before me. In
any case, I have never seen it done by anyone else, and I
have never met with its description in any treatise on
equitation.
" PASSAGE " TO THE REAR.
This is a very difficult exercise to do ; because ground has
to be gained to the rear, while maintaining the diagonal steps
in a well-cadenced manner, and preserving the same elevation
of the hind legs, as in the forward movement. In every
retrograde movement, the hind feet have a tendency to keep
as close to the ground as possible. Unless we are absolutely
sure of ourselves — as we ought to be, when we face such
difficulties — we often produce, against our will, too strong an
effect from front to rear, and thus transfer the weight from the
forehand to the hind quarters, which consequently becomes
lowered. To obviate this fault, we should make the horse
* Fig. 63. Germinal at the canter to the left on three legs ; in hand, but not
rassembWA. The canter is in four time, although there is no rassembler, because
the energetic uplifting of the forehand keeps in the air, even the leg which is not
extended.
Fig. 64. Germinal at the canter to the right on three legs ; rasseinbU 'd.
We can see how much the action of the spur, which is necessary for the
rassembler; increases the extension of the leg in the air, and increases the height
of the action, by bringing the hind quarters under the body.
Fig. 65 represents Germinal at the half -rear with the off fore extended, at the
moment when I demanded the canter to the right on three legs in the rassembler.
The horse had begun by a lazy extension of the leg ; but a sharper touch of the
spur has made him do this half -rear, while at the same time he extends his
off fore perfectly. In fact, this is a case of absolute obedience ; and the horse,
immediately after the half-rear, starts into the canter to the right on three legs, in
the rassembler. The photograph shown in Fig. 64 was taken immediately after
this]^half-rear.
We can see, agreeably to what I have advised, that the spurs are applied to the
sides during the half-rear, and the reins slackened. In fact, the reins are much
less tight in Fig. 65 than in Fig. 64, in which the hands feel them ; but in Fig.
65 the hands are carried forward on the neck.
20
3o6 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
rein back by the seat, as I have described (p. 247), and not by
the reins.
It is a mistake to think that we can easily go from the
forward passage to the backward passage^ to obtain which it
is necessary to make the transition through the natural, slow
and high piaffer, which is only the passage without gaining
ground.
It is only when the horse piaffes correctly, that we can try
to gain a few inches of ground to the rear at each step. With
this object I increase the pressure of the legs. I try to
rassembler the horse without pulling him back by the reins,
and I sit well down into the saddle, while leaning strongly on
each footfall.
On account of the rassembler being carried to its maximum,
the equilibrium and mobility of the horse are such that the
slightest displacement of the body of the rider can draw
the horse in any direction, as for instance, to the rear, which
is the point we are considering.
- This means of obtaining the passage to the rear is long
and difficult ; but it is the only one which gives a good
result.
SEE-SAW PIAFFER.
In the see-saw piaffer, the off legs ought to be raised and
put down in the same place, while the near ones make a
beat forward and a beat backward, while always coming back
to the same spot.
The near legs ought not only to mark the going and
coming from front to rear, but the near hind quarter and
near shoulder ought also to accentuate this movement without
any participation on the part of the off legs, which should
only piaffe regularly without gaining ground.
Baucher did this piaffer with great t^clat on a mare called
Stades. I have taught this school movement to four horses.
M
E
20^
^.'^ ^
p^
sc
."^
SEE-SAW PIAFFER. 313
which did it more or less brilhantly, according to their degrees
of energy.
It is very difficiilt to explain how to teach the see-saw
piaffer, but I will try to do so.
It will at first be seen that this movement should not be
required from any horse, unless he can do the slow and high
piaffer. As such an animal, when doing this exercise, has
extreme mobility, the slightest feeling on the reins will be
sufficient to make him bring a leg a little back, in the same
way that the smallest increase in the pressure of the spur
will cause him to bring a leg a little forward.
Being at the piaffer, we ought, by means of the legs, to make
the horse bring his near hind under him where he puts it
down. The right diagonal being in support, the near fore —
which, under the same action of the legs of the rider, has been
carried forward at the moment when the near hind is placed
under the animal's body— remains held up in the air, the
knee bent, and the off hind also in the air (Fig. 66). Immedi-
ately the hand ought to act, in order to bring back the near
fore, which is about to be placed behind the off fore, and
which forms, along with the off hind, the left diagonal sup-
port ; whilst the near hind, in its turn, does a time in the
air, and the off fore performs its movement in the piaffer.*
(Fig. 67.)
We can see that in the forward movement the near
hind is placed in front of the off hind (Fig. 66), and that in
the retrograde movement the near fore is placed behind
the off fore (Fig. 6y). This is the cause of the see-saw action
from the rear to the front.
If the reader understands my explanations he will observe
* On comparing Fig. 67 with Fig. 66, we will see that in the movement to the
rear, the snaffle reins are drawn a little tighter than those of the curb. The angle
of the cheek of the curb is very little more open, and the seat presses the horse
back.
314 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
that this piaffer is done, like the ordinary piaffer, b}- the
diagonal, notwithstanding the see-saw lateral. It is very-
difficult to indicate, with mathematical precision the exact
moment when the rider ought to use any particular rein or
leg ; the action of the two reins and of two legs being made
by a succession of movements which follow each other so
closely that it is almost continuous. Here equestrian tact,
which is the supreme qualit\- of a rider, displa}'s itself in all
its beauty. I can only say that I increase the action of the
right spur to obtain the forward movement of the near hind,
and to help to keep the near fore in the air. But at the same
time I strongly use my left leg to prevent the near hind from
going to the left, because it gets its stimulus from my right
leg.
For the backward movement I feel both reins, the near
rein a little more than the off, at the moment when the near
fore has to be brought back.
During the whole time the rider ought to freely use his
legs and even the spurs, but the off rein hardly at all, and the
near rein very little.
CANTER WITHOUT GAINING GROUND AND CANTER TO
THE REAR.
The canter without gaining ground is a canter which is
shortened as much as possible. It is similar in ever)- way to
the forward canter, except that the legs do not gain ground.
It is very near to the backward canter, which is a regular pace
of four time, exactly like the fonvard canter in the rasseinbler.
It is the most difficult and most complicated school exercise.
My advice is that it should be tried only at the extreme end
of training, and with selected horses, whose loins and hocks
should be exceptionally good to bear the rasseinbler at its
maximum, without which it is impossible to obtain this
movement.
s«
CANTER WITHOUT GAINING GROUND. 319
The thoroughbred Gant, by Gantelet out of Mile, de
Romanerie, did the canter to the rear as if it were play, and
after he had gone round the school at this pace he was as
fresh as before.
Baucher did not know or was not able to describe the
canter to the rear. The following, which is his definition of
it in the fourteenth edition of his " Method of Equitation,"
p. 155, evidently corresponds to the way he did it : — "In the
rein back at the canter the times are the same as those of the
ordinary canter ; but the fore legs, instead of gaining ground
when raised, are carried back, in order that the hind legs may
do the same retrograde movement immediately the fore legs
are placed on the ground."
Ho\\' could Baucher make such a description of a canter
to the rear, after having said that it was like the canter to
the front ? No doubt it is like the canter to the front, and
in the rasseinbhr it is in four time ; but it is precisely for this
reason that we cannot give the name of canter to a pace in
which the hind legs do not make their retrograde movement
before the fore legs are placed on the ground.
What, then, is this pace in which the two fore feet and
the two hind feet respectively come to the ground at the
same time. Under these conditions where is the canter ?
There is no need to be a great horseman to understand
that Baucher alludes to a pace of two time, the first time
being made by the hind quarters, the second by the forehand.
But that is not a canter ; it is plainly little jumps to the rear.
There cannot be a canter unless the fore legs and the hind
legs are respectively put down one after another ; and
further, when one of the hind legs is on the ground at the
same time as the opposite fore leg, they form the left
diagonal when the horse is cantering to the right, and the
right diagonal when he is cantering to the left.
Baucher invented the expression, " canter to the rear," but
320 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
he entirely misunderstood this pace, the proof being that
he never said with which leg the horse led or ought to
lead.
Having broken Gant for a lady, I taught him the canter to
the rear on the right leg so that the lady might be able to
keep him at this pace with her spur, which is to the left. I
have done more than this, for I succeeded in teaching the
thorough-bred Germinal, by Flavio, out of Pascale, to canter to
the rear either on one foot or on the other, according as I
wished. I claim the honour to be the first to obtain this
result. Whether a horse canters to the rear or to the
front, the rider ought always to be able to say on which
leg he is.
The canter to the rear with the near fore leading — although
it is a pace of four time — ought to be made in the same way
as if the horse was cantering to the front in three time —
namely, first time, off hind ; second time, right diagonal )
third time, near fore. The great difficulty is to prevent the
respective fore and hind legs being placed on the same
transverse line. The off hind should be placed in rear of the
near hind in order to preserve almost the same longitudinal
distance between the two legs, as in the ordinary canter. I
purposely say " nearly the same distance," because the strides
are shorter. I need not add that the off fore should be behind
the near fore, as in the forward canter.
We have seen that a stride of the canter consists of three
times on the ground — namely, hind leg support, diagonal
support, and fore leg support, as we see done with great
precision in a good hunting canter, or what we call a hand
gallop. But in the full speed gallop and in the canter without
gaining ground, or the canter to the rear, which are the two
extremes, the stride is in four time. In the canter to the left,
for instance, the two legs which form the right diagonal,
instead of touching the ground simultaneously, come down
CANTER WITHOUT GAINING GROUND. 321
one after another, the succession of steps being as follows :
off hind, near hind, off fore, near fore.
In the full speed gallop this fact is well marked, but the
speed of the pace prevents it being apparent. In the stationary
canter, and still more in the canter to the rear, it is much less
marked, and for this reason it is almost imperceptible. In
fact, at this pace the feet only graze the ground, and are drawn
back for only a few inches. Instruments of precision or
instantaneous photography would be required to prove this in
both cases, but the fact remains. We can therefore say that
in the full speed gallop and in the canter without gaining
ground and to the rear, there are four successive impulsions.
Let us note, however, that in the canter without gaining
ground, and in the canter to the rear, the diagonal acts in the
same way as in the ordinary canter, with the single difference
— which is a point I wish to bring to light — that the support
of the hind leg precedes the support of the fore leg of the
diagonal by an extremely short though actual interval*
To obtain the canter without gaining ground, I begin by
shortening the canter every day while maintaining the pro-
pulsion—that is to say, by pressing the horse with the legs up
to his bit, the play of which should be fine in proportion to
the extent of the rassembler. By gradually decreasing every
day the length of the strides, I obtain the canter without
gaining ground with impulse, but not with the horse getting
behind his bit. When the animal is behind his bit in the
canter, it is impossible to keep him up to his bit, and he
necessarily gets away from his rider by reining back.
* Fig. 68.— Germinal cantering to the rear ; second time. This photograph was
taken at the moment when the right diagonal was about to be used in support.
The near hind is already on the ground, but the off fore has not yet come down.
Hence the four times, the right diagonal making two beats instead of one.
We should note that even in this extreme rassembler the head remains a little
beyond the vertical. We can therefore see that the reining back is done by the
seat, and not by the reins, which are not drawn tightly.
21
322 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
We have now to convert the canter without gaining ground,
into the canter to the rear, for which purpose, when my horse
is cantering on one spot, with such ease and Hghtness that I
have no need for the reins, I try to bring him back an inch
or two by my seat and legs, and not by the reins. While my
legs are raising the horse, I seize the moment when he is in
the air to carry my seat back. I change the position of my
seat, and not that of the upper part of my body, by taking
nearly all my weight off the stirrups to put it on my buttocks.
The mobility of the horse is so great, at a moment when he is
in suspension,* that a movement of the rider is sufficient to
make him gain a litttle ground to the rear, which is enough to
begin the canter to the rear. By repeating and gradually
increasing these effects every day, we succeed in obtaining the
canter to the rear as I have described. If we try to get the
backward movement by the reins, the rassevibler will be
immediately lost, because the action of the reins will send the
hocks a long way to the rear ; their duty, on the contrary,
being to remain under the centre of the body. When
they are to the rear, the hind quarters being over-loaded
lose the mobility which enables them to gain ground to
the rear.
NEW SCHOOL MOVEMENTS.
I have invented a certain number of school exercises, and
will content myself by enumerating them. They are done
according to the same principles and by means of the "aids"
which have been used for the teaching of the preceding
movements : —
I. New Spanish walk, which consists in making a step
*This is the moment we have taken for changing the leg between the last time
of one stride and the first time of the next stride. It can be seized only with
difficulty, and then we can get everything out of a horse, because he is in the air.
A puff of wind can displace him.
2r
NEW SCHOOL MOVEMENTS. 325
forward and a step to the rear. The near fore, for instance,
extends itself and takes a step forward. Then the off fore
extends itself and also takes a pace to the front, but returns
by taking a step to the rear. Here the left diagonal advances
and the right diagonal goes back. I continue this movement
as long as I like. I then change the diagonal. The off leg,
in its turn, makes a step forward, and the near leg, after
having been extended to the front, takes a step to the rear, in
which case the left diagonal goes back. We can change the
diagonals as we wish.
2. Serpentine at the passage. This is the same movement
as the serpentine at the trot ; but it is evidently much more
difficult to do.
3. Canter on three legs, to the right and to the left.
4. " Two tracks " at the canter on three legs to both sides.
5. Ordinary voltes and pirouettes at the canter on three legs,
to the right and to the left.
6. Spanish trot in two beats on each leg. Up to the present
the Spanish trot has been done only in one time on e ach leg ;
that is to say, one time on the right and one on the left. In
the Spanish trot in two times, I make the horse successively do
two beats with the off fore, with the near fore extended, and
immediately afterwards two beats with the near fore, with the
off fore extended. The rider can continue this movement as
he likes. The horse naturally advances a little less in the
second time than in the first.
7. The Spanish trot in one and two times alternately, as
follows, the word leg being understood : right, left ; right, right ;
left, right ; left, left. I prolong this movement as I wish during
one or two turns round the school. I believe I am correct in
stating that this is the most complicated movement that has
been obtained in equitation.
8. The canter without gaining ground, and the canter to the
rear, on three legs. The great difficulty of this exercise is to
326 HIGH-SCHOOL RIDING.
obtain and preserve forward impulsion for the extended leg,
while the other three are going back.*
It is, of course, understood that all these movements are
done by means of the " aids " I have described. A repetition
of this would be useless to anyone who has attentively read
the preceding chapters.
SCHOOL HORSE FOR LADIES.
A high-school horse which is required for a lady, ought to
be particularly supple, and should work from right to left with
more ease than from left to right, because a lady rider does
the movements from left to right as easily as a man, for she
has on the left side the same " aids " as he has, namely, leg and
spur. But in the movements from right to left, her whip,
which is far less powerful than a leg armed with a spur, re-
places the right leg of a horseman. If the horse is not very
clever in movements from right to left, the action of the whip
will be insufficient. This fact holds good in all kinds of work.
Especially in the " two tracks," the lady's horse does not hold
himself so well, and is not so completely in hand from right to
left as from left to right. The changes of leg are also more
difficult from right to left. In the Spanish walk, the near leg
is not raised so high, and is not so well extended as the off leg.
Increased severity in the application of the whip will cause
* Figs. 69 and 70. — Germinal at the canter to the right on three legs to the rear.
Fig. 69, second time. The off hind has just come down after the near hind.
For obtaining the extension of the off fore, the spur gives the impulse that pre-
serves the seat, which makes the horse rein back. We can see that the horse's
head is a little beyond the perpendicular, and that the reins are slack.
Fig 70, third time. The near fore has just been put down behind its point of
departure, and the off fore, which would be in support during the fourth time,
remains in the air.
The bringing together of the three legs in support shows the extent of ground
which has been gained to the rear. The seat is continuously drawn back. The
reins, especially the off snaffle rein, are drawn up a little, in order to keep the
off fore in the air.
These illustrations enable us to appreciate the delicacy of the "aids."
u
u
SCHOOL HORSE FOR LADIES. 331
the horse to make a sudden start. Besides, when the lady-
uses her right arm energetically, to give a cut with the whip,
the left hand will almost always move, and will consequently
give a jerk to the mouth, which will make the animal assume
a wrong position.
Almost all ladies bring their horse's hind quarters round to
the right, because they make too much use of their powerful
"aid" on the left side ; their " aid " on the right side being too
weak to keep the animal straight.
To obviate these inconveniences, a lady's school horse ought
to work very easily from right to left.
A lady's hack ought to be the same on both sides.
332
CHAPTER IX.
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER.
BaucHER was certainly the greatest and most clever high-
school rider we have ever had.* There is no doubt that he
did not invent the high school, which is the result of the work
of many generations of horsemen, but he invented and co-
ordinated a new and astonishing method. Prior to his time,
no horseman had obtained such marvellous results. He con-
quered many difficulties, and removed a great number of
obstacles which a man who wishes to break-in a school horse
always meets.
He invented new exercises, which he did with remarkable
* As regards myself, I claim to be a follower of Baucher. My teacher,
Fran9ois Caron, was his pupil. I have thoroughly studied the method of
Baucher in all its parts. Without Baucher I would not know as much as I do of
riding.
I would be very ungrateful to mention the name of Baucher without at the
same time rendering well-merited homage to his rival, Victor Franconi, from
whom I have received many excellent lessons. By his pluck, strength of seat,
and by the impulse he gave to his horses, his style of equitation resembled much
more that of Count d'Aure than that of Baucher.
The names of the masters to whom the horsemen of to-day are beholden would
form a long list. France can boast of an admirable host of great horsemen. If
Italy can name Pignatelli ; England, Newcastle ; and Germany, Count von
Schweppe, France can put forward hundreds of illustrious names, at the head of
which shine — to speak only of bygone celebrities — such horsemen as Dupaty de
Clam, La Gueriniere, the Chevalier d'Abzac, the Marquis of Bigne, and others.
The School of Hanover, which is the most celebrated of foreign schools, is the
direct offspring of the great school of Versailles. Beyond all dispute, France is
the classic country of equitation.
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER. 333
precision. His method is specially admirable from the fact
that it keeps a horse sound by proper distribution of weight,
rational gymnastics, suppling, and a correct development of
his powers.* Also it has the great advantage over the old
methods of quickly giving results. Thus, with Baucher's
method, we can break a hack in two months, and a school
horse in eight or ten months. Formerly, the latter result took
two or three years to obtain ; and, besides, the old time horse-
men never attempted the difficulties which Baucher conquered.^f"
I go further, and say that they did not even know that such
difficulties existed.
We should therefore bow with gratitude before this master of
the equestrian art. Is this equivalent to saying that Baucher
should be exempt from criticism ? Certainly not ; and for
my part, I am far from agreeing with all his ideas. I even
think that it is my duty to oppose those proceedings of his
which I have found to be wrong. In this book I have had
occasion several times to show up certain mistakes of the great
horseman. I shall now criticise some of his opinions.
* I have adopted in my work what I call the three golden keys of Baucher's
method ; namely, his complete suppling exercises, with greater elevation of the
head and neck ; his attacks with the spurs, to enclose the horse ; and his
rassemhlci; which I have perfected.
Apart from this, I have worked more on the lines of the old school of Versailles
than on those of Baucher, in that I always advocate fast paces, and that the horse
should be allowed to extend himself.
t Up to the present time I have broken thirty-five school horses, which is more
than anyone else has done. Baucher, who died when he was seventy-four, broke
twenty-six. Being only fifty-six, I hope to double that number when I am as old
as the great rider. I have broken hundreds of hacks.
I do not pretend to be cleverer than my illustrious predecessors. I know that
before my time others have done as well, and perhaps better. I mention these facts
only to show the results of my method. I am certain that every horseman who
wishes to follow it will be able to obtain similar results, provided that he is properly
endowed by Nature, and that he loves horses.
Few authors have described a correct method of breaking in the proper sense of
the word. I have read all the books on equitation, and find that none of them
are perfect.
334 COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER.
Thus, in the first place, I say that Baucher's method, which
consists in keeping the horse completely and constantly closed
between the hands and legs of the rider, is dangerous for
people who are indifferent riders, and also for those who work
or break their first horses without being under the eye of a
master.* It is, therefore, not within the compass of everyone,
and perhaps it cannot be practised without trouble, except by
those who have seriously studied it.
Baucher says that the mouths and sides of all horses are the
same, which is an entirely erroneous idea. I maintain, on the
contrary, that it is impossible to find two horses whose mouths
and sides are equally sensitive. Without doubt, the difference,
like that between the leaves of a tree, may not be very apparent
in all cases, but it exists, and cannot be denied.
It is possible that we can succeed in making all horses
light in hand and sensitive to the spurs, but I deny that we
can give them all the same lightness and sensitiveness.
Baucher adds that in the case of a puller, his mouth is not
at fault, and that it is sufficient to change his equilibrium.
Let us test his statement by taking, for instance, racehorses
in training, and leaving them to make their own distribution
of weight, with their heads low, necks stretched out, and
croups high. What will happen ? Some will not go up to
the bridle and will run badly ; others will pull just enough to
run well ; and a third variety will pull too hard, and will run
away, notwithstanding the strength of their riders' arms. What
does this prove, except that they all have not the same
sensitiveness of mouth, as they are all in the same position ?
We should note that all horses in training are bitted in the
same way, namely, with a plain snaffle. We therefore cannot
blame the curb for their different ways of pulling.
The experiments I have made have thoroughly cleared up
* This is probably the reason why many true followers of Baucher have made
their horses restive.
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER. 335
this point, and I have no hesitation in laying down the
principle that the mouth of each horse has its own peculiar
degree of sensibility, no matter what is the pace, work, or
distribution of weight.
Thus, I owned and broke to high school work the thorough-
breds Redoubt by Parmesan, and Gant by Gantelet, out of
Mile, de la Romanerie, both of which had won races, I did
not get them until they were five years old, and I made them
remarkably good school horses.
Redoubt had a very light mouth, and could do the perfect
rassembler almost without my having to touch the reins.
Gant had a harder mouth, and required to have the reins drawn
tightly, in order to do the rassembler to the same extent.
Riding them alternately, I went to the training ground
behind Bagatelle, at a walk, trot, and canter, and observed,
during these paces, the same difference of mouth which I had
noticed in the manege^ when doing the finest high school work.
Having brought them on the race-course, with the curb
chain removed and the curb reins knotted on the neck, 1 sent
them a short preliminary canter. Both of them quickly got
into their racing position and speed. After that I sent them
a full speed gallop of about five furlongs, and they performed
in a manner which would have given no one the impression
that they had not galloped for eighteen months ; but each of
them showed in the full gallop the same difference of mouth
which they had done in the riding school and when hacking.
During the gallop on the race-course, Redoubt pulled just
enough to run well ; but Gant took a firm hold of the snaffle,
pulled hard, and tried to run away, I easily stopped the
former in a few strides, but I succeeded in pulling up the
atter only at the end of a hundred and fifty or two hundred
yards, and more by the voice than by the hands.
After the gallop, I walked them back to the stable to let
them catch their wind, and as soon as I arrived, I made them
336 COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER.
do their high school work without taking off their bridles.
Here, also, I found their respective mouths to be exactly the
same as before.
While hacking, these horses were light in hand, without
being on their haunches.* On the race-course they pulled
just as much as if they had never been taught high school
work ; and, having returned to the school with their hind legs
well under them, they were as light in hand as if they had
never been galloped on a race-course.
We should note that in the experiments which I have
just described, the respective weights, with these horses, were
distributed in three absolutely different ways.
1. When going to the course it was distributed in the
proper manner for hacking, and was the result of an ordinary
feeling on the reins.
2. During the gallop, the preponderance of weight was on
the forehand.
3. In the manege, on the resumption of high school work,
the preponderance was on the hind quarters. Consequently,
there were three modifications in the distribution of weight.
The application of the " aids " were also entirely different,
according to the nature of the work. But the essential point
on which I differ from Baucher is, that a horse's mouth
remains the same, no matter what is the work, use of the
"aids," or distribution of weight. In the three distributions of
weight I found the same difference of mouth.
I repeated this experiment with twenty thorough-breds
which had been broken for high school work, and they all
brought me to the same conclusion : that the nature of
the mouth does not vary according to the distribution of
weight.
It is sometimes evident that a horse which holds his head
low makes the rider carry his head and neck ; but if the rider
* Horizontal equilibrium is the equilibrium for hacking.
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER. 337
changes the distribution of weight by raising the head and
neck, they will not bear so heavily on his hands.
Baucher confused the sensitiveness of the mouth with the
lightness which results from a change in the position of the
head and neck.
Let us now consider the sides of a horse.
Who will believe that the sides of a common, heavy,
lymphatic horse are as sensitive as those of a strong, wiry and
free-going animal ? * It is possible to make the former do
almost the same exercises as the latter ; but at what cost ?
We would have to dig the spurs into him to make him move ;
but with the free-goer, the mere approach of the heels would
be enough.
A ticklish, impatient horse will never bear the spurs with
the same docility as a good-tempered, placid animal. In no
case can we succeed in completely changing the work of
nature. Further, a horse which is naturally ticklish, becomes
still more so from the continual contact of the spurs. It may
even happen that a horse which is not naturally ticklish,
becomes ticklish from the use of the spurs during breaking.
Also, a horse which has bad loins, weak hocks, or any other
defect, will not be cured by Baucher's method. Often his
imperfections will only be increased by the sufferings which
he will endure, on account of being made to take up certain
positions, as in ordinary reining in, without the pressure of the
legs,-f- or in the complete rassembler. Baucher, therefore,
was far from being right when he asserted that his method
cured all ills.
As a general rule, the weaker and more unsound a horse is,
the less should be expected from him, under pain of making
him incapable of any kind of work. With such an animal,
* We might as well believe that all men are equally ticklish.
t Besides, I have already said that we should not use the simple ramener
except with a high-spirited horse which goes freely up to his bridle.
22
338 COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER.
there is no question of fine equitation, for he cannot bear the
rassembler. We should simply require him to go forward,
and we should feel happy if we make him a passable hack.
Baucher appears to me to be absolutely wrong in stating
that we should destroy the " instinctive forces " of the horse,
and act only on the " transmitted forces " This theory is so
strange and so contrary to the nature of things, that I cannot
help thinking that the expression used by Baucher incorrectly
translated his thoughts.
The *' instinctive forces " are apparently the natural forces,
or muscular power. If it is destroyed, what remains ?
What are the " transmitted forces " of which Baucher talks ?
Whence do they come ? We can transmit an electric current
or a moral effect, but to transmit a force we must, first of all,
produce it, and we know that the rider should not display
force, because he ought always to remain supple ; and even if
he displayed force, it would be insignificant as compared to
that of the horse.
What means can the rider employ ? He has only his legs
and hands.*
Without doubt the legs awake the vigour of the horse when
they are well closed, but they do not add any force to
it. They simply stimulate him to put forth the energy he
possesses.
The hands ought not to display force. If, in an exceptional
case, they make an effort, its object will only be to thwart that
of the horse. They do not transmit force to him, but more or
less check his force.
Supposing that two jockeys are finishing almost together,
and that their horses are equally exhausted. If one of them is
very strong, he can, by displaying great energy of hands, legs,
and whip, appear to communicate the force of propulsion to
*The legs are "aids" of impulsion; the hands, "aids" of retention and
direction.
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER. 339
his horse, and thus obtain two or three powerful strides, which
will enable him to win. Such a force has the appearance of
being transmitted, but in reality the jockey simply stimulates
by his vigorous action, all the remaining energy of the horse,
and makes him go at his maximum speed for two or three
■seconds.
Let us take another case of horses being exhausted when
returning from a long hunt, and when going down a steep
incline, at the bottom of which there is a ditch, at which some
of them, not being well supported by their rider's legs, stumble
or fall. One of the riders, on the contrary, spurs his animal
sharply and thus prevents him making a mistake, by doing
which he appears to transmit force to him at that moment.
In reality, he only stimulates the energy of his horse^ whose
natural force saves them both.
Let us take a high school horse, when he is at the end of
his work and has lost his "go," as sometimes happens. If
I wish him to do some energetic movements, I am obliged to
have recourse to the spurs, and I use a certain amount of vigour
to make him answer to their attacks ; but instead of trans-
mitting force to him, I merely awaken his energy, which he
puts into action.
To .sum up : the rider does not transmit force to his horse,
whose natural forces he directs, moderates, or excites at his
pleasure.
I am inclined to think that Baucher simply wished to say
that whenever a horse tries to take the initiative in using his
own natural forces, the rider should stop or direct them,
especially if the animal wants to " play up," as, for instance, by
plunging, rearing, or spinning round. But w^hen a horse puts
forth all his energy to do a good walk, a grand trot, or a well-
marked canter, I don't think that we ought to try to destroy it.
Baucher neither destroyed nor transmitted forces ; he directed
them. He obtained control of the horse's powers by suppling
22*
340 COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER.
exercises, and by rational training, and consequently he ruled
his horse by preventing him using these forces in his own
way.
Finally, a horse can always escape from strength by strength,
in which case the rider will soon be exhausted. Therefore
the rider ought always try to prevent the horse knowing his
own strength, so that he may hinder him from using it against
himself. He can do this by feeling and divining in advance
the intentions of the animal. A rider who has tact foresees
the defences of his mount, feels them coming, and -wards
them off before the animal can make them.
Baucher, after having passed his life in breaking horses such
as Partisan, Buridan, Capitaine, Stades, and others, complains
that his horses were not always light in hand during changes
of direction. The reason which he gave was that, with his way
of working, he obtained only eqiiilibruim of the second kiJid,
which I call " imperfect eqiiilibriuvi " or " incomplete rassem-
bler." According to him, " equilibrium of the first kind,''
which I call "perfect equilibrium'' or ''complete rassembler," is
obtained by using the hands without the legs, or the legs with-
out the hands. But in this, Baucher seriously deceived him-
self, because the fact of his finding "equilibrium of the first
kind " towards the end of his career was due to the elevation
of the head and neck, which he finally adopted at a time when
he was no longer able to ride. He was not able to obtain the
complete rassembler by placing the head and neck of his
horses in the way he used to do. The head was too low, and
the neck was bent in the middle. Therefore it frequently hap-
pened that his horses were badly balanced.
It is simply absurd to say that the " complete rassembler "
can be obtained by the hands without the legs, or by the legs
without the hands.
We read on page 82 of the fourteenth and last edition of
Baucher's book that " my method places the horse so much
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER. 341
under the control of his rider that, by the combination of the
effects of the legs and hands, our slightest movements suffice
to direct the energy of this powerful animal, according to our
will." Nothing could be truer. But why does he maintain on
page 178 of the same edition, that the only true kind of riding
should be done by " legs without hands, and hands without
legs " ? How did he not see that these two assertions are con-
tradictory ? The office of the legs of the rider is to make the
horse energetic in his hind quarters, and that of the hands, to
make him "amiable in his mouth." Without the simulta-
neous co-operation of these two " aids," we may do wonderful
tricks, but not good horsemanship.
The fact that Baucher broke his horses with the two " aids,"
and afterwards used only one of them, proves that he deceived
himself by thinking that he had obtained perfect equilibrium
with " legs w^ithout hands and hands without legs." But as
the legs are necessary for impulsion and the hands for direc-
tion, he hastened to go back to the two " aids."
Under these conditions, why did he abandon an "aid" which
he was obliged to use every moment ? Is the proof required ?
When working on " two tracks " without the legs, there will be
nothing to indicate to the horse that his haunches should move,
especially if we want him to do the "two tracks" at the canter
or passage. If we demand the Spanish trot without legs, the
horse will raise his fore legs a little without gaining ground,
but nothing will give him the impulsion necessary for the trot.
Change the " aids," and demand the same work without using
the hands. The action of the legs to obtain the elevation and
extension of the fore legs will have the result of sending the
horse abruptly forvv^ard, because there is nothing to restrain
him and to raise the fore hand. It will be the same in all
other movements.
I admit, however, that when the education of the school
horse has been carried to its highest degree of perfection, he
342 COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER.
will do, so to speak, all the movements without the help of the
" aids, " it being sufficient to indicate to him what he has got
to do, by the slightest approach of the leg, with the reins slack
on his neck. In fact, this is a question of nuances (minute dif-
ferences) : but all art is made up of miances.
Be that as it may ; but since Baucher acknowledges that he
could get only the "equilibrium of the second kind" (incomplete
rassenihler), I am justified in thinking that my school horses
are superior to his ; because, for the last ten years, I have ob-
tained "equilibrium of the first kind " (complete rasseniblev). I
hasten to add that, thanks to Baucher, I succeeded in finding
this rassembler, which is possible only when the head and neck
are kept very high. Also, when I say that my school horses
are superior to those of the illustrious master, I do not pretend
that they were more precise in their movements than his, which
were perfectly correct. I wish simply to say that I obtained
the same school movements in as good form as my learned pre-
decessor, but with greater elevation of head, neck, and limbs ;
that is to say, with more complete equilibrium, which conse-
quently required less effort, and above all things with more
impulsion.
In his books on equitation, Baucher said little about riding
in the open. This was an evident omission.
The fact is that Baucher never rode outside. Without
being his pupil, I followed and studied him during his journeys
to i\ustria, Italy, Switzerland, etc., from 1847 to 1850, But
during these three years I never saw him go out on horseback.
It has been very incorrectly stated that his seat in the saddle
was weak, and for this reason he was afraid to ride hacking or
hunting. I admit that he was not such a fine rough rider, and
had not such a strong seat as the Count d'Aure, but that does
not prove he was afraid to ride outside. The fact that he
broke many horses proves that he had a strong seat ; because
there are always more or less violent struggles during break-
COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER. 343
ing. We must therefore seek elsewhere for the reason which
prevented Baucher from riding in the open.
Bauclier being a reformer and consequently a seeker, had
no pleasure in leaving a horse to himself, as is done when
hacking. He devoted all his life to his work in order to show
us the way, which was the only thing that interested him,
Riding without working was only a weariness to him. There-
fore he never studied the character or manner of riding
a hack or hunter ; or the enormous difference between a
" closed-in " school horse and an ordinary saddle horse, which
is left a good deal to himself.
As he did not ride outside, he never rode his horses at
fast paces, which was wrong ; because a horse passes very
easily from an extended position to the rasseuibler. Full
speed, provided that it is not too prolonged, has the advan-
tage of allowing the animal to extend himself, and conse-
quently to obtain rest, by changing his equilibrium, while at
the same time it develops and strengthens his lungs.
The chief fault of Baucher was that of keeping his horse
constantly "enclosed." I think we ought to observe the
principle of letting the horse extend himself after each con-
cession, during breaking. Finally, I maintain that as a
general rule during breaking, we should accustom our mount
to extend himself from time to time at the walk, trot and
canter. Every form of equilibrium and position ends by
fatiguing the horse. If we change one of them, the horse will
return to it with pleasure.
As a last observation I may remark that on page 103 of the
fourteenth edition of his book, Baucher repeats a conversation
which he had at Berlin with some German officers who were
supposed to know something about horses. They said : " We
like to have our horses in front of the hand." Baucher
replied : " I like mine to be behind the hand, and in front of
the legs."
344 COMMENTARIES ON BAUCHER.
Personally, I share neither the opinion of the German
officers nor that of Baucher. The horse ought to be in front of
the legs and lightly on the hand. It is always a question of
nuances ; at least, when army horses have not been con-
sidered, because with them there is something quite different
from a nuance, and in this case I differ entirely from Baucher.
I even dare to say that the single fact of his stating that
horses should be behind the hand, ought to be sufficient to
exclude his method from the army. Such an opinion put into
practice would only make the horse hesitating ; because the
hand directs him. The horse always hesitates when he does
not feel the hand. But if he is behind the hand he does not
feel the reins. The army horse ought always to go freely up
to his bridle {on the hand).
These are the principal points of Baucher's method with
which I disagree. Nevertheless, I have a sincere admiration
for him.
Baucher was a creator, and every one who rides ought to
respect him as a master. He had the great merit of not
describing anything which he could not do. Many who have
come after him have written at great length on riding, and
often with the object of describing magnificent movements
which they have never done. Baucher proved the superiority
of his theory by putting it into practice.
345
CHAPTER X.
TESTS OF HORSEMANSHIP.
To be an accomplished rider, or at least to be a fair per-
former in the saddle, a man should be able to pass the follow-
ing tests : —
1. To ride a difficult horse.
2. To ride in a steeplechase.
3. To ride a trotting match.
4. To ride a flat race.
5. To be able to break and ride a school horse.
Riding a difficult horse, when it is only a question of
remaining on his back, is simply an affair of strength of seat
and pluck. It is sufficient to be a good rider and a bit of a
dare-devil. But we require a knowledge of reasoned-out
equitation to anticipate and thwart his defences.
I place steeplechase riding in the second rank, although it
requires great strength of seat and pluck. A cross-country
jockey has to be a good rider, rather than a good horseman ;
but steeplechase riding requires less delicacy of handling and
tact than the following tests.
I think match trotting comes in the third rank as regards
judgment and knowledge. It is evident that if the rider of a
trotter cannot accurately tell when his horse is at the top of
his speed, he will continue to push him, and will make him
break into the gallop. But judgment of pace is much more
346 TESTS OF HORSEMANSHIP.
easy in trotting than in flat-race riding, to succeed in which a
jockey should know what is the highest speed of his horse,
should always keep near it, and should demand it only at the
critical moment.
I put flat-race riding in the fourth rank, considering that it
is truly an art which only such men as F. Archer, Watts,
Cannon, Webb and others can acquire. A flat-race jockey
has to be an exceedingly good judge of pace, and if he does
not know what speed his animal can maintain without becom-
ing exhausted, he will never make a name for himself. When
we think that the highest speed of a racehorse is about five
furlongs in a minute, we will understand how difficult it is tO'
judge pace within a second or two.
If it is simply a matter of one following the other, the first
comer can do it. The difficulty is to set and maintain the
pace which suits the horse best, and if the jockey cannot place
him as he likes, without fighting with him, he will do no
good.
If the jockey takes too strong a bearing on the reins, the
horse will exhaust himself by the efforts he makes against the
hands, in which case his mouth suffers much less than his loins
and hocks, the result being that the animal will not be able to^
finish in good style. If, on the contrary, the jockey does not
keep a proper hold of his horse's head, the animal will go too-
fast, and will be unable to struggle at the critical moment.
The jockey should therefore have sufficient sense not to fall
into either of these extremes.
Breaking a school horse comes under the last term. To
succeed at it, a man should possess knowledge, delicacy of
touch and tact to a supreme degree, and should have an exact
acquaintance with the capabilities of a horse, so that he may
break him without making him unsound.
In the breaking of a school horse, we require not only a
perfect knowledge of the effects of the hands and legs, but we
TESTS OF HORSEMANSHIP. 347
should also, by our seat, be able to feel the slightest move-
ments of the hind quarters, for we learn by our seat what
passes under us. Consequently, we can check the slightest
fault, and immediately reward the faintest sign of good will.
This is the entire secret of breaking.
Further, the riding master who breaks a school horse, acts
alone, and depends only on himself Every fault committed
and every good movement done are his work. This is true,
only in the school.
The racehorse, to mention his case only, passes through
many hands, such as those of trainers, riding lads, and jockeys,
and if the animal commits a fault with any of them, the man
can put it down to his next-door neighbour. Only the school
horse is the exclusive work of the person who broke him.
Count d'Aure replied one day to a criticism of Baucher
that, " I am not a horse breaker." Then, what did he break ?
Did the word breaker jar on his ears ? For my part, I know
no other. Of course we should not regard in the same light
the horseman who breaks a horse in good style, as the groom
who takes the rough edge off him, and I venture to say that
no one can be a real horseman, if he cannot break-in a horse.
Breaking is the horseman's touchstone. The broken horse is
the proof of the breaker.
348
CHAPTER XL
WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS.
I WAS giving performances at Brussels, when Count
d'Oultremont asked me to give an exhibition with my horses
at the Royal Circle of which he was president.
He expressed the desire that this performance would be
accompanied by explanatory remarks, " Your ' aids ' are so
delicate," he said to me, " that we do not always see the
precise means you arrive at a result which we witness. We
wish to know how you obtain so much with such a small
effort. Give us explanations."
The exhibition took place one afternoon in the month of
December, 1890. All the superior officers who were members
■of the Circle were present. I worked my horses, but not as in
a public show. Sometimes placing my mount in a good
position to obtain the desired result under correct conditions ;
sometimes placing him in a bad position, in order to show its
fallacy by making a mistake ; I accompanied each part of the
work by explanations, which were practically confirmed on the
spot.
After the performance, the officers of the second regiment
of Guides asked me, through Commandant Five, to be good
enough to make out a course of instruction for their use. I
accepted with great pleasure, and the riding school of the
2nd Guides was placed at my disposal every day from ten
WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS. 349
o'clock to half-past twelve. The course consisted of thirty
lessons.*
The following was the programme which I laid down, and
which was carried out consecutively : —
2ND Regiment of Guides
of H. M. the King of the Belgians.
PROGRAMME OF HORSE-BREAKING,
done under the direction of
Mr. James Fillis.
1st lesson.
Lunging the horse for some days, to the right and to
the left, to make him obedient.
1. Putting him in hand. Flexion of the jaw, standing still,
and then in movement. (The right hand holding both
reins of the* bridle at two inches from the bit, and high,
in order to raise the neck. The left snaffle rein in the
left hand, which is carried forward in opposition to the
right hand.)
Pat the horse on the neck and begin again as soon as he
yields.^,
2. Make the horse yield to the right leg and to the left leg.
2ND LESSON.
1. Flexions of the jaw, the man being on foot; same
flexions when mounted.
2. Short trot : {a) On the left diagonal biped.
„ „ {b) On the right diagonal biped.
Rising in the stirrups at the trot.
• 3. Shoulder-in : To the right hand, and to the left hand.
4. Reversed volte.
* It was the same with the ist Regiment of Guides, who placed their manege at
my disposal every day from nine till half-past ten.
350 WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS.
3RD LESSON.
1. Repetition of the 2nd lesson.
2. Change of the diagonal hand, to two-thirds of the change
of hand, ; making the horse yield to the leg on two
tracks (to both hands).
3. Shoulder-in : Repeat this movement to both hands.
4TH LESSON,
1. Repetition of the 3rd lesson.
2. Short trot, and change of hand on the diagonal.
3. Canter to the right and to the left.
4. Getting the horse into hand.
5TH LESSON.
1. Repetition of the 4th lesson.
2. Canter on the diagonal.
3. Circling.
4. Change of hand by passing into the trot.
5. Collecting the horse.
6th LESSON.
1. Lateral flexion of the head on the neck (the reins held as
in the flexion of the jaw).
2. Canter on the diagonal.
3. Circling and changing the hand.
4. Shoulder-in.
5. Canter on a straight line and change of hand.
6. Collecting the horse.
7TH & 8X11 LESSONS.
1. Collected trot.
2. Direct and lateral flexions on foot.
WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS. 35 1
Repeat the flexions while moving.
Short trot. Collecting the horse.
Canter on the inward and outward leg.
Shoulder-in.
Shoulder to the wall.
Rasseuibler while mo\-ing.
9TH LESSON.
J. Repetition of the 7th lesson.
2. Cadence of the trot, and continued rasseuibler.
3. Increase the collection.
lOTH LESSON.
1. The same order of work. '
2. Rassemblc'd trot, and movements on two tracks.
3. Half a turn on the haunches.
IITH LESSON.
1, Repetition of the preceding lesson.
2. Canter on the inward and outward leg in a straight line
I2TH, 13TH, & I4TH LESSONS.
J, Repetition of the nth lesson.
15TH LESSON.
1. Repetition of the preceding work.
2. Increase of the rassevibkr and of collection.
3. Shoulder-in on the circle.
4. Shoulder-out on the circle.
5. Starting into the canter from the halt.
i6th LESSON.
1, Short trot. Collecting the horse.
2. Flexion with the curb, on foot.
352 WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS.
3. School walk : Shoulder-in.
„ „ Shoulder-out. Change of hand on two
tracks.
4. The same movements on the circle.
5. Canter on the inward and outward leg.
6. Changes of hand by passing to the trot.
7. A higher degree of collection.
I7TH LESSON.
1. Same succession of work.
2. Increased collection.
3. Half turn on the haunches.
I 8th lesson.
Repetition of the preceding lesson.
19TH lesson.
1. Collecting the horse at the trot
2. Flexions with the curb on foot.
3. Shoulder-in and shoulder-out at the school trot.
4. Half turn on the shoulders.
5. Canter on the inward and outward leg.
6. Change of hand at the canter, by arriving at the opposite
track, at the walk, and starting at the canter by the
position of the head (to each hand).
7. On a straight line : canter to the right : a few strides —
at the walk — canter to the left — repeat several times
the same movement.
8. On the circle : Shoulder in — shoulder-out.
9. At the canter : Shoulder-in. (Never shoulder-out at the
canter, so as not to accustom the horse to go sideways.)-
10. At the walk : getting the horse completely in hand.
WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS. 353
20TH LESSON.
1. Trot with the horse in hand.
2. Flexion with the curb on foot.
3. School walk : shoulder-in.
shoulder-out. Change of hand on two
tracks.
4. Same movements on the circle.
5. Canter on the inward and outward leg. Change of hand
by passing to the trot.
6. Getting the horse completely in hand.
21ST LESSON.
1. Flexions with the curb (by going with the head high).
2. Rassenihler — school trot — shoulder-in— shoulder-out.
3. Halting— Reining back— Forward. (Repeat the same
movement several times).
4. School walk : demi-volte and shoulder-in by finishing the
demi-volte (to both hands).
5. Canter on a straight line with both fore legs alternately
leading.
Change of hand at the canter by passing into the walk and
changing the leg.
6. Demi-volte at the canter ; change of leg at the track.
7. Shoulder-in, a canter, to both hands.
8. Circling at the canter on the inward and outward leg.
9. Collecting the horse completely at the walk.
22ND LESSON.
1. Repetition of the preceding lesson.
2. Canter down the centre.
Reversed volte, straightening the horse on the same leg,
change of leg.
23
354 WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS.
3. Ordinary volte with shoulder in, same movement to the
other hand.
4. Walk.
5. Canter to the right, canter to the left, three strides on
each leg.
6. Collecting the horse.
7. Preparation for the passage.
23RD LESSON.
1. Repetition of the preceding lesson.
2. Getting the horse more completely in hand than before,
to finish.
3. Preparation for the passage.
24TH LESSON.
1. Repetition of the 22nd lesson.
2. Each day more complete rassenibler than before, so as
to obtain the passage.
25TH LESSON.
1. Repetition of the 22nd lesson.
2. Getting the horse more completely in hand than before,
to finish.
26TH, 27TH, 28TH, 29TH, AND 30TH LESSONS.
1. Repetition of the 22nd lesson. Getting the horse in
hand inore and more completely.
2. A few strides of the passage, pat the horse on the neck,
begin again.
F. DE Hase, Commandant Adjutant-Major.
Brussels, 5th January, 1891.
The results were excellent, as the following letter shows,
and I most cordially thank the gentlemen who signed it : —
WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS. 355
" Dear Mr. Fillis, —
" At the moment when you are going to bring out a
new edition of your ' Breaking and Riding,' we are anxious
to express our admiration of the excellent principles you have
taught us.
" You have shown us, in breaking, how to combine reasoned-
out energy with victorious patience.
" No more excitement ! No intemperate punishment, which
is prejudicial to success.
" Also, thanks to your method and your instruction, we
have succeeded in thirty lessons to break horses of entirely
different tempers without injuring them, and we fully recog-
nise that the principles we previously employed did not give
us such rapid and satisfactory results.
" We are anxious, dear Mr. Fillis, to add our tribute to the
numerous testimonies of admiration which you have received
everywhere, and we beg you to accept the expression of our
distinguished regards.
" F. DE Hase, Commandant Adjutant-Major.
"Lambert, Captain Commandant.
" Five, Commandant.
"Cec. Herg, Lieutenant.
" DE FormanoI, Captain.
"P. Biourge, 1st Lieutenant.
" Le Grand, Lieutenant.
" G. Jeidelo, Lieutenant.
" M. Leclerq, Captain.
" F. DOCQ, Lieutenant.
" COMTE Jean de Merod, ist Lieutenant.
" M. d'Hespel, ist Lieutenant.
" R. Pycke, 1st Lieutenant.
" Vanloquere, 1st Lieutenant.
" BlA, Captain."
356 WITH BELGIAN OFFICERS.
I ought to mention that in Belgium no one ever thought of
blaming me for riding in a circus, which is considered in that
country to be the only place for equestrian work, and that it
is as natural for a horseman to ride in a circus, as for a lyric
artist to show himself at the opera, or for an Academician to
dress himself in green, in order to croak out an address under
the cupola of the Institute. I ought also to mention that at
Brussels I did not meet any military distrust of civilians.
The people only required a riding master to thoroughly
know what he taught. Cavalry officers are obliged to learn
not only riding, but also an infinite number of other things
which make it very difficult for them to afford time to study
equestrian science to its utmost limits. Hence the necessity
for specialising, as well for the instruction of the military rider
as for others. I believe I faithfully convey the opinions, on
these matters, of the Belgian cavalry officers whom I had the
honour of meeting.
INDEX
" Aids," 19.
America, 25.
Amour, 251.
Andrews, H., 203.
Arab horses, 158.
Archer, Fred, 208, 346.
Archiduc, 206.
Army horse, the, 213-235.
Baron Finot, 202.
,, de Vaux, 171.
Baucher, 43, 44, 56, 58, 62, 63, 64, 65,
82, 105, 106, no, 126, 156, 171, 261,
306, 319, 332-344-
Baudres, 204.
Beginners, 23.
Belgian officers, 348-356.
Bit, getting behind the, 117.
Bitting, 10.
Bucking, 78.
Buridan, 340.
Cannon, 346.
Canter on three legs, 302-305.
„ , the, 153-163, 180.
,, to the rear, 314, 325,
,, when rassemdW d, 261.
,, without gaining ground, 314,
325-
Cantering, "false," 168.
Capitaine, 340.
Caron, Francois, 332.
Carrots, 6, 70.
Castillon, 178.
Changes of direction, 87, 166.
„ leg, 166-172, 270-275.
Chevalier d' Abzac, 332.
Clocher, 178.
Close work, 40.
Collecting a horse, 44, 123.
Count d'Aure, 332, 342, 347.
,, von Schweppe, 332.
Counter-demi-volte, 92.
" Cracking Nuts," 126.
Crimea, the, 214.
Curb, 10, 150, 198.
,, chain, 13.
"Daisy cutting," 52, 173, 179.
Defences, 82, 281.
DeDii-voUes, 91, 163.
Diagonal effects, 109.
Direction, changes of, 87, 166.
Doiibler, 90.
Dozule, 151.
England, 25.
English stiffness, 22.
Equestrian tact, 129, 130.
Equilibrium, 336, 340, 342.
Face, expression of, 6.
Feeding, 4, 226, 227.
Fishing rod, 53.
Flat racing, 206-209.
Flexions, direct, 44.
,, , lateral. 96.
Fra Diavolo, 206.
Franconi, Victor, 332.
Gallop, 180.
Gant, 319, 320, 335.
358
INDEX.
Gantelet, 17S.
Gaulois, Si.
German stiffness, 22.
Germans, 22. 235.
Germinal, 252, 261. 276, 305. 320.
321, 326.
Girthing up, 69.
" Give and take,'" 125.
Hack, the. i 72-1 S3.
Half-rear, 79.
Halt, S5.
Hand, behind the, 343.
,, , getting horse in, 125.
,, , in front of the, 343.
,, , on the, 126.
" Hands,"" 4S.
Hatchet, 203.
Head about, throwing the, iSS.
Hea\y in front, 53.
Heels, 2.
High-school riding, 236-331.
Horse, cold, 176.
,, , hot, 176, iSi.
., , intelligence of the, 5.
,, , sluggish, 175.
„ , the, I.
„ , the Armj", 213-235.
Horsemanship, tests of, 345.
,, , high-school, 221.
Horses, impetuous, S, 175.
,, , nervous, 184.
,, with vices, 1S4-194.
sides, 337.
Hiunming a tune, 29S.
Hunter, English, 211.
,, , the, 210-212.
Hurdle racing, 202.
Imincbilite, 81.
Impetuous horses, S, 175.
Intelligence of the horse. 5.
Jockeys, 202, 207-209, 33S.
Jumping, 195-205.
La Giiennirc, 2SS, 332.
Ladies, 3, 163.
Lady, putting up a, 29.
Lady's dress, 27.
,, school horse, 326.
Latuade, 79.
Lateral effects, loS.
Lenoble du Theil, 177.
Little Duck, 207.
Louis d'Or, 207. •
Lunging a horse, 32.
" Making Mixh of a Horse," 8.
Man, I.
Mares, 3.
Markir, 177, 252, 276, 2S2, 2S7.
Marquis de Eigne, 332.
Martingale, 13.
Memory, horses", 114.
Mount, making quiet to, 66.
Mounting, 66.
Mouth, 49, 50, 334-336-
,, , hard and soft side of, 78.
Negro, 296.
Xer^-ous horses, 1 84.
New school movements, 322.
„ „ , the, 300, 301.
Newcastle, 332.
Normand}- horses, 217, 220.
" Nuts, cracking,'" 126.
Paradox, 20S.
Parmesan, 178.
Partisan, 340.
Pascal, 151.
Passage, 275-301.
Passage to the rear, 305.
Pats on the neck, 8.
Piaffer, 275-301.
,, , see-saw, 306.
Pignatelli, 332.
Pirouettes, 117, 246, 262.
,, with the feet crossed, 246.
,, , reversed, iii, 117, 245,
246.
INDEX.
359
Pirouettes, reversed, on three legs, 245.
Pivot, making horse, no.
" Playing up," 82, 281.
Plunging, 42.
Fointe, 79.
Pudeldressiruiig, 298.
Pulling, 334-336.
Punishment, 9, 1 1 2.
Racing, flat, 206-209.
Kainener, 124, 125.
Rassembler, 124, 127, 129, 130-132.
Rearing, 42, 79, 80.
Redoubt, 335.
Rein back, 119, 247.
Reining back without reins, 247.
Reins, how to hold the, 72.
Remounts, 215-233.
Reward, 9, 112.
Riding, high school, 236-331.
,, a horse first time, 78.
,, , ordinary riding, 32-183.
Rocking the forehand, 248.
,, ,, haunches, 249.
Rotation of croup and shoulders, 108.
" Routined,'' 251.
Run-aways, 189-194.
Running back, 43.
Saddles, 15, 28.
School riding, high, 236-331.
,, walk, 118.
Seat, lady's, 24.
,, , man's, 18.
See-saw piaffer, 306,
Serpentine, 302, 325.
Shoulder-in, 135-140, 260.
Shying, 187.
Side-steps, 133.
Snaffle, 10, 198.
Spanish trot, 251-260, 301, 325.
,, walk, 237.
,, ,, , new, 322.
Spurs, iS, 113, 115,288, 296.
Stades, 306, 340.
Standing still, 85.
Steeplechasing, 202.
Stirrups, 15.
,, , length of, 21.
Swimming horses, 230.
"Take and Give," 125.
Thorough -breds, i, 2, 177-179, 183,
217-219, 222.
Tongue over bit, 49.
Trot, the, 140-153.
Trotters, 150, 217.
" Two tracks," 133-140.
Vermouth, 178.
Vices, horses with, 184-194.
Voltes, 90, 118, 163.
,, , reversed, 118.
Walk, 85.
,, , school, 118.
Watts, 207, 346.
Webb, 346.
Whip, 18, 76, 113, 298, 300.
,, , teaching by the, 76.
ZuT, 178.
/
inary Medicine
jsdicine at
20
North GiciiLUii, uir* wiovio
U-'^-.
m
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11